Siemens Sinamics V20 Manual 06 2018

___________________
Preface
Fundamental safety
___________________
instructions 1
___________________
Introduction 2
SINAMICS
___________________
Mechanical installation 3
SINAMICS V20 Inverter ___________________ 4
Electrical installation
___________________
Commissioning via the built-
in BOP 5
Operating Instructions
Commissioning using
SINAMICS V20 Smart 6
Access
___________________
Communicating with the PLC 7
___________________
Parameter list 8
___________________
Faults and alarms 9
___________________
Technical specifications A
___________________
Options and spare parts B
___________________
General license conditions C
06/2018
A5E34559884-010
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG A5E34559884-010 Copyright © Siemens AG 2014 - 2018.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 06/2018 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface
Purpose of this manual

This manual provides you with information about the proper installation, commissioning,
operation, and maintenance of SINAMICS V20 inverters.
SINAMICS V20 user documentation components
Document Content Available languages

Operating Instructions (this manual) English
Chinese
French
German
Italian
Korean
Portuguese
Spanish
Compact Operating Instructions Describes how you install, operate, and per- English
form basic commissioning of the SINAMICS Chinese
V20 inverter
Product Information Describes how you install and operate the English
following options or spare parts: Chinese
• Parameter Loaders Turkish (for SINAMICS V20 Smart
• Dynamic Braking Modules Access only)
• External Basic Operator Panels (BOPs)
• BOP Interface Modules
• Migration mounting kit
• Shield Connection Kits
• SINAMICS V20 Smart Access
• I/O Extension Module
• Replacement Fans
SINAMICS V20 Inverter

Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E34559884-010 3
Preface
Product maintenance
The components are subject to continuous further development within the scope of product
maintenance (improvements to robustness, discontinuations of components, etc).
These further developments are "spare parts-compatible" and do not change the article
number.
In the scope of such spare parts-compatible further developments, connector positions are
sometimes changed slightly. This does not cause any problems with proper use of the
components. Please take this fact into consideration in special installation situations (e.g.
allow sufficient clearance for the cable length).
Use of third-party products

This document contains recommendations relating to third-party products. Siemens accepts
the fundamental suitability of these third-party products.
You can use equivalent products from other manufacturers.
Siemens does not accept any warranty for the properties of third-party products.
Environmental protection
Waste electrical products cannot be disposed of with household waste. Recycle where
facilities exist. Check with your local authority or retailer for recycling advice.
Technical support
Country Hotline
China +86 400 810 4288
France +33 0821 801 122
Germany +49 (0) 911 895 7222
Italy +39 (02) 24362000
Brazil +55 11 3833 4040
India +91 22 2760 0150
Korea +82 2 3450 7114
Turkey +90 (216) 4440747
United States of America +1 423 262 5710
Poland +48 22 870 8200
Further service contact information: Support contacts
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps)

4 Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E34559884-010
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Fundamental safety instructions .............................................................................................................. 9
1.1 General safety instructions ....................................................................................................... 9
1.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge ......................................14
1.3 Warranty and liability for application examples ......................................................................14
1.4 Industrial security ....................................................................................................................15
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems....................................................................................16
2 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 17
2.1 Components of the inverter system ........................................................................................17
2.2 Inverter rating plate .................................................................................................................19
3 Mechanical installation .......................................................................................................................... 21
3.1 Mounting orientation and clearance........................................................................................21
3.2 Cabinet panel mounting ..........................................................................................................22
3.3 SINAMICS V20 Flat Plate variant ...........................................................................................25
3.4 Push-through mounting (frame sizes B ... E) ..........................................................................27
3.5 DIN rail mounting (frame sizes AA ... B) .................................................................................30
4 Electrical installation.............................................................................................................................. 33
4.1 Typical system connections ....................................................................................................34
4.2 Terminal description................................................................................................................39
4.3 EMC-compliant installation .....................................................................................................45
4.4 EMC-compliant cabinet design ...............................................................................................48
5 Commissioning via the built-in BOP....................................................................................................... 51
5.1 The built-in Basic Operator Panel (BOP) ................................................................................51
5.1.1 Introduction to the built-in BOP ...............................................................................................51
5.1.2 Inverter menu structure ...........................................................................................................53
5.1.3 Viewing inverter status ............................................................................................................55
5.1.4 Editing parameters ..................................................................................................................56
5.1.5 Screen displays .......................................................................................................................58
5.1.6 LED states ..............................................................................................................................59
5.2 Checking before power-on ......................................................................................................60
5.3 Setting the 50/60 Hz selection menu ......................................................................................60
5.4 Starting the motor for test run .................................................................................................61
5.5 Quick commissioning ..............................................................................................................62

Table of contents
5.5.1 Quick commissioning through the setup menu ...................................................................... 62

5.5.1.1 Structure of the setup menu................................................................................................... 62
5.5.1.2 Setting motor data .................................................................................................................. 63
5.5.1.3 Setting connection macros ..................................................................................................... 65
5.5.1.4 Setting application macros ..................................................................................................... 76
5.5.1.5 Setting common parameters .................................................................................................. 78
5.5.2 Quick commissioning through the parameter menu .............................................................. 79
5.6 Function commissioning ........................................................................................................ 83
5.6.1 Overview of inverter functions................................................................................................ 83
5.6.2 Commissioning basic functions.............................................................................................. 85
5.6.2.1 Selecting the stop mode ........................................................................................................ 85
5.6.2.2 Running the inverter in JOG mode ........................................................................................ 87
5.6.2.3 Setting the voltage boost ....................................................................................................... 89
5.6.2.4 Setting the PID controller ....................................................................................................... 91
5.6.2.5 Setting the braking function ................................................................................................... 93
5.6.2.6 Setting the ramp time ........................................................................................................... 102
5.6.2.7 Setting the Imax controller ................................................................................................... 104
5.6.2.8 Setting the Vdc controller ..................................................................................................... 105
5.6.2.9 Setting the load torque monitoring function ......................................................................... 106
5.6.3 Commissioning advanced functions .................................................................................... 108
5.6.3.1 Starting the motor in super torque mode ............................................................................. 108
5.6.3.2 Starting the motor in hammer start mode ............................................................................ 109
5.6.3.3 Starting the motor in blockage clearing mode ..................................................................... 111
5.6.3.4 Running the inverter in economy mode ............................................................................... 113
5.6.3.5 Setting the UL508C/UL61800-5-1-compliant motor overtemperature protection ................ 114
5.6.3.6 Setting the free function blocks (FFBs) ................................................................................ 115
5.6.3.7 Setting the flying start function ............................................................................................. 116
5.6.3.8 Setting the automatic restart function .................................................................................. 117
5.6.3.9 Running the inverter in frost protection mode ...................................................................... 118
5.6.3.10 Running the inverter in condensation protection mode ....................................................... 119
5.6.3.11 Running the inverter in sleep mode ..................................................................................... 120
5.6.3.12 Setting the wobble generator ............................................................................................... 122
5.6.3.13 Running the inverter in motor staging mode ........................................................................ 123
5.6.3.14 Running the inverter in cavitation protection mode.............................................................. 126
5.6.3.15 Setting the user default parameter set ................................................................................. 127
5.6.3.16 Setting the dual ramp function ............................................................................................. 128
5.6.3.17 Setting the DC coupling function.......................................................................................... 129
5.6.3.18 Setting high/low overload (HO/LO) mode ............................................................................ 132
5.7 Restoring to defaults ............................................................................................................ 133
6 Commissioning using SINAMICS V20 Smart Access............................................................................135
6.1 System requirements ........................................................................................................... 136
6.2 Accessing the SINAMICS V20 Web pages ......................................................................... 136
6.2.1 Overview of the steps .......................................................................................................... 136
6.2.2 Fitting SINAMICS V20 Smart Access to the inverter ........................................................... 137
6.2.3 Establishing the wireless network connection ..................................................................... 137
6.2.4 Accessing the Web pages ................................................................................................... 139
6.3 Overview of the Web pages ................................................................................................. 140
6.4 View connection status ........................................................................................................ 141

Table of contents
6.5 Viewing inverter information .................................................................................................141

6.6 Making optional Web access settings ...................................................................................142
6.6.1 Configuring Wi-Fi ..................................................................................................................142
6.6.2 Changing the display language ............................................................................................144
6.6.3 Synchronizing the time..........................................................................................................144
6.6.4 Upgrading .............................................................................................................................144
6.6.5 Viewing additional information ..............................................................................................145
6.7 Quick commissioning ............................................................................................................145
6.8 Setting parameters................................................................................................................150
6.9 Starting motor test run (JOG/HAND) ....................................................................................155
6.10 Monitoring .............................................................................................................................157
6.11 Diagnosing ............................................................................................................................157
6.12 Backing up and restoring ......................................................................................................160
6.12.1 Backing up ............................................................................................................................160
6.12.2 Restoring ...............................................................................................................................162
6.13 Upgrading Web application and SINAMICS V20 Smart Access firmware versions .............164
6.14 Viewing the support information ...........................................................................................167
7 Communicating with the PLC .............................................................................................................. 169
7.1 USS communication .............................................................................................................169
7.2 MODBUS communication .....................................................................................................173
8 Parameter list...................................................................................................................................... 183
8.1 Introduction to parameters ....................................................................................................183
8.2 Parameter list ........................................................................................................................187
9 Faults and alarms ............................................................................................................................... 323
9.1 Faults ....................................................................................................................................323
9.2 Alarms ...................................................................................................................................331
A Technical specifications ...................................................................................................................... 335
B Options and spare parts ...................................................................................................................... 345
B.1 Options ..................................................................................................................................345
B.1.1 Parameter Loader .................................................................................................................345
B.1.2 External BOP and BOP Interface Module.............................................................................350
B.1.3 Dynamic braking module ......................................................................................................355
B.1.4 Braking resistor .....................................................................................................................358
B.1.5 Line reactor ...........................................................................................................................362
B.1.6 Output reactor .......................................................................................................................367
B.1.7 External line filter Class B .....................................................................................................372
B.1.8 Shield connection kits ...........................................................................................................377
B.1.9 Memory card .........................................................................................................................381
B.1.10 RS485 termination resistor ...................................................................................................381
B.1.11 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB) ..............................................................................382
B.1.12 DIN rail mounting kits (only for FSAA ... FSB) ......................................................................383
B.1.13 Migration mounting kit for FSAA ... FSAC ............................................................................383

Table of contents
B.1.14 SINAMICS V20 Smart Access ............................................................................................. 386

B.1.15 I/O Extension Module ........................................................................................................... 389
B.1.16 User documentation ............................................................................................................. 390
B.2 Spare parts - replacement fans............................................................................................ 390
C General license conditions ...................................................................................................................395
Index ...................................................................................................................................................401

Fundamental safety instructions 1
1.1 General safety instructions
WARNING
Electric shock and danger to life due to other energy sources
Touching live components can result in death or severe injury.
• Only work on electrical devices when you are qualified for this job.
• Always observe the country-specific safety rules.
Generally, the following six steps apply when establishing safety:
1. Prepare for disconnection. Notify all those who will be affected by the procedure.
2. Isolate the drive system from the power supply and take measures to prevent it being
switched back on again.
3. Wait until the discharge time specified on the warning labels has elapsed.
4. Check that there is no voltage between any of the power connections, and between any
of the power connections and the protective conductor connection.
5. Check whether the existing auxiliary supply circuits are de-energized.
6. Ensure that the motors cannot move.
7. Identify all other dangerous energy sources, e.g. compressed air, hydraulic systems, or
water. Switch the energy sources to a safe state.
8. Check that the correct drive system is completely locked.
After you have completed the work, restore the operational readiness in the inverse
sequence.
WARNING
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively high impedance
Excessively low short-circuit currents can lead to the protective devices not tripping or
tripping too late, and thus causing electric shock or a fire.
• In the case of a conductor-conductor or conductor-ground short-circuit, ensure that the
short-circuit current at the point where the inverter is connected to the line supply at
least meets the minimum requirements for the response of the protective device used.
• You must use an additional residual-current device (RCD) if a conductor-ground short
circuit does not reach the short-circuit current required for the protective device to
respond. The required short-circuit current can be too low, especially for TT supply
systems.

Fundamental safety instructions
WARNING
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively low impedance
Excessively high short-circuit currents can lead to the protective devices not being able to
interrupt these short-circuit currents and being destroyed, and thus causing electric shock
or a fire.
• Ensure that the prospective short-circuit current at the line terminal of the inverter does
not exceed the breaking capacity (SCCR or Icc) of the protective device used.
WARNING
Electric shock if there is no ground connection
For missing or incorrectly implemented protective conductor connection for devices with
protection class I, high voltages can be present at open, exposed parts, which when
touched, can result in death or severe injury.
• Ground the device in compliance with the applicable regulations.
WARNING
Electric shock due to connection to an unsuitable power supply
When equipment is connected to an unsuitable power supply, exposed components may
carry a hazardous voltage that might result in serious injury or death.
• Only use power supplies that provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV-
(Protective Extra Low Voltage) output voltages for all connections and terminals of the
electronics modules.
WARNING
Electric shock due to equipment damage
Improper handling may cause damage to equipment. For damaged devices, hazardous
voltages can be present at the enclosure or at exposed components; if touched, this can
result in death or severe injury.
• Ensure compliance with the limit values specified in the technical data during transport,
storage and operation.
• Do not use any damaged devices.
WARNING
Electric shock due to unconnected cable shield
Hazardous touch voltages can occur through capacitive cross-coupling due to unconnected
cable shields.
• As a minimum, connect cable shields and the conductors of power cables that are not
used (e.g. brake cores) at one end at the grounded housing potential.

WARNING
Arcing when a plug connection is opened during operation
Opening a plug connection when a system is operation can result in arcing that may cause
serious injury or death.
• Only open plug connections when the equipment is in a voltage-free state, unless it has
been explicitly stated that they can be opened in operation.
WARNING
Electric shock due to residual charges in power components
Because of the capacitors, a hazardous voltage is present for up to 5 minutes after the
power supply has been switched off. Contact with live parts can result in death or serious
injury.
• Wait for 5 minutes before you check that the unit really is in a no-voltage condition and
start work.
NOTICE
Property damage due to loose power connections
Insufficient tightening torques or vibration can result in loose power connections. This can
result in damage due to fire, device defects or malfunctions.
• Tighten all power connections to the prescribed torque.
• Check all power connections at regular intervals, particularly after equipment has been
transported.
WARNING
Spread of fire from built-in devices
In the event of fire outbreak, the enclosures of built-in devices cannot prevent the escape of
fire and smoke. This can result in serious personal injury or property damage.
• Install built-in units in a suitable metal cabinet in such a way that personnel are
protected against fire and smoke, or take other appropriate measures to protect
personnel.
• Ensure that smoke can only escape via controlled and monitored paths.
WARNING
Active implant malfunctions due to electromagnetic fields
Inverters generate electromagnetic fields (EMF) in operation. People with active implants in
the immediate vicinity of this equipment are at particular risk.
• As the operator of an EMF-emitting installation, assess the individual risks of persons
with active implants. The following clearances are usually adequate:
– No clearance to closed control cabinets and shielded MOTION-CONNECT supply
cables
– Forearm length (approx. 35 cm clearance) to distributed drive systems and open
control cabinets

WARNING
Unexpected movement of machines caused by radio devices or mobile phones
When radio devices or mobile phones with a transmission power > 1 W are used in the
immediate vicinity of components, they may cause the equipment to malfunction.
Malfunctions may impair the functional safety of machines and can therefore put people in
danger or lead to property damage.
• If you come closer than around 2 m to such components, switch off any radios or mobile
phones.
• Use the "SIEMENS Industry Online Support app" only on equipment that has already
been switched off.
NOTICE
Damage to motor insulation due to excessive voltages
When operated on systems with grounded line conductor or in the event of a ground fault in
the IT system, the motor insulation can be damaged by the higher voltage to ground. If you
use motors that have insulation that is not designed for operation with grounded line
conductors, you must perform the following measures:
• IT system: Use a ground fault monitor and eliminate the fault as quickly as possible.
• TN or TT systems with grounded line conductor: Use an isolating transformer on the line
side.
WARNING
Fire due to inadequate ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating of components with subsequent
fire and smoke. This can cause severe injury or even death. This can also result in
increased downtime and reduced service lives for devices/systems.
• Ensure compliance with the specified minimum clearance as ventilation clearance for
the respective component.
WARNING
Unrecognized dangers due to missing or illegible warning labels
Dangers might not be recognized if warning labels are missing or illegible. Unrecognized
dangers may cause accidents resulting in serious injury or death.
• Check that the warning labels are complete based on the documentation.
• Attach any missing warning labels to the components, where necessary in the national
language.
• Replace illegible warning labels.

NOTICE
Device damage caused by incorrect voltage/insulation tests
Incorrect voltage/insulation tests can damage the device.
• Before carrying out a voltage/insulation check of the system/machine, disconnect the
devices as all converters and motors have been subject to a high voltage test by the
manufacturer, and therefore it is not necessary to perform an additional test within the
system/machine.
WARNING
Unexpected movement of machines caused by inactive safety functions
Inactive or non-adapted safety functions can trigger unexpected machine movements that
may result in serious injury or death.
• Observe the information in the appropriate product documentation before
commissioning.
• Carry out a safety inspection for functions relevant to safety on the entire system,
including all safety-related components.
• Ensure that the safety functions used in your drives and automation tasks are adjusted
and activated through appropriate parameterizing.
• Perform a function test.
• Only put your plant into live operation once you have guaranteed that the functions
relevant to safety are running correctly.
Note
Important safety notices for Safety Integrated functions
If you want to use Safety Integrated functions, you must observe the safety notices in the
Safety Integrated manuals.
WARNING
Malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameter settings
As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization, machines can malfunction, which in
turn can lead to injuries or death.
• Protect the parameterization (parameter assignments) against unauthorized access.
• Handle possible malfunctions by taking suitable measures, e.g. emergency stop or
emergency off.

1.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge
1.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge

Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) are individual components, integrated circuits, modules
or devices that may be damaged by either electric fields or electrostatic discharge.
NOTICE
Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Electric fields or electrostatic discharge can cause malfunctions through damaged
individual components, integrated circuits, modules or devices.
• Only pack, store, transport and send electronic components, modules or devices in their
original packaging or in other suitable materials, e.g conductive foam rubber of
aluminum foil.
• Only touch components, modules and devices when you are grounded by one of the
following methods:
– Wearing an ESD wrist strap
– Wearing ESD shoes or ESD grounding straps in ESD areas with conductive flooring
• Only place electronic components, modules or devices on conductive surfaces (table
with ESD surface, conductive ESD foam, ESD packaging, ESD transport container).
1.3 Warranty and liability for application examples

Application examples are not binding and do not claim to be complete regarding
configuration, equipment or any eventuality which may arise. Application examples do not
represent specific customer solutions, but are only intended to provide support for typical
tasks.
As the user you yourself are responsible for ensuring that the products described are
operated correctly. Application examples do not relieve you of your responsibility for safe
handling when using, installing, operating and maintaining the equipment.

1.4 Industrial security
1.4 Industrial security
Note
Industrial security
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the Internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit:
Industrial security (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity)
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customer’s exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed at:
Industrial security (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity)
Further information is provided on the Internet:

Industrial Security Configuration Manual
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/108862708)
WARNING
Unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulations (e.g. viruses, trojans, malware or worms) can cause unsafe
operating states in your system that may lead to death, serious injury, and property
damage.
• Keep the software up to date.
• Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art
industrial security concept for the installation or machine.
• Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security
concept.
• Protect files stored on exchangeable storage media from malicious software by with
suitable protection measures, e.g. virus scanners.
• Protect the drive against unauthorized changes by activating the "know-how protection"
drive function.

1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

When assessing the machine- or system-related risk in accordance with the respective local
regulations (e.g., EC Machinery Directive), the machine manufacturer or system installer
must take into account the following residual risks emanating from the control and drive
components of a drive system:
1. Unintentional movements of driven machine or system components during
commissioning, operation, maintenance, and repairs caused by, for example,
– Hardware and/or software errors in the sensors, control system, actuators, and cables
and connections
– Response times of the control system and of the drive
– Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification
– Condensation/conductive contamination
– Parameterization, programming, cabling, and installation errors
– Use of wireless devices/mobile phones in the immediate vicinity of electronic
components
– External influences/damage
– X-ray, ionizing radiation and cosmic radiation
2. Unusually high temperatures, including open flames, as well as emissions of light, noise,
particles, gases, etc., can occur inside and outside the components under fault conditions
caused by, for example:
– Component failure
– Software errors
3. Hazardous shock voltages caused by, for example:
– Component failure
– Influence during electrostatic charging
– Induction of voltages in moving motors
– Condensation/conductive contamination
4. Electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields generated in operation that can pose a
risk to people with a pacemaker, implants or metal replacement joints, etc., if they are too
close
5. Release of environmental pollutants or emissions as a result of improper operation of the
system and/or failure to dispose of components safely and correctly
6. Influence of network-connected communication systems, e.g. ripple-control transmitters
or data communication via the network
For more information about the residual risks of the drive system components, see the
relevant sections in the technical user documentation.

Introduction 2
2.1 Components of the inverter system
The SINAMICS V20 is a range of inverters designed for controlling the speed of three phase
asynchronous motors.
Three phase AC 400 V variants

The three phase AC 400 V inverters are available in five frame sizes.
Component Rated output Rated Rated Output cur- Article number

power input output rent at 480 V unfiltered filtered
current current at 4kHz/40°C
FSA 0.37 kW 1.7 A 1.3 A 1.3 A 6SL3210-5BE13-7UV0 6SL3210-5BE13-7CV0
(without fan) 0.55 kW 2.1 A 1.7 A 1.6 A 6SL3210-5BE15-5UV0 6SL3210-5BE15-5CV0
0.75 kW 2.6 A 2.2 A 2.2 A 6SL3210-5BE17-5UV0 6SL3210-5BE17-5CV0
0.75 kW 1) 2.6 A 2.2 A 2.2 A - 6SL3216-5BE17-5CV0
FSA 1.1 kW 4.0 A 3.1 A 3.1 A 6SL3210-5BE21-1UV0 6SL3210-5BE21-1CV0
(with single fan) 1.5 kW 5.0 A 4.1 A 4.1 A 6SL3210-5BE21-5UV0 6SL3210-5BE21-5CV0
2.2 kW 6.4 A 5.6 A 4.8 A 6SL3210-5BE22-2UV0 6SL3210-5BE22-2CV0

Introduction
2.1 Components of the inverter system
Component Rated output Rated Rated Output cur- Article number

power input output rent at 480 V unfiltered filtered
current current at 4kHz/40°C
FSB 3.0 kW 8.6 A 7.3 A 7.3 A 6SL3210-5BE23-0UV0 6SL3210-5BE23-0CV0
(with single fan) 4.0 kW 11.3 A 8.8 A 8.24 A 6SL3210-5BE24-0UV0 6SL3210-5BE24-0CV0
FSC 5.5 kW 15.2 A 12.5 A 11 A 6SL3210-5BE25-5UV0 6SL3210-5BE25-5CV0
(with single fan)
FSD 7.5 kW 20.7 A 16.5 A 16.5 A 6SL3210-5BE27-5UV0 6SL3210-5BE27-5CV0
(with two fans) 11 kW 30.4 A 25 A 21 A 6SL3210-5BE31-1UV0 6SL3210-5BE31-1CV0
15 kW 38.1 A 31 A 31 A 6SL3210-5BE31-5UV0 6SL3210-5BE31-5CV0
FSE 18.5 kW (HO) 2) 45 A 38 A 34 A 6SL3210-5BE31-8UV0 6SL3210-5BE31-8CV0
(with two fans) 22 kW (LO) 54 A 45 A 40 A
22 kW (HO) 54 A 45 A 40 A 6SL3210-5BE32-2UV0 6SL3210-5BE32-2CV0
30 kW (LO) 72 A 60 A 52 A
1) This variant refers to the Flat Plate inverter with a flat plate heatsink.
2) "HO" and "LO" indicate high overload and low overload respectively. You can set the HO/LO mode through relevant
parameter settings.
Single phase AC 230 V variants

The single phase AC 230 V inverters are available in three frame sizes.
Component Rated out- Rated input Rated out- Article number

put power current put current unfiltered filtered
FSAA 0.12 kW 2.3 A 0.9 A 6SL3210-5BB11-2UV1 6SL3210-5BB11-2BV1
(without fan) 0.25 kW 4.5 A 1.7 A 6SL3210-5BB12-5UV1 6SL3210-5BB12-5BV1
0.37 kW 6.2 A 2.3 A 6SL3210-5BB13-7UV1 6SL3210-5BB13-7BV1
FSAB 0.55 kW 7.7 A 3.2 A 6SL3210-5BB15-5UV1 6SL3210-5BB15-5BV1
(without fan) 0.75 kW 10 A 4.2 A 6SL3210-5BB17-5UV1 6SL3210-5BB17-5BV1
FSAC 1.1 kW 14.7 A 6.0 A 6SL3210-5BB21-1UV1 6SL3210-5BB21-1BV1
(with single fan) 1.5 kW 19.7 A 7.8 A 6SL3210-5BB21-5UV1 6SL3210-5BB21-5BV1
FSB 1.1 kW 14.7 A 6.0 A 6SL3210-5BB21-1UV0 6SL3210-5BB21-1AV0
(with single fan) 1.5 kW 19.7 A 7.8 A 6SL3210-5BB21-5UV0 6SL3210-5BB21-5AV0
FSC 2.2 kW 27.2 A 11 A 6SL3210-5BB22-2UV0 6SL3210-5BB22-2AV0
(with single fan) 3.0 kW 32 A 13.6 A 6SL3210-5BB23-0UV0 6SL3210-5BB23-0AV0

Introduction
2.2 Inverter rating plate
Options and spare parts

For more information about the options and spare parts, refer to Appendices "Options
(Page 345)" and "Spare parts - replacement fans (Page 390)".

Introduction
Serial number explanation (example)

Mechanical installation 3
Protection against the spread of fire
The device may be operated only in closed housings or in control cabinets with protective
covers that are closed, and when all of the protective devices are used. The installation of
the device in a metal control cabinet or the protection with another equivalent measure must
prevent the spread of fire and emissions outside the control cabinet.
Protection against condensation or electrically conductive contamination

Protect the device, e.g. by installing it in a control cabinet with degree of protection IP54
according to IEC 60529 or NEMA 12. Further measures may be necessary for particularly
critical operating conditions.
If condensation or conductive pollution can be excluded at the installation site, a lower
degree of control cabinet protection may be permitted.
3.1 Mounting orientation and clearance

The inverter must be mounted in an enclosed electrical operating area or a control cabinet.
Mounting orientation
Always mount the inverter vertically to a flat and non-combustible surface.

Mechanical installation
3.2 Cabinet panel mounting
Mounting clearance
Top ≥ 100 mm
Bottom ≥100 mm (for frame sizes AA ... AC, B ... E, and frame size A without fan)
≥ 85 mm (for fan-cooled frame size A)
Side ≥ 0 mm

You can mount the inverter directly on the surface of the cabinet panel.
Two additional mounting methods are also available for different frame sizes. For more
information, refer to the following sections:
Push-through mounting (frame sizes B ... E) (Page 27)
DIN rail mounting (frame sizes AA ... B) (Page 30)
Outline dimensions and drill patterns
Dimensions (mm) Drill pattern (mm)

Frame size AA/AB
Fixings: 2 x M4 screws, nuts, washers

1) Depth
Tightening torque: 1.8 Nm ± 10%
of FSAB


Frame size AC

Frame size A
2) Height Fixings: 4 x M4 screws, nuts, washers

of frame size A with fan
3) Depth Tightening torque: 1.8 Nm ± 10%
of Flat Plate inverter (for 400 V 0.75 kW variant only)
Frame size B



Frame size C

Frame size D

Frame size E


3.3 SINAMICS V20 Flat Plate variant

The SINAMICS V20 Flat Plate variant is designed to allow greater flexibility in the installation
of the inverter. Adequate measures must be taken to ensure the correct heat dissipation,
which may require an additional external heatsink outside the electrical enclosure.
WARNING
Additional heat load
Operation with an input voltage greater than 400 V and 50 Hz or with a pulse frequency
greater than 4 kHz will cause an additional heat load on the inverter. These factors must be
taken into account when designing the installation conditions and must be verified by a
practical load test.
CAUTION
Cooling considerations
The minimum vertical clearance of 100 mm above and below the inverter must be
observed. Stacked mounting is not allowed for the SINAMICS V20 inverters.
Technical data
Flat Plate variant Average power output

6SL3216-5BE17-5CV0 370 W 550 W 750 W
Operating temperature range -10 °C to 40 °C
Max. heatsink loss 24 W 27 W 31 W
Max. control loss * 9.25 W 9.25 W 9.25 W
Recommended thermal resistance of heatsink 1.8 K/W 1.5 K/W 1.2 K/W
Recommended output current 1.3 A 1.7 A 2.2 A
* With I/O fully loaded

Installing
1. Prepare the mounting surface for the inverter using the dimensions given in Section
"Cabinet panel mounting (Page 22)".
2. Ensure that any rough edges are removed from the drilled holes, the flat plate heatsink is
clean and free from dust and grease, and the mounting surface and if applicable the
external heatsink are smooth and made of unpainted metal (steel or aluminium).
3. Apply a non-silicone heat transfer compound with a minimum thermal transfer co-efficient
of 0.9 W/m.K evenly to the rear surface of the flat plate heatsink and the surface of the
rear plate.
4. Mount the inverter securely using four M4 screws with a tightening torque of 1.8 Nm
(tolerance: ± 10%).
5. If it is required to use an external heatsink, first apply the paste specified in Step 3 evenly
to the surface of the external heatsink and the surface of the rear plate, and then connect
the external heatsink on the other side of the rear plate.
6. When the installation is completed, run the inverter in the intended application while
monitoring r0037[0] (measured heatsink temperature) to verify the cooling effectiveness.
The heatsink temperature must not exceed 90 °C during normal operation, after the
allowance has been made for the expected surrounding temperature range for the
application.
Example:
If the measurements are made in 20 °C surrounding, and the machine is specified up to
40 °C, then the heatsink temperature reading must be increased by [40-20] = 20 °C, and
the result must remain below 90 °C.
If the heatsink temperature exceeds the above limit, then further cooling must be
provided (for example, with an extra heatsink) until the conditions are met.
Note
The inverter will trip with fault condition F4 if the heatsink temperature rises above
100 °C. This protects the inverter from potential damage due to high temperatures.

3.4 Push-through mounting (frame sizes B ... E)

The frame sizes B to E are designed to be compatible with "push-through" applications,
allowing you to mount the heatsink of the inverter through the back of the cabinet panel.
When the inverter is mounted as the push-through variant, no higher IP rating is achieved.
Make sure that the required IP rating for the enclosure is maintained.
● Cabinet panel mounting (Page 22)
● DIN rail mounting (frame sizes AA ... B) (Page 30)
Outline dimensions, drill patterns, and cut-outs
Dimensions (mm) Drill pattern and cut-out (mm)

Frame size B
Fixings: 4 x M4 screws
Frame size C

Dimensions (mm) Drill pattern and cut-out (mm)

Frame size D
Frame size E
1) Depth inside the cabinet

Mounting
Note
A gap is reserved at the bottom of the cut-out area to allow fan removal from outside the
cabinet without removing the inverter.

3.5 DIN rail mounting (frame sizes AA ... B)

By means of the optional DIN rail mounting kit, you can mount the frame size AA, AB, AC, A,
or B to the DIN rail.
● Cabinet panel mounting (Page 22)
● Push-through mounting (frame sizes B ... E) (Page 27)
Note
To install or remove the inverter, use a cross-tip or flat-bit screwdriver.
Installing and removing FSAA/FSAB/FSAC to and from the DIN rail

For more information, see Section "Migration mounting kit for FSAA ... FSAC (Page 383)".
Installing FSA/FSAC to the DIN rail

Removing FSA/FSAC from the DIN rail

Installing FSB to the DIN rail
Removing FSB from the DIN rail

Electrical installation 4
Third-party motors that can be operated
You can operate standard asynchronous motors from other manufacturers with the inverter:
NOTICE
Motor damage due to the use of an unsuitable third-party motor
A higher load occurs on the motor insulation in inverter mode than with mains operation.
Damage to the motor winding may occur as a result.
• Please observe the notes in the System Manual "Requirements for third-party motors"
Additional information is provided on the Internet: Requirements for third-party motors

(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/79690594)

4.1 Typical system connections
Typical system connections
1)For more information on the permissible types for these branch circuit protection devices,
see the Product Information of Protective Devices for SINAMICS V20 Inverter
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13208/man).

Note
Requirements for United States/Canadian installations (UL/cUL)
For configurations in conformance with UL/cUL, use the UL/cUL approved fuses, circuit
breakers and Type E combination motor controllers (CMC). Refer to the Product Information
of Protective Devices for SINAMICS V20 Inverter
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13208/man) for specific types of branch
circuit protection for each inverter and corresponding Short-Circuit Current Rating (SCCR).
For each frame size, use 75 °C copper wire only.
This equipment is capable of providing internal motor overload protection according to
UL508C/UL61800-5-1. In order to comply with UL508C/UL61800-5-1, parameter P0610
must not be changed from its factory setting of 6.
For Canadian (cUL) installations the inverter mains supply must be fitted with any external
recommended suppressor with the following features:
• Surge-protective devices; device shall be a Listed Surge-protective device (Category
code VZCA and VZCA7)
• Rated nominal voltage 480/277 VAC (for 400 V variants) or 240 VAC (for 230 V variants),
50/60 Hz, three phase (for 400 V variants) or single phase (for 230V variants)
• Clamping voltage VPR = 2000 V (for 400 V variants)/1000 V (for 230 V variants), IN = 3
kA min, MCOV = 508 VAC (for 400 V variants)/264 VAC (for 230V variants), short circuit
current rating (SCCR) = 40 kA
• Suitable for Type 1 or Type 2 SPD application
• Clamping shall be provided between phases and also between phase and ground
WARNING
Risk of electric shock and fire from a network with an excessively high impedance
Excessively low short-circuit currents can lead to the protective devices not tripping or
tripping too late, and so causing electric shock or a fire.
short-circuit current at the point where the inverter is connected to the line supply at
least meets the minimum requirements for the response of the protective device used.
• You must use an additional residual-current device (RCD) if a conductor-ground short
circuit does not reach the short-circuit current required for the protective device to
respond. The required short-circuit current can be too low, especially for TT systems.
WARNING
Risk of electric shock and fire from a network with an impedance that is too low
Excessively high short-circuit currents can lead to the protective devices not being able to
interrupt these short-circuit currents and being destroyed, and so causing electric shock or
a fire.
• Ensure that the uninfluenced short-circuit current at the line terminal of the inverter does
not exceed the breaking capacity (SCCR or Icc) of the protective device used.

WARNING
Danger to life through electric shock as well as fire hazard due to protective devices that
either do not trip or trip too late
Overcurrent protective equipment that trips too late or not all can cause electric shock or
fire.
short-circuit current at the point where the inverter is connected to the line supply
corresponds as a minimum to the requirements of the protective equipment used.
• You must additionally use a residual-current protective device (RCD) if, for a conductor-
ground short circuit, the required short-circuit current is not reached. Especially for TT
line systems, the required short-circuit can be too low.
• It is not permissible that the short-circuit current exceeds the SCCR or the ICC of the
inverter and the disconnecting capacity of the protective equipment.
WARNING
Danger to life caused by high leakage currents for an interrupted protective conductor
The inverter components conduct a high leakage current via the protective conductor. The
earth leakage current of the SINAMICS V20 inverter may exceed 3.5 mA AC.
Touching conductive parts when the protective conductor is interrupted can result in death
or serious injury.
A fixed earth connection or a multicore supply cable with connectors for industrial
applications according to IEC 60309 is required and the minimum size of the protective
earth conductor shall comply with the local safety regulations for high leakage current
equipment.
WARNING
Danger to life due to fire spreading because of an unsuitable or improperly installed braking
resistor
Using an unsuitable or improperly installed braking resistor can cause fires and smoke to
develop. Fire and smoke development can cause severe personal injury or material
damage.
• Only use braking resistors that are approved for the inverter.
• Install the braking resistor in accordance with regulations.
• Monitor the temperature of the braking resistor.

Wiring diagram
Note
The resistance of the potentiometer for each analog input must be ≥ 4.7 kΩ.

The optional I/O Extension Module can expand the number of V20 I/O terminals. See the
following for the wiring diagram of the I/O Extension Module:
WARNING
Electric shock and danger to life due to connection to an unsuitable power system
If DO3 and DO4 are used in a power supply system that exceeds overvoltage category II
(OVC II), contact with live parts of the V20 inverter and its options including expansion
ports, SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) terminals, and connected wires can result in death
or severe injury.
• Use DO3 and DO4 only in the power system whose voltage does not exceed OVC II.
Note
• To use the DIs on both the V20 and the I/O Extension Module as a single group of DIs,
connect the V20 DI C to the DI C on the I/O Extension Module (see the previous figure).
• To use the DIs on both the V20 and the I/O Extension Module as two separate groups of
DIs, do not connect the V20 DI C to the DI C on the I/O Extension Module.
For more information about the wiring diagram, see Section "Setting connection macros
(Page 65)".

4.2 Terminal description
Terminal layout

User terminals for FSAA/FSAB:
User terminals for FSA to FSE:
NOTICE
Inverter damage due to overvoltage
Using signal cables of more than 30 m at the digital inputs and 24 V power supply can lead
to overvoltage during switching operations. This can result in damage to the inverter.
• Make sure that you use signal cables of equal to or smaller than 30 m at the digital
inputs and 24 V power supply.
Note
To disconnect the integrated EMC filter on FSE from the ground, you can use a Pozidriv or
flat-bit screwdriver to remove the EMC screw.
User terminals for I/O Extension Module (option):

Recommended cable cross-sections, crimp types and screw tightening torques
Material Fork crimp Ring crimp

Crimp body: copper
Insulation: nylon
Plating: tin
Frame Rated Cri Mains and PE terminals Motor/DC/braking resistor/output earth termi-
size output mp nals
power typ Cable d W L Screw tight- Cable d W L Screw tight-
(kW) e cross- (m (mm) (mm) ening torque cross- (mm) (mm) (mm) ening torque
section 1) m) (Nm/lbf.in) 2) section 1) (Nm/lbf.in) 2)
400 V
A 0.37 ... 0.75 U 1.0 mm2 (14) ≥ <8 > 22 1.0/8.9 1.0 mm2 ≥ 3.7 <8 > 22 1.0/8.9
3.7 (14)
1.1 ... 2.2 1.5 mm2 (14) 1.5 mm2
(14)
B 3.0 ... 4.0 4 mm2 (10) ≥ <8 > 25 2.5 mm2 ≥ 4.2 <8 > 22 1.5/13.3
3.7 (12)
C 5.5 4 mm2 (10) ≥ < 12 > 25 2.4/21.2 4 mm2 (10) ≥ 5.2 < 12 > 25 2.4/21.2
5.2
D 7.5 6 mm2 (10) ≥ < 12 > 28 6 mm2 (10) ≥ 5.2 < 12 > 28
11 ... 15 10 mm2 (6) 5.2
E 18.5 O 10 mm2 (6) ≥ < 13 > 30 10 mm2 (6) ≥ 5.2 < 13 > 30
5.2
22 16 mm2 (4) 6 mm2 (8)
30 25 mm2 (3) 10 mm2 (6)
230 V
AA/AB 0.12 ... 0.25 U 1.0 mm2 (14) ≥ 4.2 < 7 > 22 1.0/8.9 1.0 mm2 ≥ 3.2 <7 > 22 1.0/8.9
0.37 ... 0.55 1.5 mm2 (14) (14)
0.75 2.0 mm2 (14)
AC 1.1 ... 1.5 4.0 mm2 (12) 2.5 mm2
B 1.1 ... 1.5 6.0 mm2 (10) ≥ 3.7 < 8 > 25 (12) ≥ 4.2 <8 > 22 1.5/13.3
C 2.2 ... 3.0 10 mm2 (6) ≥ 5.2 < > 25 2.4/21.2 4.0 mm2 ≥ 5.2 < 12 > 25 2.4/21.2
12 (10)
1) Data in brackets indicates the corresponding AWG values.
2) Tolerance: ± 10%

NOTICE
Damage to the mains terminals
During electrical installation of the inverter frame sizes AA to D, only cables with UL/cUL-
certified fork crimps can be used for the mains terminal connections; for frame size E, only
cables with UL/cUL-certified ring crimps can be used for the mains terminal connections.
Maximum motor cable lengths
Inverter variant Maximum cable length

EMC compliant Without output reactor With output reactor
400 V With integrated With external Unshielded Shielded Unshielded Shielded
EMC filter 1) line filter 2)
FSA 10 m 25 m 50 m 25 m 150 m 150 m
FSB to FSD 25 m 25 m 50 m 25 m 150 m 150 m
FSE 50 m 25 m 100 m 50 m 300 m 200 m
230 V With integrated With external Unshielded Shielded Unshielded Shielded
EMC filter line filter
FSAA/FSAB 5 m 3) 5 m 3) 50 m 25 m 200 m 200 m
FSAC 10 m 3) 10 m 2) 50 m 25 m 200 m 200 m
FSB to FSC 25 m 2) 5m 3) 50 m 25 m 200 m 200 m
1) EMC (RE/CE C3) compliant, second environment (industrial area). RE/CE C3 refers to EMC compliance to EN61800-3
Category C3 (level equivalent to EN55011, Class A2) for Radiated and Conducted Emissions.
2) EMC (RE/CE C2) compliant, first environment (residential area). RE/CE C2 refers to EMC compliance to EN61800-3
Category C2 (level equivalent to EN55011, Class A1) for Radiated and Conducted Emissions. See Section B.1.7 for the
specifications of external line filters.
3) EMC (RE/CE C1) compliant, first environment (residential area). RE/CE C1 refers to EMC compliance to EN61800-3
Category C1 (level equivalent to EN55011, Class B) for Radiated and Conducted Emissions.
Star-delta connection of the motor

Select delta connection if either a 230/400 V motor on a 400 V inverter or a 120/230 V motor
on a 230 V inverter is supposed to operate at 87 Hz instead of 50 Hz.

User terminals
The illustration below takes the user terminal layout for FSA to FSE for example.
No. Terminal Description

marking
1 10V 10 V output (tolerance ± 1% for the temperature range of 20 °C to 30 °C) referred to
0V, maximum 11 mA, short circuit protected
Analog inputs 2 AI1 Mode: AI1: Single-ended, bipolar current and voltage
3 AI2 mode
AI2: Single-ended, unipolar current and voltage
mode
Isolation to control circuit: None
Voltage range: AI1: -10 V to 10 V; AI2: 0 V to 10 V
Current range: 0 mA to 20 mA (4 mA to 20 mA - software se-
lectable)
Voltage mode accuracy: ± 1% full scale for the temperature range of
20 °C to 30 °C
Current mode accuracy: ± 1% full scale for the temperature range of
20 °C to 30 °C
Input impedance: Voltage mode: > 30 K
Current mode: 235 R
Resolution: 12-bit
Wire break detect: Yes
Threshold 0 ⇒ 1 (used as DIN): 4.0 V
Threshold 1 ⇒ 0 (used as DIN): 1.6 V
Response time (digital input mode): 4 ms ± 4 ms
Analog output 4 AO1 Mode: Single-ended, unipolar current mode
Isolation to control circuit: None
Current range: 0 mA to 20 mA (4 mA to 20 mA - software se-
lectable)
Accuracy (0 mA to 20 mA): ± 0.5 mA for the temperature range of -10 °C to
60 °C
Output capability: 20 mA into 500 R
5 0V Overall reference potential for RS485 communication and analog inputs/output
6 P+ RS485 P +
7 N- RS485 N -

No. Terminal Description

marking
Digital inputs 8 DI1 Mode: PNP (reference terminal low)
* 9 DI2 NPN (reference terminal high)
10 DI3 Characteristics values are inverted for NPN
11 DI4 mode.
12 DI C Isolation to control circuit: Electrically isolated
Absolute maximum voltage: ± 35 V for 500 ms every 50 seconds
Operating voltage: - 3 V to 30 V
Threshold 0 ⇒ 1 (maximum): 11 V
Threshold 1 ⇒ 0 (minimum): 5V
Input current (guaranteed off): 0.6 mA to 2 mA
Input current (maximum on): 15 mA
2-wire Bero compatibility: No
Response time: 4 ms ± 4 ms
Pulse train input: No
13 24V 24 V output (tolerance: - 15 % to + 20 %) referred to 0 V, maximum 50 mA, non-
isolated
14 0V Overall reference potential for digital inputs
Digital out- 15 DO1 + Mode: Normally open voltage-free terminals, polarised
puts (transis- 16 DO1 - Isolation to control circuit: 500 VDC (functional low voltage)
tor)
Maximum voltage across termi- ± 35 V
nals:
Maximum load current: 100 mA
Response time: 4 ms ± 4 ms
Digital out- 17 DO2 NC Mode: Change-over voltage-free terminals, unpolarised
puts (relay) * 18 DO2 NO Isolation to control circuit: 4 kV (230 V mains)
19 DO2 C Maximum voltage across termi- 240 VAC/30 VDC + 10 %
nals:
Maximum load current: 0.5 A @ 250 VAC, resistive
0.5 A @ 30 VDC, resistive
Response time: Open: 7 ms ± 7 ms
Close: 10 ms ± 9 ms
* The optional I/O Extension Module provides additional DIs and DOs which share the same technical specifications as
those on the SINAMICS V20 inverter.
WARNING
Risk of electric shock
The input and output terminals, numbered 1 to 16, are safety extra low voltage (SELV)
terminals and must only be connected to low voltage supplies.

4.3 EMC-compliant installation
Recommended I/O terminal cable cross-section
Cable type Recommended cable cross-section *

Solid or stranded cable 0.5 mm2 to 1 mm2 (20 to 18)
Ferrule with insulating sleeve 0.25 mm2 (24)
* Data in brackets indicates the corresponding AWG values.
Expansion port
The expansion port is designed for connecting the inverter to the external option module -
BOP Interface Module, Parameter Loader, SINAMICS V20 Smart Access, or I/O Extension
Module, in order to realize the following functions:
● Operating the inverter from the external BOP that is connected to the BOP Interface
Module
● Cloning parameters between the inverter and a standard SD card through the Parameter
Loader
● Powering the inverter from the Parameter Loader, when mains power is not available
● Accessing the inverter from a connected device (conventional PC with wireless network
adapter installed, tablet, or smart phone) with the aid of SINAMICS V20 Smart Access
● Providing additional DIs and DOs to realize more inverter control functions through the
I/O Extension Module
For more information about these option modules, see Sections "Parameter Loader
(Page 345)", "External BOP and BOP Interface Module (Page 350)", "Commissioning using
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access (Page 135)", and "I/O Extension Module (Page 389)".
EMC-compliant installation of the inverter

The shield connection kit is supplied as an option for each frame size. For more information
about this option, see Appendix "Shield connection kits (Page 377)". It allows easy and
efficient connection of the necessary shield to achieve EMC-compliant installation of the
inverter. If no shield connection kit is used, you can alternatively mount the device and
additional components on a metal mounting plate with excellent electrical conductivity and a
large contact area. This mounting plate must be connected to the cabinet panel and the PE
or EMC bus bar.
The following diagram shows an example of EMC-compliant installation of the inverter frame
size B/C.

NOTICE
Inverter damage due to improper mains disconnection
Improper mains disconnection can cause inverter damage.
Do not perform mains diconnection on the motor-side of the system if the inverter is in
operation and the output current is not zero.
Note
Cable connection
Separate the control cables from the power cables as much as possible.
Keep the connecting cables away from rotating mechanical parts.
EMC-compliant installation of external line filter options

All 400 V inverters must be mounted in a cabinet with a special EMC gasket around the door.
All the following ferrite cores are recommended in accordance with EN 55011.
For 400 V unfiltered frame size B inverters fitted with the filters specified in Section B.1.7:
To meet the radiated and conducted emissions Class A, attach 1 x ferrite core of Type "
WeiAiPu V18004", or equivalent in the vicinity of the motor output terminals (U, V, and W,
excluding the PE terminal) of the inverter.

For 400 V unfiltered frame size C inverters fitted with the filters specified in Section B.1.7:
To meet the radiated and conducted emissions Class A, attach 1 x ferrite core of Type
"Wurth 742-715-4", or equivalent in the vicinity of the inverter mains terminals.
For 400 V unfiltered frame size D inverters fitted with the filters specified in Section B.1.7:
To meet the radiated and conducted emissions Class A, attach 2 x ferrite cores of Type
"Wurth 742-715-5" or equivalent in the vicinity of the inverter mains terminals; attach 1x
ferrite core of Type "Wurth 742-712-21" or equivalent in the vicinity of the external line filter
mains terminals.
For 400 V unfiltered frame size E inverters fitted with the filters specified in Section B.1.7:
To meet the radiated and conducted emissions Class A, attach 1 x ferrite core of Type
"Seiwa E04SRM563218" or equivalent in the vicinity of the inverter mains terminals; attach 2
x ferrite cores of Type "Seiwa E04SRM563218" or equivalent in the vicinity of the motor
terminals of the inverter.
For 230 V filtered frame size AA/AB inverters:

To meet the radiated and conducted emissions Class B, attach 1 x ferrite core of Type "K3
NF-110-A(N)GY0", or equivalent in the vicinity of the motor output terminals (U, V, and W,
excluding the PE terminal) of the inverter; attach 1x ferrite core of Type "K3 NF-110-
A(N)GY0" or equivalent on the motor cable outside the threaded hole of the cabinet; attach 2
x ferrite cores of Type "K3 NF-110-A(N)GY0" or equivalent on the motor cable in the vicinity
of the motor.
For 230 V filtered and unfiltered frame size AC inverters with the maximum motor cable
length of 10 m:
To meet the radiated and conducted emissions Class B, attach 1 x ferrite core of Type "BRH
A2 RC 16*28*9 MB", or equivalent in the vicinity of the motor output terminals (U, V, and W,
excluding the PE terminal) of the inverter.
For 230 V filtered frame size C inverters:

To meet the radiated and conducted emissions Class A, attach 1 x ferrite core of Type "TDG
TPW33", or equivalent in the vicinity of the inverter mains terminals.

4.4 EMC-compliant cabinet design
Shielding method
The following illustration shows an example with and without the shielding plate.

The most cost-effective method of implementing interference suppression measures within
the control cabinet is to ensure that interference sources and potentially susceptible
equipment are installed separately from each other.
The control cabinet has to be divided into EMC zones and the devices within the control
cabinet have to be assigned to these zones following the rules below.
● The different zones must be electromagnetically decoupled by using separate metallic
housings or grounded separation plates.
● If necessary, filters and/or coupling modules should be used at the interfaces of the zones.
● Cables connecting different zones must be separated and must not be routed within the
same cable harness or cable channel.
● All communication (e.g. RS485) and signal cables leaving the cabinet must be shielded.



Commissioning via the built-in BOP 5
Note
For a detailed description of parameter settings for the quick commissioning, refer to the
topic "Quick commissioning (Page 62)".
WARNING
Hot surface
During operation and for a short time after switching-off the inverter, the marked surfaces of
the inverter can reach a high temperature. Avoid coming into direct contact with these
surfaces.
5.1 The built-in Basic Operator Panel (BOP)
5.1.1 Introduction to the built-in BOP

Commissioning via the built-in BOP
Button functions
Stops the inverter

Single press OFF1 stop reaction: the inverter brings the motor to a standstill in the ramp-
down time set in parameter P1121.
Exception:
The button is inactive if the inverter is configured for control from terminals or
USS/MODBUS on RS485 (P0700=2 or P0700=5) in AUTO mode.
Double press (< 2 s) or OFF2 stop reaction: the inverter allows the motor to coast to a standstill
long press ( > 3 s) without using any ramp-down times.
Starts the inverter
If the inverter is started in HAND/JOG/AUTO mode, the inverter running icon ( ) appears.
Exception:
This button is inactive when the inverter is configured for control from terminals or USS/MODBUS on
RS485 (P0700=2 or P0700=5) in AUTO mode.
Multi-function button
Short press ( < 2 s) • Enters the parameter setting menu or moves to the next screen in the
setup menu
• Restarts the digit by digit editing on the selected item
• Returns to the fault code display
• If pressed twice in digit by digit editing, returns to the previous screen
without changing the item being edited
Long press ( > 2 s) • Returns to the status screen
• Enters the setup menu
Short press ( < 2 s) • Switches between status values
• Enters edit value mode or change to the next digit
• Clears faults
• Returns to the fault code display
Long press ( > 2 s) • Quick parameter number or value edit
• Accesses fault information data
Hand/Jog/Auto
+ Press to switch between different modes:
Note:
Jog mode is only available if the motor is stopped.

• When navigating through a menu, it moves the selection up through the screens available.
• When editing a parameter value, it increases the displayed value.
• When the inverter is in RUN mode, it increases the speed.
• Long press (> 2 s) of the key quickly scrolls up through parameter numbers, indices, or values.
• When navigating through a menu, it moves the selection down through the screens available.
• When editing a parameter value, it decreases the displayed value.
• When the inverter is in RUN mode, it decreases the speed.
• Long press (> 2 s) of the key quickly scrolls down through parameter numbers, indices, or values.
Reverses the direction of rotation of the motor. Pressing the two keys once activates reverse motor rota-
+ tion. Pressing the two keys once again deactivates reverse rotation of the motor. The reserve icon ( )
on the display indicates that the output speed is opposite to the setpoint.
Note
Unless otherwise specified, operations of the above keys always indicate short press (< 2 s).
Inverter status icons
Inverter has at least one pending fault.

Inverter has at least one pending alarm.
: Inverter is running (motor speed may be 0 rpm).

(flashing): Inverter may be energized unexpectedly (for example, in frost protection
mode).
Motor rotates in the reversed direction.
: Inverter is in HAND mode.

(flashing): Inverter is in JOG mode.
5.1.2 Inverter menu structure
Menu Description
50/60 Hz selection menu This menu is visible only on first power-up or after a factory reset.
Main menu
Display menu (default display) Basic monitoring view of key parameters such as frequency,
voltage, current, DC-link voltage, and so on.
Setup menu Access to parameters for quick commissioning of the inverter
system.
Parameter menu Access to all available inverter parameters.


5.1.3 Viewing inverter status

The display menu provides a basic monitoring view of some key parameters such as
frequency, voltage, current, and so on.
Note
• If you have set P0005 to a non-zero value which represents the parameter number
selected in P0005, then the inverter displays the value of the selected parameter in the
display menu by default. For more information about normal editing of parameters, see
Section "Editing parameters (Page 56)".
• For more information about the display menu structure with active faults, see Section
"Faults (Page 323)".

5.1.4 Editing parameters

This section describes how to edit the parameters.
Parameter types
Parameter type Description

CDS-dependent parameters • Dependent on Command Data Set (CDS)
• Always indexed with [0...2] *
• Available for CDS switching via P0810 and
P0811
DDS-dependent parameters • Dependent on Inverter Data Set (DDS)
• Always indexed with [0...2]
• Available for DDS switching via P0820 and
P0821
Other parameters Multi-indexed parameters These parameters are indexed with the range of
indices dependent on the individual parameter.
Index-free parameters These parameters are not indexed.
* Each CDS-dependent parameter has only one default value, despite of their three indices. Excep-
tion: By default, P1076[0] and P1076[2] are set to 1 while P1076[1] is set to 0.
Normal editing of parameters
Note
Pressing or for longer than two seconds to quickly increase or decrease the
parameter numbers or indexes is only possible in the parameter menu.
This editing method is best suited when small changes are required to parameter numbers,
indexes, or values.
● To increase or decrease the parameter number, index, or value, press or for less
than two seconds.
● To quickly increase or decrease the parameter number, index, or value, press or
for longer than two seconds.
● To confirm the setting, press .
● To cancel the setting, press .

Example:
Editing parameter values
Digit-by-digit editing
Note
Digit-by-digit editing of parameter numbers or indexes is only possible in the parameter
menu.
Digit-by-digit editing can be performed on parameter numbers, parameter indexes, or

parameter values. This editing method is best suited when large changes are required to
parameter numbers, indexes, or values. For information about the inverter menu structure,
refer to Section "Inverter menu structure (Page 53)".
● In any edit or scroll mode, digit-by-digit editing is entered by a long press (> 2 s) on .
● The digit-by-digit editing always starts with the rightmost digit.
● Each digit is selected in turn by pressing .

● Pressing once moves the cursor to the rightmost digit of the current item.
● Pressing twice in succession exits the digit-by-digit mode without changing the item
being edited.
● Pressing on a digit when there are no further digits to the left saves the value.
● If more digits are required to the left, then these must be added by scrolling the existing
leftmost digit above 9 to add more digits to the left.
● Pressing or for over two seconds enters fast digit scrolling.

Example 1: Example 2: Example 3:

Editing parameter numbers Editing parameter indices Editing parameter values
If a parameter is an array, edit indices
as illustrated below:
5.1.5 Screen displays

The following two tables show you basic screen displays:
Screen infor- Display Meaning

mation
"8 8 8 8 8" Inverter is busy with internal data processing.
"- - - - -" Action not completed or not possible
"Pxxxx" Writable parameter
"rxxxx" Read-only parameter
"inxxx" Indexed parameter
Hexadecimal Parameter value in hex format

number

Screen infor- Display Meaning

mation
"bxx x" Parameter value in bit format
"Fxxx" Fault code
"Axxx" Alarm code
"Cnxxx" Settable connection macro
"-Cnxxx" Current selected connection macro
"APxxx" Settable application macro
"-APxxx" Current selected application macro
"A" "G" "N" "T"
"B" "H" "O" "U"
"C" "I" "P" "V"
"D" "J" "Q" "X"
"E" "L" "R" "Y"
"F" "M" "S" "Z"
0 to 9 "?"
5.1.6 LED states

The SINAMICS V20 has only one LED for status indications. The LED can display orange,
green, or red.

5.2 Checking before power-on
If more than one inverter state exists, the LED displays in the following order of priority:
● Parameter cloning
● Commissioning mode
● All faults
● Ready (no fault)
For example, if there is an active fault when the inverter is in the commissioning mode, the
LED flashes green at 0.5 Hz.
Inverter state LED color

Power up Orange
Ready (no fault) Green
Commissioning mode Slow flashing green at 0.5 Hz
All faults Fast flashing red at 2 Hz
Parameter cloning Flashing orange at 1 Hz
5.2 Checking before power-on

Perform the following checks before you power on the inverter system:
● Check that all cables have been connected correctly and that all relevant product and
plant/location safety precautions have been observed.
● Ensure that the motor and the inverter are configured for the correct supply voltage.
● Tighten all screws to the specified tightening torque.
5.3 Setting the 50/60 Hz selection menu
Note
The 50/60 Hz selection menu is visible only on first power-up or after a factory reset (P0970).
You can make a selection using the BOP or exit the menu without making a selection, and
the menu will not be displayed unless a factory reset is performed.
The motor base frequency also can be selected by changing P0100 to the desired value.

5.4 Starting the motor for test run
Functionality
This menu is used to set the motor base frequency according to which region of the world
that the motor is used in. The menu determines whether power settings (for example, rated
motor power P0307) are expressed in [kW] or [hp].
Parameter Value Description

P0100 0 Motor base frequency is 50 Hz (default) → Europe [kW]
1 Motor base frequency is 60 Hz → United States/Canada [hp]
2 Motor base frequency is 60 Hz → United States/Canada [kW]
5.4 Starting the motor for test run

This section describes how to start the motor for a test run to check that the motor speed
and rotation direction are correct.
Note
To run the motor, the inverter must be in the display menu (default display) and power-on
default state with P0700 (selection of command source) = 1.
If you are now in the setup menu (the inverter displays "P0304"), press for over two
seconds to exit the setup menu and enter the display menu.
You can start the motor in HAND or JOG mode.

5.5 Quick commissioning
Starting the motor in HAND mode

1. Press to start the motor.
2. Press to stop the motor.
Starting the motor in JOG mode

1. Press + to switch from HAND to JOG mode (the icon flashes).
2. Press to start the motor. Release to stop the motor.
5.5.1 Quick commissioning through the setup menu
5.5.1.1 Structure of the setup menu
Functionality of the setup menu

The setup menu guides you through the steps required for quick commissioning of the
inverter system. It consists of the following four sub-menus:
Sub-menu Functionality
1 Motor data Sets nominal motor parameters for quick commissioning
2 Connection macro selection Sets macros required for standard wiring arrangements
3 Application macro selection Sets macros required for certain common applications
4 Common parameter selection Sets parameters required for inverter performance optimization

Menu structure
5.5.1.2 Setting motor data
Functionality
This menu is designed for easy setup of nominal motor nameplate data.
Text menu
If you set P8553 to 1, parameter numbers in this menu are replaced with short text.

Setting parameters
Note
In the table below, "●" indicates that the value of this parameter must be entered according
to the rating plate of the motor.
Parameter Access level Function Text menu

(if P8553 = 1)
P0100 1 50/60 Hz selection
=0: Europe [kW], 50 Hz (factory default)
=1: North America [hp], 60 Hz (EU - US)
=2: North America [kW], 60 Hz
P0304[0] ● 1 Rated motor voltage [V]
Note that the input of rating plate data must correspond with the
wiring of the motor (star/delta) (MOT V)
P0305[0] ● 1 Rated motor current [A]
Note that the input of rating plate data must correspond with the
wiring of the motor (star/delta) (MOT A)
P0307[0] ● 1 Rated motor power [kW/hp] P0100 = 0 or 2:
If P0100 = 0 or 2, motor power unit = [kW]
If P0100 = 1, motor power unit = [hp]
(MOT P)
P0100 =1:
(MOT HP)
P0308[0] ● 1 Rated motor power factor (cosφ)
Visible only when P0100 = 0 or 2
(M COS)
P0309[0] ● 1 Rated motor efficiency [%]
Visible only when P0100 = 1
Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value. (M EFF)
P0310[0] ● 1 Rated motor frequency [Hz]
(M FREQ)
P0311[0] ● 1 Rated motor speed [RPM]
(M RPM)
P1900 2 Select motor data identification
= 0: Disabled
= 2: Identification of all parameters in standstill (MOT ID)

5.5.1.3 Setting connection macros
NOTICE
Connection macro settings
When commissioning the inverter, the connection macro setting is a one-off setting. Make
sure that you proceed as follows before you change the connection macro setting to a
value different from your last setting:
1. Do a factory reset (P0010 = 30, P0970 = 1)
2. Repeat the quick commissioning and change the connection macro
Failure to observe may cause the inverter to accept the parameter settings from both the
currently and the previously selected macros, which may lead to undefined and
unexplainable inverter operation.
However, communication parameters P2010, P2011, P2021 and P2023 for connection
macros Cn010 and Cn011 are not reset automatically after a factory reset. If necessary,
reset them manually.
After changing P2023 setting for Cn010 or Cn011, power-cycle the inverter. During the
power-cycle, wait until LED has gone off or the display has gone blank (may take a few
seconds) before re-applying power.
Note
The wiring diagrams later in this section use PNP control mode as examples.
Functionality
This menu selects which macro is required for standard wiring arrangements. The default
one is "Cn000" for connection macro 0.
All connection macros only change the CDS0 (command data set 0) parameters. The CDS1
parameters are used for the BOP control.
Connection macro Description Display example

Cn000 Factory default setting. Makes no parame-
ter changes.
Cn001 BOP as the only control source
Cn002 Control from terminals (PNP/NPN)
Cn003 Fixed speeds
Cn004 Fixed speed in binary mode The minus sign indicates that this macro is the cur-
Cn005 Analog input and fixed frequency rently selected macro.
Cn006 External push button control

Cn007 External push button with analog setpoint
Cn008 PID control with analog input reference
Cn009 PID control with the fixed value reference
Cn010 USS control
Cn011 MODBUS RTU control

Setting connection macros
Connection macro Cn001 - BOP as the only control source
Connection macro settings:
Parameter Description Factory default Default for Cn001 Remarks

P0700[0] Selection of command source 1 1 BOP
P1000[0] Selection of frequency 1 1 BOP MOP
P0731[0] BI: Function of digital output 1 52.3 52.2 Inverter running
P0732[0] BI: Function of digital output 2 52.7 52.3 Inverter fault active
P0771[0] CI: Analog output 21 21 Actual frequency
P0810[0] BI: CDS bit 0 (Hand/Auto) 0 0 Hand mode

Connection macro Cn002 - Control from terminals (PNP/NPN)

External control - Potentiometer with setpoint
Both NPN and PNP can be realized with the same parameters. You can change the
connection of the digital input common terminal to 24 V or 0 V to decide the mode.

P0700[0] Selection of command source 1 2 Terminal as command source
P1000[0] Selection of frequency 1 2 Analog as speed setpoint
P0701[0] Function of digital input 1 0 1 ON/OFF
P0702[0] Function of digital input 2 0 12 Reverse
P0703[0] Function of digital input 3 9 9 Fault acknowledgement
P0704[0] Function of digital input 4 15 10 JOG forward

Connection macro Cn003 - Fixed speeds

Three fixed speeds with ON/OFF1
If more than one fixed frequency is selected at the same time, the selected frequencies are
summed, that is, FF1 + FF2 + FF3.

P0700[0] Selection of command source 1 2 Terminal as command source
P1000[0] Selection of frequency 1 3 Fixed frequency
P0702[0] Function of digital input 2 0 15 Fixed speed bit 0
P1016[0] Fixed frequency mode 1 1 Direct selection mode
P1020[0] BI: Fixed frequency selection bit 0 722.3 722.1 DI2
P1001[0] Fixed frequency 1 10 10 Speed low
P1002[0] Fixed frequency 2 15 15 Speed middle
P1003[0] Fixed frequency 3 25 25 Speed high

Connection macro Cn004 - Fixed speeds in binary mode

Fixed speeds with ON command in binary mode
Up to 16 different fixed frequency values (0 Hz, P1001 to P1015) can be selected by the
fixed frequency selectors (P1020 to P1023). For more information about the fixed
frequencies in binary mode, see the parameter descriptions of P1001 to P1016 in Section
"Parameter list (Page 187)".

P0700[0] Selection of command source 1 2 Terminals as command source
P1000[0] Selection of frequency 1 3 Fixed frequency
P1001[0] Fixed frequency 1 10 10 Fixed speed 1
P1016[0] Fixed frequency mode 1 2 Binary mode
P0840[0] BI: ON/OFF1 19.0 1025.0 Inverter starts at the fixed speed
selected

Connection macro Cn005 - Analog input and fixed frequency

The analog input works as an additional setpoint.
If digital input 2 and digital input 3 are active together, the selected frequencies are summed,
that is, FF1 + FF2.
Function diagram
When the fixed speed is selected, the additional setpoint channel from the analog is disabled.
If there is no fixed speed setpoint, the setpoint channel connects to the analog input.

P1000[0] Selection of frequency 1 23 Fixed frequency + analog setpoint
P1016[0] Fixed frequency mode 1 1 Direct selection mode


P1074[0] BI: Disable additional setpoint 0 1025.0 FF disables the additional setpoint
Connection macro Cn006 - External push button control

Note that the command sources are pulse signals.

P1000[0] Selection of frequency 1 1 MOP as setpoint
P0701[0] Function of digital input 1 0 2 OFF1/hold
P0702[0] Function of digital input 2 0 1 ON pulse
P0703[0] Function of digital input 3 9 13 MOP up pulse
P0704[0] Function of digital input 4 15 14 MOP down pulse
P0727[0] Selection of 2/3-wire method 0 3 3-wire
ON pulse + OFF1/hold + Reverse
P1040[0] Setpoint of the MOP 5 0 Initial frequency
P1047[0] MOP ramp-up time of the RFG 10 10 Ramp-up time from zero to max-
imum frequency
P1048[0] MOP ramp-down time of the RFG 10 10 Ramp-down time from maximum
frequency to zero

Connection macro Cn007 - External push buttons with analog control

Note that the command sources are pulse signals.

P1000[0] Selection of frequency 1 2 Analog
P0701[0] Function of digital input 1 0 1 OFF hold
P0702[0] Function of digital input 2 0 2 Forward pulse + ON
P0703[0] Function of digital input 3 9 12 Reverse pulse + ON
P0727[0] Selection of 2/3-wire method 0 2 3-wire
STOP + Forward pulse + Reverse
pulse

Connection macro Cn008 - PID control with analog reference
Note
If a negative setpoint for the PID control is desired, change the setpoint and feedback wiring
as needed.
When you switch to Hand mode from PID control mode, P2200 becomes 0 to disable the
PID control. When you switch it back to Auto mode, P2200 becomes 1 to enable the PID
control again.

P2200[0] BI: Enable PID controller 0 1 Enable PID
P2253[0] CI: PID setpoint 0 755.0 PID setpoint = AI1
P2264[0] CI: PID feedback 755.0 755.1 PID feedback = AI2
P0756[1] Type of analog input 0 2 AI2, 0 mA to 20 mA

Connection macro Cn009 - PID control with the fixed value reference

P0702[0] Function of digital input 2 0 15 DI2 = PID fixed value 1
P2200[0] BI: Enable PID controller 0 1 Enable PID
P2201[0] Fixed PID setpoint 1 [%] 10 10 -
P2216[0] Fixed PID setpoint mode 1 1 Direct selection
P2220[0] BI: Fixed PID setpoint select bit 0 722.3 722.1 BICO connection DI2
P2253[0] CI: PID setpoint 0 2224 PID setpoint = fixed value
P2264[0] CI: PID feedback 755.0 755.1 PID feedback = AI2

Connection macro Cn010 - USS control

P0700[0] Selection of command source 1 5 RS485 as the command source
P1000[0] Selection of frequency 1 5 RS485 as the speed setpoint
P2023[0] RS485 protocol selection 1 1 USS protocol
P2010[0] USS/MODBUS baudrate 6 8 Baudrate 38400 bps
P2011[0] USS address 0 1 USS address for inverter
P2012[0] USS PZD length 2 2 Number of PZD words
P2013[0] USS PKW length 127 127 Variable PKW words
P2014[0] USS/MODBUS telegram off time 2000 500 Time to receive data
Connection macro Cn011 - MODBUS RTU control

P0700[0] Selection of command source 1 5 RS485 as the command source
P1000[0] Selection of frequency 1 5 RS485 as the speed setpoint
P2023[0] RS485 protocol selection 1 2 MODBUS RTU protocol
P2010[0] USS/MODBUS baudrate 6 6 Baudrate 9600 bps
P2021[0] MODBUS address 1 1 MODBUS address for inverter


P2022[0] MODBUS reply timeout 1000 1000 Maximum time to send reply back to
the master
P2014[0] USS/MODBUS telegram off time 2000 100 Time to receive data
P2034 MODBUS parity on RS485 2 2 Parity of MODBUS telegrams on RS485
P2035 MODBUS stop bits on RS485 1 1 Number of stop bits in MODBUS
telegrams on RS485
5.5.1.4 Setting application macros
NOTICE
Application macro settings
When commissioning the inverter, the application macro setting is a one-off setting. Make
sure that you proceed as follows before you change the application macro setting to a value
different from your last setting:
1. Do a factory reset (P0010 = 30, P0970 = 1)
2. Repeat the quick commissioning and change the application macro
Failure to observe may cause the inverter to accept the parameter settings from both the
currently and the previously selected macros, which may lead to undefined and
unexplainable operation.
Functionality
This menu defines certain common applications. Each application macro provides a set of
parameter settings for a specific application. After you select an application macro, the
corresponding settings are applied to the inverter to simplify the commissioning process.
The default application macro is "AP000" for application macro 0. If none of the application
macros fits your application, select the one that is the closest to your application and make
further parameter changes as desired.
Application macro Description Display example

AP000 Factory default setting. Makes no parameter changes.
AP010 Simple pump applications
AP020 Simple fan applications
AP021 Compressor applications
AP030 Conveyor applications
The minus sign indicates that this macro is
the currently selected macro.

Setting application macros
Application macro AP010 - Simple pump applications
Parameter Description Factory Default for Remarks

default AP010
P1080[0] Minimum frequency 0 15 Inverter running at a lower speed inhibited
P1300[0] Control mode 0 7 Quadratic V/f
P1110[0] BI: Inhibit negative frequency setpoint 0 1 Reverse pump rotation inhibited
P1210[0] Automatic restart 1 2 Restart after mains blackout
P1120[0] Ramp-up time 10 10 Ramp-up time from zero to maximum frequency
P1121[0] Ramp-down time 10 10 Ramp-down time from maximum frequency to zero
Application macro AP020 - Simple fan applications
Parameter Description Factory Default for Remarks

default AP020
P1110[0] BI: Inhibit negative frequency setpoint 0 1 Reverse fan rotation inhibited
P1300[0] Control mode 0 7 Quadratic V/f
P1200[0] Flying start 0 2 Search for the speed of the running motor with a heavy
inertia load so that the motor runs up to the setpoint
P1210[0] Automatic restart 1 2 Restart after mains blackout

Application macro AP021 - Compressor applications
Parameter Description Factory default Default for Remarks

AP021
P1300[0] Control mode 0 0 Linear V/f
P1312[0] Starting boost 0 30 Boost only effective when accelerating for the first time
(standstill)
P1311[0] Acceleration boost 0 0 Boost only effective when accelerating or braking
P1310[0] Continuous boost 50 50 Additional boost over the complete frequency range
Application macro AP030 - Conveyor applications
Parameter Description Factory default Default for Remarks

AP030
P1300[0] Control mode 0 1 V/f with FCC
P1312[0] Starting boost 0 30 Boost only effective when accelerating for the first time
(standstill)
5.5.1.5 Setting common parameters
Functionality
This menu provides some common parameters for inverter performance optimization.
Text menu
If you set P8553 to 1, parameter numbers in this menu are replaced with short text.
Setting parameters
Parameter Access Function Text menu Parameter Access Function Text menu
level (if P8553 = 1) level (if P8553 =1)
P1080[0] 1 Minimum motor P1001[0] 2 Fixed frequency set-
frequency point 1
(MIN F) (FIX F1)
P1082[0] 1 Maximum motor P1002[0] 2 Fixed frequency set-
frequency point 2
(MAX F) (FIX F2)

Parameter Access Function Text menu Parameter Access Function Text menu
level (if P8553 = 1) level (if P8553 =1)
P1120[0] 1 Ramp-up time P1003[0] 2 Fixed frequency set-
point 3
(RMP UP) (FIX F3)
P1121[0] 1 Ramp-down time P2201[0] 2 Fixed PID frequency
setpoint 1
(RMP DN) (PID F1)
P1058[0] 2 JOG frequency P2202[0] 2 Fixed PID frequency
setpoint 2
(JOG P) (PID F2)
P1060[0] 2 JOG ramp-up time P2203[0] 2 Fixed PID frequency
setpoint 3
(JOG UP) (PID F3)
P1061[0] 2 JOG ramp-down
time
(JOG DN)
5.5.2 Quick commissioning through the parameter menu

As an alternative to quick commissioning through the setup menu, commissioning using the
parameter menu provides the other solution for quick commissioning. This would be helpful
for those who are used to commissioning the inverter in this way.
Quick commissioning methods

● Conventional quick commissioning
This method requires you to complete quick commissioning with all the motor data given
in the parameter setting table below.
● Estimated quick commissioning
This method provides an easier way to complete quick commissioning with limited motor
data. Instead of entering all the motor data, you enter the rated motor power (P0301, in
kW) and then the inverter estimates and then sets the values of the rest of the motor data
including P0304, P0305, P0307, P0308, P0310 and P0311.

Restrictions on the estimated quick commissioning:

– This functionality is recommended at the rated supply voltage.
– This functionality is designed around the data for Siemens motors 1LE0001, 1TL0001,
1LE1 and 1LA7 although it may make reasonable approximations for other motor
types.
– This functionality gives an estimate of the motor data values; however, if the motor is
to operatre near the limits of its capability (rated power and current), then you must
carry out the conventional quick commissioning.
– The value calculations only work with motors connected in star configuration and
assume the supply frequency is 50 Hz.
– The calculations use the DC link voltage measurement and thus only work if mains is
connected.
– The calculations are accurate only for 4-pole motors.
– The 87 Hz characteristic is not supported.
Setting parameters
Note
In the table below, "●" indicates that you must enter the value of this parameter according to
the rating plate of the motor when you carry out the conventional quick commissioning.
Parameters for Parameters for Function Setting

conventional quick estimated quick
commissioning commissioning
P0003 = 3 P0003 = 3 User access level = 3 (Expert access level)
P0010 = 1 P0010 = 1 Commissioning parameter = 1 (quick commissioning)
P0100 P0100 = 0 50/60 Hz selection Set a value, if necessary:
=0: Europe [kW], 50 Hz (factory default)
=1: North America [hp], 60 Hz
=2: North America [kW], 60 Hz
Note:
Set this parameter to 0 if you want to carry out the
estimated quick commissioning.
P0301 = 0 P0301 > 0 Rated motor power [kW] Range: 0 to 2000
= 0: Conventional quick commissioning (factory
default)
> 0: Estimated quick commissioning
Once you set this parameter to a non-zero value,
you only need to enter the rated motor power and
then the inverter calculates and sets the values of
the rest of the motor data (P0304, P0305, P0307,
P0308, P0310 and P0311).


P0304[0] ● - Rated motor voltage [V] Range: 10 to 2000
Note:
The input of rating plate data must correspond with
the wiring of the motor (star/delta).
P0305[0] ● - Rated motor current [A] Range: 0.01 to 10000
Note:
The input of rating plate data must correspond with
the wiring of the motor (star/delta).
P0307[0] ● - Rated motor power [kW/hp] Range: 0.01 to 2000.0
Note:
If P0100 = 0 or 2, motor power unit = [kW]
If P0100 = 1, motor power unit = [hp]
P0308[0] ● - Rated motor power factor Range: 0.000 to 1.000
(cosφ) Note:
This parameter is visible only when P0100 = 0 or 2.
P0309[0] ● - Rated motor efficiency [%] Range: 0.0 to 99.9
Note:
Visible only when P0100 = 1
Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value.
P0310[0] ● - Rated motor frequency [Hz] Range: 12.00 to 550.00
P0311[0] ● - Rated motor speed [RPM] Range: 0 to 40000
P0335[0] P0335[0] Motor cooling Set according to the actual motor cooling method
= 0: Self-cooled (factory default)
= 1: Force-cooled
= 2: Self-cooled and internal fan
= 3: Force-cooled and internal fan
P0640[0] P0640[0] Motor overload factor [%] Range: 10.0 to 400.0 (factory default: 150.0)
Note:
The parameter defines motor overload current limit
relative to P0305 (rated motor current).
P0700[0] P0700[0] Selection of command = 0: Factory default setting
source = 1: Operator panel (factory default)
= 2: Terminal
= 5: USS/MODBUS on RS485
P1000[0] P1000[0] Selection of frequency set- Range: 0 to 77 (factory default: 1)
point = 0: No main setpoint
= 1: MOP setpoint
= 2: Analog setpoint
= 3: Fixed frequency
= 5: USS/MODBUS on RS485
= 7: Analog setpoint 2
For additional settings, see Chapter "Parameter list
(Page 183)".


P1080[0] P1080[0] Minimum frequency [Hz] Range: 0.00 to 550.00 (factory default: 0.00)
Note:
The value set here is valid for both clockwise and
counter-clockwise rotation.
P1082[0] P1082[0] Maximum frequency [Hz] Range: 0.00 to 550.00 (factory default: 50.00)
Note:
The value set here is valid for both clockwise and
counter-clockwise rotation
P1120[0] P1120[0] Ramp-up time [s] Range: 0.00 to 650.00 (factory default: 10.00)
Note:
The value set here means the time taken for motor
to accelerate from standstill up to the maximum
motor frequency (P1082) when no rounding is
used.
P1121[0] P1121[0] Ramp-down time [s] Range: 0.00 to 650.00 (factory default: 10.00)
Note:
The value set here means the time taken for motor
to decelerate from the maximum motor frequency
(P1082) down to standstill when no rounding is
used.
P1300[0] P1300[0] Control mode = 0: V/f with linear characteristic (factory default)
= 1: V/f with FCC
= 2: V/f with quadratic characteristic
= 3: V/f with programmable characteristic
= 4: V/f with linear eco
= 5: V/f for textile applications
= 6: V/f with FCC for textile applications
= 7: V/f with quadratic eco
= 19: V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
P3900 = 3 P3900 = 3 End of quick commissioning = 0: No quick commissioning (factory default)
= 1: End quick commissioning with factory reset
= 2: End quick commissioning
= 3: End quick commissioning only for motor data
Note:
After completion of calculation, P3900 and P0010
are automatically reset to their original value 0.
The inverter displays "8.8.8.8.8" which indicates
that it is busy with internal data processing.
P1900 = 2 P1900 = 2 Select motor data identification = 0: Disabled (factory default)
= 2: Identification of all parameters in standstill

5.6 Function commissioning
5.6.1 Overview of inverter functions

The list below provides an overview of the main functions that the SINAMICS V20 supports.
For detailed description of individual parameters, see Chapter "Parameter list (Page 183)".
● 2/3 wire control (P0727)
● 50/60 Hz customization (Page 60) (P0100)
● Adjustable PWM modulation (P1800 to P1803)
● Analog input terminal function control (P0712, P0713, r0750 to P0762)
● Analog output terminal function control (P0773 to r0785)
● Automatic restart (Page 117) (P1210, P1211)
● BICO function (r3978)
● Blockage clearing mode (Page 111) (P3350 to P3353, P3361 to P3364)
● Cavitation protection (Page 126) (P2360 to P2362)
● Command and setpoint source selection (P0700, P0719, P1000 to r1025, P1070 to r1084)
● Command data set (CDS) and inverter data set (DDS) (r0050, r0051, P0809 to P0821)
● Condensation protection (Page 119) (P3854)
● Continuous boost, acceleration boost and starting boost level control (Page 89) (P1310 to
P1316)
● DC coupling function (Page 129)
● DC-link voltage control (Page 105) (P0210, P1240 to P1257)
● Digital input terminal function control (P0701 to P0713, r0722, r0724)
● Digital output terminal function control (P0731, P0732, P0747, P0748)
● Dual ramp operation (Page 128) (r1119 to r1199, P2150 to P2166)
● Economy mode (Page 113) (P1300, r1348)
● Energy consumption monitoring (r0039, P0040, P0042, P0043)
● Fault and warning reaction setting (r0944 to P0952, P2100 to P2120, r3113, P3981)
● Flying start (Page 116) (P1200 to r1204)
● Free function blocks (FFBs) (Page 115) (P2800 to P2890)
● Frost protection (Page 118) (P3852, P3853)
● Hammer start mode (Page 109) (P3350 to P3354, P3357 to P3360)
● High/low overload (HO/LO) modes (Page 132) (P0205)
A new parameter P0205 is added to enable the HO/LO selection for heavy/low load
applications.
● Imax control (Page 104) (P1340 to P1346)

● Inverter keep-running operation (P0503)

● Inverter status at fault (Page 323) (r0954, r0955, r0956, r0957 and r0958)
This function enables you to read the relevant fault information through parameters
concerned.
● JOG mode operation (Page 87) (P1055 to P1061)
● List of modified parameters (P0004)
A new value is added to parameter P0004 to enable the parameter filter which allows you
to view the modified parameters.
● MODBUS parity/stop bit selection (P2034, P2035)
New parameters P2034 and P2035 are added to enable MODBUS parity/stop bit
selection.
● Motor blocking, load missing, belt failure detection (Page 106) (P2177 to r2198)
● Motor brake controls (Page 93) (holding brake, DC brake, compound brake and dynamic
brake) (P1215 to P1237)
● Motor frequency display scaling (P0511, r0512)
● Motor staging (Page 123) (P2370 to P2380)
● Motorized potentiometer (MOP) mode selection (P1031 to r1050)
● ON/OFF2 function for digital inputs (P0701)
A new value is added to parameter P0701 to run the motor with the ON command or
cancel the inverter pulses with the OFF2 command.
● Parameter cloning (Page 345) (P0802 to P0804, P8458)
● PID controller (Page 91) (P2200 to P2355)
● Pre-configured connection macros and application macros (P0507, P0717) (see also
"Setting connection macros (Page 65)" and "Setting application macros (Page 76)".)
● Programmable V/f coordinates (P1320 to P1333)
● Protection of user-defined parameters (P0011, P0012, P0013)
● Skip frequency and resonance damping (P1091 to P1101, P1338)
● Sleep (hibernation) mode (Page 120) (P2365 to P2367)
● Slip compensation (P1334 to P1338)
● Super torque mode (Page 108) (P3350 to P3356)
● Text menu display (P8553) (see also "Setting motor data (Page 63)" and "Setting
common parameters (Page 78)".)
● User access level control (P0003)
● USS/MODBUS communication on RS485 (P2010 to P2037) (Page 169)
● Various stop mode selection (Page 85) (P0840 to P0886)
● Wobble function (Page 122) (P2940 to r2955)

5.6.2 Commissioning basic functions
5.6.2.1 Selecting the stop mode
Functionality
Both the inverter and the user have to respond to a wide range of situations and stop the
inverter if necessary. Thus operating requirements as well as inverter protective functions
(e.g. electrical or thermal overload), or rather man-machine protective functions, have to be
taken into account. Due to the different OFF functions (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) the inverter can
flexibly respond to the mentioned requirements. Note that after an OFF2/OFF3 command,
the inverter is in the state "ON inhibit". To switch the motor on again, you need a signal low
→ high of the ON command.
OFF1
The OFF1 command is closely coupled to the ON command. When the ON command is
withdrawn, OFF1 is directly activated. The inverter is braked by OFF1 with the ramp-down
time P1121. If the output frequency falls below the parameter value P2167 and if the time in
P2168 has expired, then the inverter pulses are cancelled.

Note
• OFF1 can be entered using a wide range of command sources via BICO parameter
P0840 (BI: ON/OFF1) and P0842 (BI: ON/OFF1 with reversing).
• BICO parameter P0840 is pre-assigned by defining the command source using P0700.
• The ON and the following OFF1 command must have the same source.
• If the ON/OFF1 command is set for more than one digital input, then only the digital input,
that was last set, is valid.
• OFF1 is active low.
• When various OFF commands are selected simultaneously, the following priority applies:
OFF2 (highest priority) – OFF3 – OFF1.
• OFF1 can be combined with DC current braking or compound braking.
• When the motor holding brake MHB (P1215) is activated, for an OFF1, P2167 and P2168
are not taken into account.
OFF2
The inverter pulses are immediately cancelled by the OFF2 command. Thus the motor
coasts down and it is not possible to stop in a controlled way.
Note
• The OFF2 command can have one or several sources. The command sources are
defined using BICO parameters P0844 (BI: 1. OFF2) and P0845 (BI: 2. OFF2).
• As a result of the pre-assignment (default setting), the OFF2 command is set to the BOP.
This source is still available even if another command source is defined (e.g. terminal as
command source → P0700 = 2 and OFF2 is selected using digital input 2 → P0702 = 3).
OFF2 (highest priority) – OFF3 – OFF1.

OFF3
The braking characteristics of OFF3 are identical with those of OFF1 with the exception of
the independent OFF3 ramp-down time P1135. If the output frequency falls below parameter
value P2167 and if the time in P2168 has expired, then the inverter pulses are cancelled as
for the OFF1 command.
Note
• OFF3 can be entered using a wide range of command sources via BICO parameters
P0848 (BI: 1. OFF3) and P0849 (BI: 2. OFF3).
OFF2 (highest priority) – OFF3 – OFF1
5.6.2.2 Running the inverter in JOG mode
Functionality
The JOG function can be controlled by either the (built-in) BOP or the digital inputs. When
controlled by the BOP, pressing the RUN button will cause the motor to start and rotate at
the pre-set JOG frequency (P1058). The motor stops when the RUN button is released.
When using the digital inputs as the JOG command source, the JOG frequency is set by
P1058 for JOG right and P1059 for JOG left.

The JOG function allows:

● to check the functionality of the motor and inverter after commissioning has been
completed (first traversing motion, checking the direction of rotation, etc.)
● to bring a motor or a motor load into a specific position
● to traverse a motor, e.g. after a program has been interrupted
Setting parameters
Parameter Function Setting

P1055[0...2] BI: Enable JOG right This parameter defines source of JOG right when P0719 = 0
(Auto selection of command/setpoint source).
Factory default: 19.8
P1056[0...2] BI: Enable JOG left This parameter defines source of JOG left when P0719 = 0
(Auto selection of command/setpoint source).
Factory default: 0
P1057 JOG enable = 1: Jogging is enabled (default)
P1058[0...2] JOG frequency [Hz] This parameter determines the frequency at which the inverter
will run while jogging is active.
Range: 0.00 to 550.00 (factory default: 5.00)
P1059[0...2] JOG frequency left [Hz] This parameter determines the frequency at which the inverter
will run while JOG left is selected.
P1060[0...2] JOG ramp-up time [s] This parameter sets jog ramp-up time which is used while
jogging is active.
P1061[0...2] JOG ramp-down time [s] This parameter sets jog ramp-down time which is used while
jogging is active.

5.6.2.3 Setting the voltage boost
Functionality
For low output frequencies, the V/f characteristics only give a low output voltage. The ohmic
resistances of the stator winding play a role at low frequencies, which are neglected when
determining the motor flux in V/f control. This means that the output voltage can be too low in
order to:
● implement the magnetization of the asynchronous motor
● hold the load
● overcome losses in the system.
The output voltage can be increased (boosted) in the inverter using the parameters as
shown in the table below.
Parameter Boost type Description

P1310 Continuous boost [%] This parameter defines boost level relative to P0305 (rated motor current) applicable to
both linear and quadratic V/f curves.
The voltage boost is effective over the complete frequency range whereby the value
continually decreases at high frequencies.

Parameter Boost type Description

P1311 Acceleration boost [%] This parameter applies boost relative to P0305 (rated motor current) following a posi-
tive setpoint change and drops back out once the setpoint is reached.
The voltage boost is only effective when accelerating or braking.
P1312 Starting boost [%] This parameter applies a constant linear offset relative to P0305 (rated motor current)
to active V/f curve (either linear or quadratic) after an ON command and is active until:
• ramp output reaches setpoint for the first time respectively
• setpoint is reduced to less than present ramp output
The voltage boost is only effective when accelerating for the first time (standstill).

5.6.2.4 Setting the PID controller
Functionality
The integrated PID controller (technology controller) supports all kinds of simple process
control tasks, e.g. controlling pressures, levels, or flowrates. The PID controller specifies the
speed setpoint of the motor in such a way that the process variable to be controlled
corresponds to its setpoint.
Setting parameters

Main function parameters
P2200[0...2] BI: Enable PID controller This parameter allows user to enable/disable the PID controller.
Setting to 1 enables the PID closed-loop controller.
Setting 1 automatically disables normal ramp times set in P1120 and
P1121 and the normal frequency setpoints.
Factory default: 0
P2235[0...2] BI: Enable PID-MOP (UP-cmd) This parameter defines source of UP command.
Possible sources: 19.13 (BOP), 722.x (Digital Input), 2036.13 (USS
on RS485)
P2236[0...2] BI: Enable PID-MOP (DOWN-cmd) This parameter defines source of DOWN command.
Possible sources: 19.14 (BOP), 722.x (Digital Input), 2036.14 (USS
on RS485)


Additional commissioning parameters
P2251 PID mode = 0: PID as setpoint (factory default)
= 1: PID as trim source
P2253[0...2] CI: PID setpoint This parameter defines setpoint source for PID setpoint input.
Possible sources: 755[0] (Analog input 1), 2018.1 (USS PZD 2),
2224 (Actual fixed PID setpoint), 2250 (Output setpoint of PID-MOP)
P2254[0...2] CI: PID trim source This parameter selects trim source for PID setpoint.
Possible sources: 755[0] (Analog input 1), 2018.1 (USS PZD 2),
2224 (Actual fixed PID setpoint), 2250 (Output setpoint of PID-MOP)
P2255 PID setpoint gain factor Range: 0.00 to 100.00 (factory default: 100.00)
P2256 PID trim gain factor Range: 0.00 to 100.00 (factory default: 100.00)
P2257 Ramp-up time for PID setpoint [s] Range: 0.00 to 650.00 (factory default: 1.00)
P2258 Ramp-down time for PID setpoint [s] Range: 0.00 to 650.00 (factory default: 1.00)
P2263 PID controller type = 0: D component on feedback signal (factory default)
= 1: D component on error signal
P2264[0...2] CI: PID feedback Possible sources: 755[0] (Analog input 1), 2224 (Actual fixed PID
setpoint), 2250 (Output setpoint of PID-MOP)
Factory default: 755[0]
P2265 PID feedback filter time constant [s] Range: 0.00 to 60.00 (factory default: 0.00)
P2267 Maximum value for PID feedback [%] Range: -200.00 to 200.00 (factory default: 100.00)
P2268 Minimum value for PID feedback [%] Range: -200.00 to 200.00 (factory default: 0.00)
P2269 Gain applied to PID feedback Range: 0.00 to 500.00 (factory default: 100.00)
P2270 PID feedback function selector = 0: Disabled (factory default)
= 1: Square root (root(x))
= 2: Square (x*x)
= 3: Cube (x*x*x)
P2271 PID transducer type = 0 : Disabled (factory default)
= 1: Inversion of PID feedback signal
P2274 PID derivative time [s] Range: 0.000 to 60.000
Factory default: 0.000 (the derivative time does not have any effect)
P2280 PID proportional gain Range: 0.000 to 65.000 (factory default: 3.000)
P2285 PID integral time [s] Range: 0.000 to 60.000 (factory default: 0.000)
P2291 PID output upper limit [%] Range: -200.00 to 200.00 (factory default: 100.00)
P2292 PID output lower limit [%] Range: -200.00 to 200.00 (factory default: 0.00)
P2293 Ramp-up/-down time of PID limit [s] Range: 0.00 to 100.00 (factory default: 1.00)
P2295 Gain applied to PID output Range: -100.00 to 100.00 (factory default: 100.00)
P2350 PID autotune enable = 0: PID autotuning disabled (factory default)
= 1: PID autotuning via Ziegler Nichols (ZN) standard
= 2: PID autotuning as 1 plus some overshoot (O/S)
= 3: PID autotuning as 2 little or no overshoot (O/S)
= 4: PID autotuning PI only, quarter damped response
P2354 PID tuning timeout length [s] Range: 60 to 65000 (factory default: 240)
P2355 PID tuning offset [%] Range: 0.00 to 20.00 (factory default: 5.00)


Output values
r2224 CO: Actual fixed PID setpoint [%]
r2225.0 BO: PID fixed frequency status
r2245 CO: PID-MOP input frequency of the RFG [%]
r2250 CO: Output setpoint of PID-MOP [%]
r2260 CO: PID setpoint after PID-RFG [%]
P2261 PID setpoint filter time constant [s]
r2262 CO: Filtered PID setpoint after RFG [%]
r2266 CO: PID filtered feedback [%]
r2272 CO: PID scaled feedback [%]
r2273 CO: PID error [%]
r2294 CO: Actual PID output [%]
5.6.2.5 Setting the braking function
Functionality
The motor can be electrically or mechanically braked by the inverter via the following brakes:
● Electrical brakes
– DC brake
– Compound brake
– Dynamic brake
● Mechanical brake
– Motor holding brake
DC braking
DC braking causes the motor to stop rapidly by applying a DC braking current (current
applied also holds shaft stationary). For DC braking, a DC current is impressed in the stator
winding which results in a significant braking torque for an asynchronous motor.
DC braking is selected as follows:
● Sequence 1: selected after OFF1 or OFF3 (the DC brake is released via P1233)
● Sequence 2: selected directly with the BICO parameter P1230
Sequence 1
1. Enabled using P1233
2. DC braking is activated with the OFF1 or OFF3 command (see figure below)
3. The inverter frequency is ramped down along the parameterized OFF1 or OFF3 ramp
down to the frequency at which DC braking is to start - P1234.
4. The inverter pulses are inhibited for the duration of the de-magnetizing time P0347.
5. The required braking current P1232 is then impressed for the selected braking time
P1233. The status is displayed using signal r0053 bit 00.

The inverter pulses are inhibited after the braking time has expired.
Sequence 2
1. Enabled and selected with the BICO parameter P1230 (see figure below).
2. The inverter pulses are inhibited for the duration of the de-magnetizing time P0347.
3. The requested braking current P1232 is impressed for the time selected and the motor is
braked. This state is displayed using signal r0053 bit 00.
4. After DC braking has been cancelled, the inverter accelerates back to the setpoint
frequency until the motor speed matches the inverter output frequency.

Setting parameters

P1230[0...2] BI: Enable DC braking This parameter enables DC braking via a signal applied from
an external source. The function remains active while external
input signal is active.
Factory default: 0
P1232[0...2] DC braking current [%] This parameter defines level of DC current relative to rated
motor current (P0305).
Range: 0 to 250 (factory default: 100)
P1233[0...2] Duration of DC braking [s] This parameter defines duration for which DC braking is active
following an OFF1 or OFF3 command.
P1234[0...2] DC braking start frequency [Hz] This parameter sets the start frequency for DC braking.
P0347[0...2] Demagnetization time [s] This parameter changes time allowed after OFF2/fault condi-
tion, before pulses can be re-enabled.
WARNING
Motor overheat
For DC current braking, the motor kinetic energy is converted into thermal energy in the
motor. If braking lasts too long, then the motor can overheat.
Note
The "DC braking" function is only practical for induction motors.
DC braking is not suitable to hold suspended loads.
While DC braking, there is no other way of influencing the inverter speed using an external
control. When parameterizing and setting the inverter system, it should be tested using real
loads as far as possible.

Compound braking
For compound braking (enabled using P1236), DC braking is superimposed with
regenerative braking (where the inverter regenerates into the DC-link supply as it brakes
along a ramp). Effective braking is obtained without having to use additional components by
optimizing the ramp-down time (P1121 for OFF1 or when braking from f1 to f2, P1135 for
OFF3) and using compound braking P1236.
Setting parameters

P1236[0...2] Compound braking current [%] This parameter defines DC level superimposed on AC waveform after
exceeding DC-link voltage threshold of compound braking. The value is
entered in [%] relative to rated motor current (P0305).
P1254 Auto detect Vdc switch-on levels This parameter enables/disables auto-detection of switch-on levels for
Vdc_max controller.
= 0: Disabled
= 1: Enabled (factory default)
It is recommended to set P1254 = 1 (auto detection of Vdc switch-on
levels enabled). Note that auto detection only works when the inverter
has been in standby for over 20s.

WARNING
Motor overheat
For compound braking, regenerative braking is superimposed on the DC braking (braking
along a ramp). This means that components of the kinetic energy of the motor and motor
load are converted into thermal energy in the motor. This can cause the motor to overheat if
this power loss is too high or if the brake operation takes too long!
Note
The compound braking depends on the DC link voltage only (see threshold in the above
diagram). This will happen on OFF1, OFF3 and any regenerative condition. Compound
braking is deactivated, if:
• flying start is active
• DC braking is active.
Dynamic braking
Dynamic braking converts the regenerative energy, which is released when the motor
decelerates, into heat. An internal braking chopper or an external dynamic braking module,
which can control an external braking resistor, is required for dynamic braking. The inverter
or the external dynamic braking module controls the dynamic braking depending on the DC
link voltage. Contrary to DC and compound braking, this technique requires that an external
braking resistor is installed.
For more information about the dynamic braking module, see Appendix "Dynamic braking
module (Page 355)".

The continuous power PDB and the duty cycle for the braking resistor can be modified using
the dynamic braking module (for frame size A/B/C) or parameter P1237 (for frame size D).
NOTICE
Damage to the braking resistor
The average power of the dynamic braking module (braking chopper) cannot exceed the
power rating of the braking resistor.
Duty cycle tON (s) tOFF (s) tcycle (s) PDB

5% 12.0 228.0 240.0 0.05
10% 12.6 114.0 126.6 0.10
20% 14.2 57.0 71.2 0.20
50% 22.8 22.8 45.6 0.50
100% Infinite 0 Infinite 1.00

Setting parameters

P1237 Dynamic braking This parameter defines the rated duty cycle of the braking resistor
(chopper resistor). Dynamic braking is active when the function is ena-
bled and DC-link voltage exceeds the dynamic braking switch-on level.
= 0: Disabled (factory default)
= 1: 5% duty cycle
= 2: 10% duty cycle
= 3: 20% duty cycle
= 4: 50% duty cycle
= 5: 100% duty cycle
Note: This parameter is only applicable for inverters of frame size D. For
frame sizes A to C, the duty cycle of the braking resistor can be selected
with the dynamic braking module.
P1240[0...2] Configuration of Vdc controller This parameter enables/disables Vdc controller.
= 0: Vdc controller disabled
Note: This parameter must be set to 0 (Vdc controller disabled) to acti-
vate the dynamic braking.
P1254 Auto detect Vdc switch-on levels This parameter enables/disables auto-detection of switch-on levels for
Vdc_max controller.
= 0: Disabled
= 1: Enabled (factory default)
It is recommended to set P1254 = 1 (auto detection of Vdc switch-on
levels enabled). Note that auto detection only works when the inverter
has been in standby for over 20s. When P1240 = 0, P1254 is only appli-
cable for frame size D inverters.
WARNING
Risks with the use of inappropriate braking resistors
Braking resistors, which are to be mounted on the inverter, must be designed so that they
can tolerate the power dissipated. If an unsuitable braking resistor is used, there is a
danger of fire and the associated inverter will be significantly damaged.
Motor holding brake

The motor holding brake prevents the motor from undesirable turning when the inverter is
switched-off. The inverter has internal logic to control a motor holding brake.


Setting parameters

P1215 Holding brake enable This parameter enables/disables holding brake function. The
motor holding brake (MHB) is controlled via status word 1
r0052 bit 12.
= 0: Motor holding brake disabled (factory default)
= 1: Motor holding brake enabled
P1216 Holding brake release delay[s] This parameter defines period during which inverter runs at
minimum frequency P1080 before ramping up.
P1217 Holding time after ramp down [s] This parameter defines time for which inverter runs at mini-
mum frequency (P1080) after ramping down.
Connecting the motor holding brake

The motor holding brake can be connected to the inverter via digital outputs (DO1/DO2). An
additional relay is also required to allow the digital output to enable or disable the motor
holding brake.
WARNING
Potentially hazardous load
If the inverter controls the motor holding brake, then a commissioning may not be carried
out for potentially hazardous loads (e.g. suspended loads for crane applications) unless the
load has been secured.
It is not permissible to use the motor holding brake as operating brake. The reason for this
is that generally it is only designed for a limited number of emergency braking operations.

5.6.2.6 Setting the ramp time
Functionality
The ramp-function generator in the setpoint channel limits the speed of setpoint changes.
This causes the motor to accelerate and decelerate more smoothly, thereby protecting the
mechanical components of the driven machine.
Setting ramp-up/down time

● The ramp-up and ramp-down time can be set respectively in P1120 and P1121.
● When the required ramp-up or ramp-down time exceeds the maximum value of P1120 or
P1121, you can expand the maximum value by using a scaling factor specified in P1138
or P1139. In this case, calculate the ramp-up or ramp-down time as follows:
– Ramp-up time = P1120 * P1138
– Ramp-down time = P1121 * P1139
Setting parameters

P1082[0...2] Maximum frequency [Hz] This parameter sets maximum motor frequency at which motor will run
irrespective of the frequency setpoint.
P1120[0...2] Ramp-up time [s] This parameter sets the time taken for motor to accelerate from standstill
up to maximum motor frequency (P1082) when no rounding is used.
P1121[0...2] Ramp-down time [s] This parameter sets the time taken for motor to decelerate from maxi-
mum motor frequency (P1082) down to standstill when no rounding is
used.
P1138 Ramp-up time scaling factor This parameter sets the scaling factor for the ramp-up time.
P1139 Ramp-down time scaling factor This parameter sets the scaling factor for the ramp-down time.

Setting ramp-up/down rounding time

Rounding times are recommended, since they prevent an abrupt response, thus avoiding
detrimental effects on the mechanics.
Rounding times are not recommended when analog inputs are used, since they would result
in overshoot/undershoot in the inverter response.
Setting parameters

P1130[0...2] Ramp-up initial rounding time [s] This parameter defines rounding time at start of ramp-up.
P1131[0...2] Ramp-up final rounding time [s] This parameter defines rounding time at end of ramp-up.
P1132[0...2] Ramp-down initial rounding time [s] This parameter defines rounding time at start of ramp-down.
P1133[0...2] Ramp-down final rounding time [s] This parameter defines rounding time at end of ramp-down.

5.6.2.7 Setting the Imax controller
Functionality
If ramp-up time is too short, the inverter may display the alarm A501 which means the output
current is too high. The Imax controller reduces inverter current if the output current exceeds
the maximum output current limit (r0067). This is achieved by reducing the inverter's output
frequency or output voltage.

Setting parameters
You only have to change the factory default settings of the Imax controller if the inverter
tends to oscillate when it reaches the current limit or it is shut down due to overcurrent.

P0305[0...2] Rated motor current [A] This parameter defines the nominal motor current from rating plate.
P0640[0...2] Motor overload factor [%] This parameter defines motor overload current limit relative to P0305 (rated
motor current).
P1340[0...2] Imax controller propor- This parameter defines the proportional gain of the Imax controller.
tional gain Range: 0.000 to 0.499 (factory default: 0.030)
P1341[0...2] Imax controller integral This parameter defines the integral time constant of the Imax controller. Setting
time [s] P1341 to 0 disables the Imax controller.
P1345[0...2] Imax voltage controller This parameter sets the proportional gain of Imax voltage controller. If the out-
proportional gain put current (r0068) exceeds the maximum current (r0067), the inverter is dy-
namically controlled by reducing the output voltage.
P1346[0...2] Imax voltage controller This parameter defines the integral time constant of the Imax voltage controller.
integral time [s] Range: 0.000 to 50.000 (factory default: 0.300)
r0056.13 Status of motor control: Imax controller active
5.6.2.8 Setting the Vdc controller
Functionality
If ramp-down time is too short, the inverter may display the alarm A911 which means the DC
link voltage is too high. The Vdc controller dynamically controls the DC link voltage to
prevent overvoltage trips on high inertia systems.

Setting parameters

P1240[0...2] Configuration of Vdc control- This parameter enables/disables Vdc controller.
ler = 0: Vdc controller disabled
= 1: Vdc_max controller enabled (factory default)
= 2: Kinetic buffering (Vdc_min controller) enabled
= 3: Vdc_max controller and kinetic buffering (KIB) enabled
Note: This parameter must be set to 0 (Vdc controller disabled) if a braking
resistor is used.
P0210 Supply voltage [V] This parameter defines the supply voltage. Its default value depends upon
the type of inverter.
Range:
• 380 to 480 (for three phase AC 400 V inverters)
• 200 to 240 (for single phase AC 230 V inverters)
5.6.2.9 Setting the load torque monitoring function
Functionality
The load torque monitoring function allows the mechanical force transmission between the
motor and driven load to be monitored. This function can detect whether the driven load is
blocked, or the force transmission has been interrupted.
The inverter monitors the load torque of the motor in different ways:
● Motor blocking detection
● No-load monitoring
● Speed-dependent load torque monitoring

Setting parameters

P2177[0...2] Delay time for motor is blocked [ms] Defines the delay time for identifying that the motor is blocked.
P2179 Current limit for no load identified [%] This parameter defines the threshold current for A922 (no
load applied to inverter) relative to P0305 (rated motor cur-
rent).
P2180 Delay time for no-load identification [ms] Defines the delay time for detecting a missing output load.
P2181[0...2] Load monitoring mode The load monitoring is achieved by comparing the actual
frequency/torque curve with a programmed envelope (defined
by parameters P2182 to P2190). If the curve falls outside the
envelope, a warning or trip is generated.
= 0: Load monitoring disabled (factory default)
= 1: Warning: Low torque/frequency
= 2: Warning: High torque/frequency
= 3: Warning: High/low torque/frequency
= 4: Trip: Low torque/frequency
= 5: Trip: High torque/frequency
= 6: Trip: High/low torque/frequency
P2182[0...2] Load monitoring threshold frequency 1 [Hz] Range: 0.00 to 550.00 (factory default: 5.00)
P2185[0...2] Upper torque threshold 1 [Nm] Range: 0.0 to 99999.0 (factory default: value in r0333)
P2186[0...2] Lower torque threshold 1 [Nm] Range: 0.0 to 99999.0 (factory default: 0.0)
P2192[0...2] Load monitoring delay time [s] Range: 0 to 65 (factory default: 10)

5.6.3 Commissioning advanced functions
5.6.3.1 Starting the motor in super torque mode
Functionality
This startup mode applies a torque pulse for a given time to help start the motor.
Typical application field

Sticky pumps
Setting parameters

P3350[0...2] Super torque modes = 1: Enable super torque mode
Note: When the value of P3350 is changed, the value of P3353 is changed as
follows:
• P3350 = 2: P3353 = 0.0s
• P3350 ≠ 2: P3353 = default
The ramp time of 0s gives an additional 'kicking' effect when hammer start is
in use.
P3351[0...2] BI: Super torque enable This parameter defines the source of the super torque enable. The setting is
effective when P3352 = 2.
Factory default: 0 (never enabled)
P3352[0...2] Super torque startup mode This parameter defines when the super torque function becomes active.
= 0: Enabled on first run after power-up
= 1: Enabled on every run
= 2: Enabled by digital input (enable source is defined by P3351; 0 = never
enabled, 1 = enabled on every run)
P3353[0...2] Super torque ramp time [s] This parameter defines the ramp time to be used when ramping up to the
super torque frequency.
P3354[0...2] Super torque frequency [Hz] This parameter defines the frequency at which the additional boost is applied
for super torque mode.
P3355[0...2] Super torque boost level [%] This parameter sets the temporary boost level for super torque mode.
It applies boost in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) once the super
torque frequency has been reached for the time specified in P3356.
P3356[0...2] Super torque boost time [s] This parameter sets the time for which the additional boost is applied, when
the output frequency is held at P3354.

Function diagram
Description:
The Super Torque mode is enabled when an ON command is issued, and the following
sequence is performed:
● Ramps up to P3354 Hz with the boost level specified by P1310, P1311, and P1312
● Maintains for P3356 s with the boost level specified by P3355
● Reverts boost level to that specified by P1310, P1311, and P1312
● Reverts to "normal" setpoint and allows output to ramp using P1120
5.6.3.2 Starting the motor in hammer start mode
Functionality
This startup mode applies a sequence of torque pulses to start the motor.

Very sticky pumps

Setting parameters

P3350[0...2] Super torque modes = 2: Enable hammer start mode
Note: When the value of P3350 is changed, the value of P3353 is changed
as follows:
• P3350 = 2: P3353 = 0.0s
• P3350 ≠ 2: P3353 = default
The ramp time of 0s gives an additional 'kicking' effect when hammer start is
in use.
P3351[0...2] BI: Super torque enable This parameter defines the source of the super torque enable. The setting is
effective when P3352 = 2.
= 2: Enabled by digital input (enable source is defined by P3351; 0 = never
enabled, 1 = enabled on every run)
P3353[0...2] Super torque ramp time [s] This parameter defines the ramp time to be used when ramping up to the
super torque frequency.
P3354[0...2] Super torque frequency [Hz] This parameter defines the frequency at which the additional boost is ap-
plied for super torque mode.
P3357[0...2] Hammer start boost level [%] This parameter sets the temporary boost level for hammer start mode.
It applies boost in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) once the super
torque frequency has been reached for the time specified in P3356.
P3358[0...2] Number of hammer cycles This parameter defines the number of times the hammer start boost level is
applied.
P3359[0...2] Hammer on time [ms] This parameter sets the time for which the additional boost is applied for
each repetition (must be at least 3 x motor magnetization time).
P3360[0...2] Hammer off Time [ms] This parameter sets the time for which the additional boost is removed for
each repetition (must be at least 3 x motor magnetization time).
Function diagram
Description:
The hammer start mode is enabled when an ON command is issued, and the following
● Ramp up to P3354 Hz with the boost level specified by P1310, P1311, and P1312
● Revert boost level to that specified by P1310, P1311, and P1312
● Revert to "normal" setpoint and allow output to ramp using P1120

5.6.3.3 Starting the motor in blockage clearing mode
Functionality
This startup mode momentarily reverses the motor rotation to clear a pump blockage.

Pump clearing
Setting parameters

P3350[0...2] Super torque modes = 3: Enable blockage clearing mode
Note: When the value of P3350 is changed, the value of P3353 is
changed as follows:
• P3350 = 2: P3353 = 0.0s
• P3350 ≠ 2: P3353 = default
The ramp time of 0s gives an additional 'kicking' effect when hammer
start is in use.
If blockage clearing mode is enabled (P3350 = 3), make sure that re-
verse direction is not inhibited, i.e. P1032 = P1110 = 0.


P3351[0...2] BI: Super torque enable This parameter defines the source of the super torque enable. The set-
ting is effective when P3352 = 2.
= 2: Enabled by digital input (enable source is defined by P3351; 0 =
never enabled, 1 = enabled on every run)
P3353[0...2] Super torque ramp time [s] This parameter defines the ramp time to be used when ramping up to
the super torque frequency.
P3361[0...2] Blockage clearing frequency [Hz] This parameter defines the frequency at which the inverter runs in the
opposite direction to the setpoint during the blockage clearing reverse
sequence.
P3362[0...2] Blockage clearing reverse time [s] This parameter sets the time for which the inverter runs in the opposite
direction to the setpoint during the reverse sequence.
P3363[0...2] Enable rapid ramp This parameter selects whether the inverter ramps to, or starts directly
from, the blockage clearing frequency
= 0: Disable rapid ramp for blockage clearing (use ramp time specified in
P3353)
= 1: Enable rapid ramp for blockage clearing (jump to the reverse frequency - this
introduces a "kicking" effect which helps to clear the blockage)
P3364[0...2] Number of blockage clearing This parameter sets the number of times the blockage clearing reversing
cycles cycle is repeated.
Function diagram
Description:
The blockage clearing mode is enabled when an ON command is issued, and the following
● Ramp or step (depending on P3363) to P3361 Hz in opposite direction to the setpoint
● For P3364 repetitions:
– Ramp down to 0 Hz using normal ramp time as specified in P1121
– Ramp or step (depending on P3363) to P3361 Hz in opposite direction to the setpoint
● Revert to "normal" setpoint and allow output to ramp using P1120.

5.6.3.4 Running the inverter in economy mode
Functionality
Economy mode works by slightly changing the output voltage either up or down in order to
find the minimum input power.
Note
The economy mode optimization is only active when operating at the requested frequency
setpoint. The optimization algorithm becomes active 5 seconds after the setpoint has been
reached, and is disabled on a setpoint change or if the Imax or Vmax controller is active.
Typical applications
Motors with stable or slowly changing loads
Setting parameters

P1300[0...2] Control mode = 4: V/f Eco Mode with linear characteristic
= 7: V/f Eco Mode with quadratic characteristic
r1348 Economy mode factor [%] This parameter displays the calculated economy mode factor (range: 80% to
120%) applied to the demanded output voltage.
If this value is too low, the system may become unstable.

Function diagram
5.6.3.5 Setting the UL508C/UL61800-5-1-compliant motor overtemperature protection
Functionality
The function protects the motor from overtemperature. The function defines the reaction of
the inverter when motor temperature reaches warning threshold. The inverter can remember
the current motor temperature on power-down and reacts on the next power-up based on the
setting in P0610. Setting any value in P0610 other than 0 or 4 will cause the inverter to trip
(F11) if the motor temperature is 10% above the warning threshold P0604.
Note
In order to comply with UL508C/UL61800-5-1, parameter P0610 must not be changed from
its factory setting of 6.
Setting parameters

P0610[0...2] Motor I2 t temperature reaction This parameter defines reaction when motor temperature reaches warning
threshold.
Settings 0 to 2 do not recall the motors temperature (stored at power-down)
on power-up:
= 0: Warning only
= 1: Warning with Imax control (motor current reduced) and trip (F11)
= 2: Warning and trip (F11)
Settings 4 to 6 recall the motors temperature (stored at power-down) on
power-up:
= 4: Warning only
= 5: Warning with Imax control (motor current reduced) and trip (F11)
= 6: Warning and trip (F11)

5.6.3.6 Setting the free function blocks (FFBs)
Functionality
Additional signal interconnections in the inverter can be established by means of the free
function blocks (FFBs). Every digital and analog signal available via BICO technology can be
routed to the appropriate inputs of the free function blocks. The outputs of the free function
blocks are also interconnected to other functions using BICO technology.
Example
Setting parameters

P0702 Function of digital input 2 = 99: Enable BICO parameterization for digital input 2
P0703 Function of digital input 3 = 99: Enable BICO parameterization for digital input 3
P2800 Enable FFBs = 1: Enable (general enable for all free function blocks)
P2801[0] Activate FFBs = 1: Enable AND 1
P2810[0] BI: AND 1 = 722.1 P2810[0] and P2810[1] define inputs of AND 1 element, and
P2810[1] = 722.2 output is r2811.0.
P0731 BI: Function of digital output 1 This parameter defines source of digital output 1.
= r2811.0: Use the AND (DI2, DI3) to switch on LED
For more information about FFBs and additional settings of individual parameter, see
Chapter "Parameter list (Page 183)".

5.6.3.7 Setting the flying start function
Functionality
The flying start function (enabled using P1200) allows the inverter to be switched onto a
motor which is still spinning by rapidly changing the output frequency of the inverter until the
actual motor speed has been found. Then, the motor runs up to setpoint using the normal
ramp time.
Flying start must be used in cases where the motor may still be turning (e.g. after a short
mains break) or can be driven by the load. Otherwise, overcurrent trips will occur.
Setting parameters

P1200 Flying start Settings 1 to 3 search in both directions:
= 0: Flying start disabled
= 1: Flying start always active
= 2: Flying start active after power on, fault, OFF2
= 3: Flying start active after fault, OFF2
Settings 4 to 6 search only in the direction of the setpoint:
= 4: Flying start always active
= 5: Flying start active after power on, fault, OFF2
= 6: Flying start active after fault, OFF2
P1202[0...2] Motor-current: flying start [%] This parameter defines search current used for flying start.
Note: Search current settings in P1202 that are below 30% (and sometimes
other settings in P1202 and P1203) may cause motor speed to be found
prematurely or too late, which can result in F1 or F2 trips.
P1203[0...2] Search rate: flying start [%] This parameter sets factor (in V/f mode only) by which the output frequency
changes during flying start to synchronize with turning motor.
Note: A higher value produces a flatter gradient and thus a longer search
time. A lower value has the opposite effect.

5.6.3.8 Setting the automatic restart function
Functionality
After a power failure (F3 "Undervoltage"), the automatic restart function (enabled using
P1210) automatically switches on the motor if an ON command is active. Any faults are
automatically acknowledged by the inverter.
When it comes to power failures (line supply failure), then a differentiation is made between
the following conditions:
● "Line undervoltage (mains brownout)" is a situation where the line supply is interrupted
and returns before the built-in BOP display has gone dark (this is an extremely short line
supply interruption where the DC link hasn't completely collapsed).
● "Line failure (mains blackout)" is a situation where the built-in BOP display has gone dark
(this represents a longer line supply interruption where the DC link has completely
collapsed) before the line supply returns.
Setting parameters

P1210 Automatic restart This parameter configures automatic restart function.
= 0: Disabled
= 1: Trip reset after power on, P1211 disabled
= 2: Restart after mains blackout, P1211 disabled
= 3: Restart after mains brownout or fault, P1211 enabled
= 4: Restart after mains brownout, P1211 enabled
= 5: Restart after mains blackout and fault, P1211 disabled
= 6: Restart after mains brown- /blackout or fault, P1211 enabled
= 7: Restart after mains brown- /blackout or fault, trip when P1211 expires
= 8: Restart after mains brown- /blackout with F3 and leave an interval in seconds
determined by P1214, P1211 disabled
= 9: Restart after mains brown- /blackout with F3 during the attempt time determined
by P1214, P1211 disabled
= 10: Restart after mains brown- /blackout with F3 during the attempt time determined
by P1214 or manual fault acknowledgement, P1211 disabled
P1211 Number of restart This parameter specifies number of times inverter will attempt to restart if automatic
attempts restart P1210 is activated.
P1214 Restart time interval This parameter has either of the following functions:
• Specifying the restart interval when P1210 = 8
• Specifying the total restart attempt time when P1210 = 9 or P1210 = 10

5.6.3.9 Running the inverter in frost protection mode
Functionality
If the surrounding temperature falls below a given threshold, motor turns automatically to
prevent freezing.
● OFF1/OFF3: The frost protection function is disabled when OFF3 is activated and
enabled again when OFF1 is activated.
● OFF2/fault: The motor stops and the frost protection is deactivated.
Setting parameters

P3852[0...2] BI: Enable frost protection This parameter defines command source of protection enable command. If
binary input is equal to one, then protection will be initiated (factory de-
fault: 0).
If P3853 ≠ 0, frost protection is applied by applying the given frequency to
the motor.
Note that the protection function may be overridden under the following
circumstances:
• If inverter is running and protection signal becomes active, signal is
ignored
• If inverter is turning motor due to active protection signal and a RUN
command is received, RUN command overrides frost signal
• Issuing an OFF command while protection is active will stop the motor
P3853[0...2] Frost protection frequency [Hz] This parameter specifies the frequency applied to the motor when frost
protection is active.

5.6.3.10 Running the inverter in condensation protection mode
Functionality
If an external condensation sensor detects excessive condensation, the inverter applies a
DC current to keep the motor warm to prevent condensation.
● OFF1/OFF3: The condensation protection function is disabled when OFF3 is activated

and enabled again when OFF1 is activated.
● OFF2/fault: The motor stops and the condensation protection is deactivated.
Setting parameters

P3852[0...2] BI: Enable frost protection This parameter defines command source of protection enable command. If
binary input is equal to one, then protection will be initiated (factory default: 0).
If P3853 = 0 and P3854 ≠ 0, condensation protection is applied by applying the
given current to the motor.
Note that the protection function may be overridden under the following circum-
stances:
• If inverter is running and protection signal becomes active, signal is ignored
• If inverter is turning motor due to active protection signal and a RUN com-
mand is received, RUN command overrides frost signal
P3854[0...2] Condensation protection This parameter specifies the DC current (as a percentage of nominal current)
current [%] which is applied to the motor when condensation protection is active.

5.6.3.11 Running the inverter in sleep mode
Functionality
To achieve energy-saving operation, you can enable the inverter to run in either frequency
sleep mode (P2365 = 1) or PID sleep mode(P2365 = 2).
● Frequency sleep mode (hibernation): When the demand frequency falls below the
minimum frequency (P1080), the OFF delay (P2366) is started. When the OFF delay
expires, the inverter is ramped down to stop and enters the sleep mode. The inverter has
to go through the ON delay (P2367) before restarting.
● PID sleep mode (hibernation): When the inverter under PID control drops below the PID
hibernation setpoint (P2390), the PID hibernation timer (P2391) is started. When the
timer expires, the inverter is ramped down to stop and enters sleep mode. The inverter
restarts when it reaches the PID hibernation restart point (P2392).

Setting parameters

P2365[0...2] Hibernation enable/disable Select or disable the hibernation functionality.
= 0: Disabled
= 1: Frequency hibernation (the frequency setpoint as the wakeup trigger)
= 2: PID hibernation (the PID error as the wakeup trigger)
P2366[0...2] Delay before stopping With hibernation enabled, this parameter defines the delay before activating the
motor [s] sleep mode of the inverter.
P2367[0...2] Delay before starting With hibernation enabled, this parameter defines the delay before "waking up"
motor [s] (disabling) the sleep mode of the inverter.
P2390 PID hibernation setpoint When the value of P2365 is set to 2 and the inverter under PID control drops
[%] below the PID hibernation setpoint, the PID hibernation timer P2391 is started.
When the PID hibernation timer has expired, the inverter is ramped down to
stop and enters the PID hibernation mode.
Range: -200.00 to 200.00 (factory default: 0)
P2391 PID hibernation timer [s] When the PID hibernation timer P2391 has expired, the inverter is ramped
down to stop and enters the PID hibernation mode.


P2392 PID hibernation restart While in PID hibernation mode, the PID controller continues to generate the
setpoint [%] error r2273. Once this reaches the restart point P2392, the inverter immediately
ramps to the setpoint calculated by the PID controller.
Range: -200.00 to 200.00 (factory default: 0)
r2399 CO/BO: PID hibernation Displays PID hibernation status word.
status word Bit 00: Not used
Bit 01: PID hibernation enabled (PID hibernation is enabled and the inverter is
not in PID hibernation.)
Bit 02: Hibernation active (PID hibernation is enabled and the inverter is in PID
hibernation.)
Factory default: 0
P1080[0...2] Minimum frequency [Hz] Sets minimum motor frequency at which motor will run irrespective of frequency
setpoint. Value set here is valid both for clockwise and for counterclockwise
rotation.
5.6.3.12 Setting the wobble generator
Functionality
The wobble generator executes predefined periodical disruptions superimposed on the main
setpoint for technological usage in the fiber industry. The wobble function can be activated
via P2940. It is independent of the setpoint direction, thus only the absolute value of the
setpoint is relevant. The wobble signal is added to the main setpoint as an additional setpoint.
During the change of the setpoint the wobble function is inactive. The wobble signal is also
limited by the maximum frequency (P1082).

Setting parameters

P2940 BI: Release wobble function This parameter defines the source to release the wobble function.
Factory default: 0.0
P2945 Wobble signal frequency [Hz] This parameter sets the frequency of the wobble signal.
P2946 Wobble signal amplitude [%] This parameter sets the value for the amplitude of the wobble-signal as a
proportion of the present ramp function generator (RFG) output.
P2947 Wobble signal decrement step This parameter sets the value for decrement step at the end of the positive
signal period.
P2948 Wobble signal increment step This parameter sets the value for the increment step at the end of the nega-
tive signal period.
P2949 Wobble signal pulse width [%] This parameter sets the relative widths of the rising and falling pulses.
5.6.3.13 Running the inverter in motor staging mode
Functionality
Motor staging allows the control of up to 2 additional staged pumps or fans, based on a PID
control system. The complete system consists of one pump controlled by the inverter and up
to 2 further pumps/fans controlled from contactors or motor starters. The contactors or motor
starter are controlled by digital outputs from the inverter.
The diagram below shows a typical pumping system.


Setting parameters

P2370[0...2] Motor staging stop mode This parameter selects stop mode for external motors when motor staging is
in use.
= 0: Normal stop (factory default)
= 1: Sequence stop
P2371[0...2] Motor staging configuration This parameter selects configuration of external motors (M1, M2) used for
motor staging feature.
= 0: Motor staging disabled
= 1: M1 = 1 x MV, M2 = Not fitted
= 2: M1 = 1 x MV, M2 = 1 x MV
= 3: M1 = 1 x MV, M2 = 2 x MV
P2372[0...2] Motor staging cycling This parameter enables motor cycling for the motor staging feature.
= 0: Disabled (factory default)
= 1: Enabled
P2373[0...2] Motor staging hysteresis [%] P2373 as a percentage of PID setpoint that PID error r2273 must be exceed-
ed before staging delay starts.
P2374[0...2] Motor staging delay [s] This parameter defines the time that PID error r2273 must exceed motor stag-
ing hysteresis P2373 before staging occurs.
P2375[0...2] Motor destaging delay [s] This parameter defines the time that PID error r2273 must exceed motor stag-
ing hysteresis P2373 before destaging occurs.
P2376[0...2] Motor staging delay over- P2376 as a percentage of PID setpoint. When the PID error r2273 exceeds
ride [%] this value, a motor is staged/destaged irrespective of the delay timers.
Note: The value of this parameter must always be larger than staging hystere-
sis P2373.
P2377[0...2] Motor staging lockout timer This parameter defines the time for which delay override is prevented after a
[s] motor has been staged or destaged.
P2378[0...2] Motor staging frequency f_st This parameter sets the frequency at which the digital output is switched dur-
[%] ing a (de) staging event, as the inverter ramps from maximum to minimum
frequency (or vice versa).
r2379.0...1 CO/BO: Motor staging sta- This parameter displays output word from the motor staging feature that al-
tus word lows external connections to be made.
Bit 00: Start motor 1 (yes for 1, no for 0)
Bit 01: Start motor 2 (yes for 1, no for 0)
P2380[0...2] Motor staging hours run [h] This parameter displays hours run for external motors.
Index:
[0]: Motor 1 hrs run
[1]: Motor 2 hrs run
[2]: Not used
Range: 0.0 to 4294967295 (factory default: 0.0)

5.6.3.14 Running the inverter in cavitation protection mode
Functionality
The cavitation protection will generate a fault/warning when cavitation conditions are
deemed to be present. If the inverter gets no feedback from the pump transducer, it will trip
to stop cavitation damage.
Setting parameters

P2360[0...2] Enable cavitation protection This parameter enables the cavitation protection function.
= 1: Fault
= 2: Warn
P2361[0...2] Cavitation threshold [%] This parameter defines the feedback threshold over which a fault/warning is
triggered, as a percentage (%).
P2362[0...2] Cavitation protection time [s] This parameter sets the time for which cavitation conditions have to be pre-
sent before a fault/warning is triggered.

5.6.3.15 Setting the user default parameter set
Functionality
The user default parameter set allows a modified set of defaults, different to the factory
defaults, to be stored. Following a parameter reset these modified default values would be
used. An additional factory reset mode would be required to erase the user default values
and restore the inverter to factory default parameter set.
Creating the user default parameter set

1. Parameterize the inverter as required.
2. Set P0971 = 21, and the current inverter state is now stored as the user default.
Modifying the user default parameter set

1. Return the inverter to the default state by setting P0010 = 30 and P0970 = 1. The inverter
is now in the user default state if configured, else factory default state.
2. Parameterize the inverter as required.
3. Set P0971 = 21 to store current state as the user default.
Setting parameters

P0010 Commissioning parameter This parameter filters parameters so that only those related to a particular
functional group are selected. It must be set to 30 in order to store or delete
user defaults.
= 30: Factory setting
P0970 Factory reset This parameter resets all parameters to their user default/factory default val-
ues.
= 1: Parameter reset to user defaults if stored else factory defaults
= 21: Parameter reset to factory defaults deleting user defaults if stored
P0971 Transfer data from RAM to This parameter transfers values from RAM to EEPROM.
EEPROM = 1: Start transfer
= 21: Start transfer and store parameter changes as user default values
For information about restoring the inverter to factory defaults, refer to Section "Restoring to
defaults (Page 133)".

5.6.3.16 Setting the dual ramp function
Functionality
The dual ramp function allows the user to parameterize the inverter so that it can switch from
one ramp rate to another when ramping up or down to a setpoint. This may be useful for
delicate loads, where starting to ramp with a fast ramp-up or ramp-down time may cause
damage. The function works as follows:
Ramp up:
● Inverter starts ramp-up using ramp time from P1120
● When f_act > P2157, switch to ramp time from P1060
Ramp down:
● Inverter starts ramp-down using ramp time from P1061
● When f_act < P2159, switch to ramp time from P1121
Note that the dual ramp algorithm uses r2198 bits 1 and 2 to determine (f_act > P2157) and
(f_act < P2159).

Setting parameters

P1175[0...2] BI: Dual ramp enable This parameter defines command source of dual ramp enable command. If
binary input is equal to one, then the dual ramp will be applied. The factory
default value is 0.
P1060[0...2] JOG ramp-up time [s] This parameter sets the JOG ramp-up time.
P1061[0...2] JOG ramp-down time [s] This parameter sets the JOG ramp-down time.
P1120[0...2] Ramp-up time [s] This parameter sets the time taken for motor to accelerate from standstill up
to maximum frequency (P1082) when no rounding is used.
P1121[0...2] Ramp-down time [s] This parameter sets the time taken for motor to decelerate from maximum
frequency (P1082) down to standstill when no rounding is used.
P2157[0...2] Threshold frequency f_2 [Hz] This parameter defines threshold_2 for comparing speed or frequency to
thresholds.
P2159[0...2] Threshold frequency f_3 [Hz] This parameter defines threshold_3 for comparing speed or frequency to
thresholds.
5.6.3.17 Setting the DC coupling function
Functionality
The SINAMICS V20 inverter provides the facility to electrically couple two equal-size
inverters together by using the DC link connections. The key benefits of this connection are:
● Reducing energy costs by using regenerative energy from one inverter as driving energy
in the second inverter.
● Reducing installation costs by allowing the inverters to share one common dynamic
braking module when needed.
● In some applications, eliminating the need for the dynamic braking module.
In the most common application, shown in the following figure, linking two SINAMICS V20
inverters of equal size and rating allows the energy from one inverter, presently decelerating
a load, to be fed into the second inverter across the DC link. This requires less energy to be
sourced from the mains supply. In this scenario, the total electricity consumption is reduced.

Connection for DC coupling

The following figure illustrates the system connection using DC coupling.
See Section "Terminal description (Page 39)" for the recommended cable cross-sections
and screw tightening torques.
See the Product Information of Protective Devices for SINAMICS V20 Inverter
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13208/man) for the recommended fuse
types.
WARNING
Destruction of inverter
It is extremely important to ensure that the polarity of the DC link connections between the
inverters is correct. If the polarity of the DC terminals' connections is reversed, it could
result in the destruction of the inverter.
CAUTION
Safety awareness
The coupled SINAMICS V20 inverters must both be of equal power and supply voltage
rating.
The coupled inverters must be connected to the mains supply through a single contactor
and fuse arrangement rated for a single inverter of the type in use.
A maximum of two SINAMICS V20 inverters can be linked using the DC coupling
methodology.

NOTICE
Integrated braking chopper
The integrated braking chopper within the frame size D inverter is only active if the inverter
receives an ON command and is actually running. When the inverter is powered down, the
regenerative energy cannot be pulsed to the external braking resistor.
Limitations and restrictions

● The maximum length of the coupling cable is 3 metres.
● For the inverters of frame sizes A to C, if a dynamic braking module is to be used, an
additional connector with a current rating the same as the supply cable to one inverter
must be used to connect the dynamic braking module wires to DC+ and DC- since the
Inverter terminals may not support an additional connection.
● The cable rating to the dynamic braking module needs to be at least 9.5 A for a 5.5 kW
full power rating (as measured using a minimum resistor value of 56 Ω). Screened cable
should be used.
● For the inverters of frame size D for three phase, the dynamic braking circuit is self-
contained and only one external braking resistor has to be attached to one of the
inverters. Refer to Appendix "Braking resistor (Page 358)" for the selection of an
appropriate braking resistor.
● The compound braking must never be activated.
Note
Performance and potential energy savings
The performance and potential energy savings using the DC coupling function is highly
dependent on the specific application. Therefore, Siemens makes no claim regarding the
performance and energy saving potential of the DC coupling methodology.
Note
Standards and EMC disclaimers
The DC coupling configuration with the SINAMICS V20 inverters is not certified for use in
UL/cUL applications.
No claims are made regarding the EMC performance of this configuration.
See also
Typical system connections (Page 34)

5.6.3.18 Setting high/low overload (HO/LO) mode
Functionality
Setting HO/LO overload enables you to select the low-overload mode for pumps and fans,
the most important target applications of SINAMICS V20 inverters. Low-overload mode can
improve the rated output current of the inverter and therefore allows the inverter to drive
motors of higher power.
Typical application fields

● High overload: conveyors, agitators and centrifuges
● Low overload: pumps and fans
Power ratings
Rated power rating (HO mode) 18.5 kW 22 kW

Rated power rating (LO mode) 22 kW 30 kW
Taking the 22 kW SINAMICS inverter as an example, when HO mode is selected, it means

the rated power rating is 22 kW; when LO mode is selected, the rated power rating is
changed to 30 kW.
● HO mode
Overload capability: 150% of the rated output current for 60 s
Cycle time: 300 s
● LO mode:
Overload capability: 110% of the rated output current for 60 s
Cycle time: 300 s

5.7 Restoring to defaults
Setting parameter

P0205 Select inverter applications This parameter selects the inverter applications on high
overload and low overload:
=0: high overload
=1: low overload
Function diagram
Restoring to factory defaults

P0003 User access level = 1 (standard user access level)
P0010 Commissioning parameter = 30 (factory setting)
P0970 Factory reset = 21: parameter reset to factory defaults deleting user defaults if stored
Restoring to user defaults

P0003 User access level = 1 (standard user access level)
P0010 Commissioning parameter = 30 (factory setting)
P0970 Factory reset = 1: parameter reset to user defaults if stored, else factory defaults
After setting the parameter P0970, the inverter displays "8 8 8 8 8" and then the screen
shows "P0970". P0970 and P0010 are automatically reset to their original value 0.


Commissioning using SINAMICS V20 Smart Access 6
Using the optional SINAMICS V20 Smart Access (Page 386) to commission the inverter
provides you with a smart commissioning solution.
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access is a Web server module with integrated Wi-Fi connectivity. It
allows Web-based access to the inverter from a connected device (conventional PC with
wireless network adapter installed, tablet or smart phone).
Note
To avoid any unauthorized Web access, use the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access with the
inverter only when you perform the Web-based inverter commissioning.
Note
To use SINAMICS V20 Smart Access to control the inverter, the supported inverter firmware
version must be 3.92 or later.
With SINAMICS V20 Smart Access, you can easily perform the following operations via Web
access to the inverter:
● Quick inverter commissioning (Page 145)
● Inverter parameterization (Page 150)
● Motor operation in JOG/HAND mode (Page 155)
● Inverter status monitoring (Page 157)
● Fault/alarm diagnostics (Page 157)
● Data backup and restore (Page 160)
● Wi-Fi configuration (Page 142)
● User interface language selection (Page 144)
● Web application and SINAMICS V20 Smart Access firmware upgrade (Page 164)
● Inverter time synchronization with the connected device (Page 144)

Commissioning using SINAMICS V20 Smart Access
6.1 System requirements
6.1 System requirements
Device with wireless net- Operating system Recommended Web browser

work adapter installed
PC Windows 7 • Google Chrome version 56.0 or later
• Firefox version 53.0 or later
• Internet Explorer version 11.0.9600 or later
Smart phone/tablet Apple iOS 10.2 or later • Google Chrome version 55.0 or later
• Safari
Android 7.0 or later • Google Chrome version 58.0 or later
Supported minimum resolution

SINAMICS V20 Smart Access displays the pages in a format and size compatible with the
device you use to access the Web pages. It supports a minimum resolution of 320 x 480
pixels.
6.2 Accessing the SINAMICS V20 Web pages

You can access the SINAMICS V20 Web pages from a PC or a mobile device that connects
to the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access.
Note
Fitting SINAMICS V20 Smart Access to the inverter is required only when you desire to
make Web-based access to the inverter from your PC or mobile device.
6.2.1 Overview of the steps
Note
Prerequisite
Before fitting SINAMICS V20 Smart Access to V20, if RS485 communication is present, then
you must set P2010[1] = 12 via the BOP.
1. Fitting SINAMICS V20 Smart Access to the inverter (Page 137)

2. Establishing the wireless network connection (Page 137)
3. Accessing the Web pages (Page 139)

6.2.2 Fitting SINAMICS V20 Smart Access to the inverter
NOTICE
Damage to module due to improper installing or removing
Installing or removing SINAMICS V20 Smart Access when its power switch is in the "ON"
position can cause damage to the module.
Make sure that you slide the power switch to "OFF" before installing/removing the module.
NOTICE
Equipment malfunctions due to improper installing or removing
Installing or removing the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access when the V20 inverter is in power-
on state can cause malfunctions of the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access.
• Make sure that the V20 inverter is powered off before installing or removing the
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access.
Note
To reduce human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields, maintain a minimum
distance of 2.5 cm between your body and the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access when it is
operational.
6.2.3 Establishing the wireless network connection
NOTICE
Equipment malfunctions as a result of unauthorized access to the inverter
Hacker attack can result in unauthorized access to the inverter through the SINAMICS V20
Smart Access. This can cause equipment malfunctions.
• Before logging on to the V20 Web pages, make sure that there is no network security
risk.
– If the status LED lights up green or flashes green, make sure that no unauthorized
access to the inverter exists.
– If an unauthorized access to the inverter does exist, switch off the power switch on
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access and then switch it on again to restart the wireless
network connection.

Establishing initial wireless network connection

1. After you have fitted the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access (Page 386) to the inverter, power
on the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access by sliding its switch to the "ON" position.
2. Activate the Wi-Fi interface inside your PC or mobile device. If you desire to establish the
wireless network connection on your PC, make sure that you have previously activated
the automatic IP settings.
3. Search the wireless network SSID of SINAMICS V20 Smart Access: V20 smart
access_xxxxxx ("xxxxxx" stands for the last six characters of the MAC address of
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access)
4. Enter the wireless network password to launch the connection (default password:
12345678).
You can configure your own Wi-Fi name and channel. For more information, see Section
"Configuring Wi-Fi (Page 142)".
5. Enter the IP address of the connected inverter (http://192.168.1.1) in the supported
browser.
6. After the Web page for password change opens, enter a new password.
To achieve better network access security, enter a new password of 8 to 12 characters
that consists all of the following three categories of password characters: ① letters: A-Z,
a-z; ② numbers: 0-9; ③ special characters: _, -, ~, ! , @, #, $, %, ^, &, and *, and the
space character is not allowed.
Note that this password change page includes a security level indicator. This indicator
uses different colors to indicate the security strength of your current password. For more
information, see the table below:
Password Description
security
level
Low Password that consists of only one category
of characters
Medium Password that consists of two categories of
characters
High Password that consists of three categories
of characters
To display/hide the password, click .
After your confirmation of the new password entry, the module restarts automatically.
7. Select the wireless network SSID of the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access and then enter the
new Wi-Fi password to launch the connection.
8. Enter the IP address (http://192.168.1.1) to open the home page.

Wireless network connection examples
Note
Prerequisite
Make sure that your device is wireless-enabled.
For Windows 7 For Android and iOS (on tablets/smart phones)

1. Click on the taskbar on your PC. Go to the Wi-Fi settings window on your tablet or smart
2. Select the target network and enter the wireless pass- phone, select the target network and enter the wireless
word to launch the connection. password to launch the connection.
6.2.4 Accessing the Web pages

If you have previously established the wireless network connection (Page 137) between
your PC or mobile device and the inverter via the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access, open a
supported Web browser (Page 136) from your PC or mobile device and then enter the IP
address (http://192.168.1.1) to open the SINAMICS V20 Web page (home page).
Constraint
Some features of SINAMICS V20 Smart Access are restricted if you do not observe the
following:
● The standard Web pages use JavaScript. If your Web browser settings have disabled
JavaScript, enable it first.
● When accessing the V20 Web pages from a mobile device, do not use landscape mode.

6.3 Overview of the Web pages
6.3 Overview of the Web pages
① Connection status indication (Page 141)

② Fault/alarm indication (Page 157)
③ Quick commissioning wizard (Page 145)
④ Parameter settings (Page 150)
⑤ Motor test run in JOG/HAND mode (Page 155)
⑥ Inverter status monitoring (Page 157)
⑦ Diagnostics (Page 157) (faults, alarms, I/O status)
⑧ Data backup & restore (Page 160)
⑨ Navigation sidebar (visible only on lower-level pages)
⑩ Advancing backward (visible only on lower-level pages)
⑪ Optional Web access settings (Page 142) (Wi-Fi configuration, user interface language
settings, time synchronization, and upgrade)
⑫ Inverter identification data (Page 141)
⑬ Support information (Page 167)
Note
The Web page illustrations from this chapter forward represent only the standard PC Web
page appearance.

6.4 View connection status
6.4 View connection status

You can view the connection status in the upper-left corner of the V20 Web pages. The
connection status is updated every five seconds.
Icon Status Description

Connected Communication between the PC/mobile device and the inverter is established.
Note that the green status icon indicates one of the following actual inverter
statuses (see r0002):
• Commissioning mode
• Inverter ready
• Inverter fault active
• Inverter starting
• Inverter running
• Inverter stopping
• Inverter inhibited
Disconnected Communication between the PC/mobile device and the inverter is not estab-
lished.
6.5 Viewing inverter information

The inverter identification Web page displays detailed information of the currently connected
inverter:

6.6 Making optional Web access settings

You can make the following optional Web access settings:
● Wi-Fi configuration (Page 142)
● User interface language selection (Page 144)
● Inverter time synchronization with the connected device (Page 144)
● Web application and firmware version upgrade (Page 144)
● Viewing the additional information of the module (Page 145)
6.6.1 Configuring Wi-Fi

If you do not want to use the default Wi-Fi settings, you can make Wi-Fi configuration in the
following dialog box:
Note that the new Wi-Fi configuration can be effective only after SINAMICS V20 Smart
Access restarts.

Wi-Fi SSID (Service Set Identifier)

Default SSID: V20 smart access_xxxxxx ("xxxxxx" stands for the last six characters of the
MAC address of SINAMICS V20 Smart Access)
Example SSID: V20 smart access_a4d3e1
SSID character restrictions: maximum 30 characters which are limited to A-Z, a-z, 0-9, _, -,
~, ! , @, #, $, %, ^, &, *, or space. Note that the first and the last character must not be a
space.
Wi-Fi password
Default password: 12345678
Password restrictions: 8 to 12 characters which are limited to A-Z, a-z, 0-9, _, -, ~, ! , @, #,
$, %, ^, & and *. Note that the space character is not allowed.
Note that this password setting page includes a password security level indicator. Three
security levels are indicated as follows depending on the complexity of the new password:
Password security level Meaning

Low Password that consists of only one category of characters
Medium Password that consists of two categories of characters
High Password that consists of three categories of characters
To display/hide the password, click .
Frequency channel
Default channel: channel 1.
Total channels: 11. Each channel stands for a transmitting frequency. The frequency
difference between two adjacent channels is 5 MHz. You can select a desired channel with
the slider.
Resetting Wi-Fi configuration

When the inverter is in power-on state, pressing the reset button on SINAMICS V20 Smart
Access resets the Wi-Fi configuration to defaults.
Note
Check and make sure the status LED lights up solid green/solid yellow or flashes green
before pressing the reset button to reset the Wi-Fi configuration. After you press the reset
button, make sure you keep the button pressed until the status LED flashes yellow. Only
then can the Wi-Fi configuration be reset successfully with the reset button.

6.6.2 Changing the display language

The SINAMICS V20 Web pages support the following user interface languages: English
(default), Chinese, German, Italian, and French. Select the desired one from the following list:
6.6.3 Synchronizing the time

When the connection between the inverter and the PC/mobile device is established, the Web
page can display the current time and date information of the connected PC/mobile device
(see below). You can enable time synchronization between the inverter and the connected
PC/mobile device to record the occurrence time of inverter faults/alarms. When you enable
synchronization, the inverter receives the time of day from the connected PC/mobile device.
6.6.4 Upgrading
Upgrading includes conventional upgrading and basic upgrading. For more information, see
Section "Upgrading Web application and SINAMICS V20 Smart Access firmware versions
(Page 164)".

6.6.5 Viewing additional information

The following window provides additional information about the SINAMICS V20 Smart
Access:

The quick commissioning function enables you to set motor parameters, connection macros,
and application macros of the SINAMICS V20 inverter.
Operating sequence
1. Open the quick commissioning Web page by selecting the quick commissioning wizard
icon from either the home page or the navigation sidebar.
2. Proceed as follows. Quick commissioning will change the following three groups of
parameters at a time.

3. Perform a factory reset of the inverter if the current settings of the inverter are un-
known.
4. Change motor parameters (Page 63) settings, if desired.

Note that there are three methods to edit parameter values (see example below for
changing the P0100 and P0304 values):
• Directly select the desired option (example: P0100).
• Move the slider to select the desired value (example: P0304).
• Use the on-screen numeric keypad (example: P0304). Be aware that continuous
clicking on the Delete key (the "x" sign key) on the numeric keypad deletes the
current parameter value.

5. Select the desired connection macro (Page 65).
6. Select the desired application macro (Page 76).

7. Confirm to start writing parameter settings to the inverter. SINAMICS V20 Smart Ac-
cess then starts the automatic optimization process.
8. Confirm completion of the quick commissioning when the following window appears. If
the Web page indicates that the optimization fails, you can select to try optimization
again.

9. After the quick commissioning finishes successfully, the Web page switches to the
following page where you can change the settings of the user-defined parameters, if
desired. If you have not defined any parameter as a user-defined parameter, the com-
mon parameters (Page 78) are added to this parameter group automatically.

6.8 Setting parameters

You can open the parameters Web page by selecting the parameters icon from either the
home page or the navigation sidebar.
① Searching parameters ④ Editing parameters

② Filtering parameters by group ⑤ Resetting parameters
③ Specifying user-defined parameters ⑥ Saving parameters

Editing parameters
The figure below shows different methods for editing parameters. Note that when editing a
BICO parameter (example: P0810), if you do not want to quickly navigate to a value by
entering the first number(s), skip step 2.

Searching parameters
You can search parameters by entering a key word, that is, either a complete parameter
number or part of it. If you do not enter any key word and then select the magnifying glass
icon, the page shows the list of all parameters visible on the Web page.
Filtering parameters
You can view and set parameters in the target parameter group.
① Complete list of all visible parameters ③ User-defined parameters

② List of all modified parameters ④ Other parameter groups

Specifying user-defined parameters

If you desire to define certain parameters (including any specific indexed parameters) in a
target group to be user-defined parameters, proceed as the example given below:
Note that all successfully defined parameters will go to the following parameter group:

Resetting parameters to defaults

You can select to reset all parameters to either user defaults or factory defaults.
Saving parameters to EEPROM

You can select to save all parameter settings to EEPROM only or save to EEPROM as new
user defaults.

6.9 Starting motor test run (JOG/HAND)

You use this Web page to start the motor test run in JOG or HAND mode.
Operating sequence
1. Open the JOG Web page by selecting the JOG icon from either the home page or the
navigation sidebar.
2. Proceed as follows to get the control of the motor.
3. Run the motor in JOG or HAND mode (default mode: JOG).

Note that if desired, you can also test the motor rotation direction with the correspond-
ing button ("①"). The page shows the currently selected rotation direction ("②").
• Press the desired button ("①") to run the motor in JOG mode:

• Proceed as follows to run the motor in HAND mode:
4. After you finish the motor test run, proceed as follows to return the control of the motor:
Note that before returning the control, make sure there is no inverter output and the
motor stops running.

6.10 Monitoring
6.10 Monitoring
You can open the inverter status monitoring Web page by selecting the monitoring icon from
either the home page or the navigation sidebar.
6.11 Diagnosing
You can open the diagnostics Web page by selecting the diagnostics icon from either the
home page or the navigation sidebar. On this page, you can view faults/alarms,
acknowledge all faults or send all faults by e-mail; you can also view I/O status and status bit
information.

6.11 Diagnosing
Meaning of fault/alarm icons

Fault and alarm icons are shown on the upper-right corner of the V20 Web page. See the
following example for possible icon display:
Fault icons
① No active fault present
② Active fault present (in this example: one active fault present)
Alarm icons
③ No active alarm present
④ Active alarms presents (in this example: two active alarms present)
If the fault/alarm icon indicates presence of active faults/alarms, always go to the diagnostics
page to view the detailed information.
Fault/alarm diagnostics
On this subpage, you can view detailed fault/alarm information, acknowledge all faults, or
send all faults by e-mail (recommended on PC).
You can use the filter button to display all faults and alarms or the active ones only.
Button status Description

Displays the active faults and alarms only
Displays all faults and alarms
Note: The module does not read the updates of active faults or alarms from the inverter until you
collapse all faults and alarms.
For more information about the maximum number of faults/alarms that can be recorded, see
parameters r0947/r2110 in Section "Parameter list (Page 187)".

6.11 Diagnosing
I/O status diagnostics

This subpage displays the detailed I/O status information.
Relevant parameters
Parameter Function
r0722.0...12 CO/BO: Digital input values
r0747.0...1 CO/BO: State of digital outputs
r0752[0...1] Actual analog input [V] or [mA]
P0756[0...1] Type of analog input
P0771[0] CI: Analog output
r0774[0] Actual analog output value [V] or [mA]

6.12 Backing up and restoring
Status bit diagnostics

This subpage displays the detailed status bit information.
Relevant parameters
Parameter Function
r0052.0...15 CO/BO: Active status word 1
r0053.0...11 CO/BO: Active status word 2

You can open the backup & restore Web page by selecting the backup & restore icon from
either the home page or the navigation sidebar.
6.12.1 Backing up
You can use the backup page to back up the desired parameters to SINAMICS V20 Smart
Access and download it (*.xml file) to your local drive (recommended on PC).
Note
The backup process backs up all parameters of access levels ≤ 4 and allows you to back up
a maximum of 20 files to SINAMICS V20 Smart Access. In case of any further backup
attempt, a message appears prompting you to delete some of the existing backup files.

1. Open the backup & restore Web page by selecting the backup & restore icon from ei-
ther the home page or the navigation sidebar.
2. Proceed as follows to back up the selected parameter file to SINAMICS V20 Smart
Access.
Character restrictions for the file name: maximum 30 characters which are limited to A-
Z, a-z, 0-9, _, -, (, ), dot, or space. If an existing backup file has the same name as the
new file you desire to back up, a message prompts asking you if you want to overwrite
the existing file.
Note:
When you perform the backup operation on a mobile device, if the menus and buttons
on the Web page disappear after you finish editing the backup file name, then you can
click in the blank area of the Web page to restore them.
3. When the following window appears, proceed as follows to complete the backup pro-
cess. If the Web page indicates that the backup fails, you can select to back up again.
Note that download to your local drive (recommended on PC) is only an optional step.
If you attempt to download from the V20 Web page via the supported Internet Explorer
Web browser, the V20 Web page then opens the file. You must save the backed-up file
to your local drive manually.

6.12.2 Restoring
You can use the restore page to upload, download, delete, and/or restore the selected file
(*.xml file).
Note
The restore process restores all parameters of access levels ≤ 4.
Uploading an existing file (recommended on PC)
Downloading an existing file (recommended on PC)

If you attempt to download from the V20 Web page via the supported Internet Explorer Web
browser, the V20 Web page then opens the file. You must save the backed-up file to your
local drive manually.
Deleting a selected file
Restoring the selected file
1. Proceed as follows to start restoring.

6.13 Upgrading Web application and SINAMICS V20 Smart Access firmware versions
2. The restore process completes when the following window appears. If the Web page
indicates that the restoring fails, you can select to try restoring again.
Then you can choose to save the parameter settings to the non-volatile memory in the
following window:
6.13 Upgrading Web application and SINAMICS V20 Smart Access

firmware versions
Upgrading on the V20 Web page always upgrades both the V20 Web application version
and the SINAMICS V20 Smart Access firmware version at the same time. In addition to the
Web application version upgrade and the firmware version upgrade, you can also upgrade
the service package version to enhance the network security level of SINAMICS V20 Smart
Access.
Note
Before upgrading the service package version, make sure that the Smart Access firmware
version is V01.02.05 or later.
There are two upgrading methods for selection:

● Conventional upgrading
● Basic upgrading (applicable when conventional upgrading cannot be performed)

Conventional upgrading
1. Download the target upgrade file (*.bin file) from the following Web site to your local
drive (recommended on PC):
https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13208
2. Access the V20 Web page: http://192.168.1.1. Proceed as follows to perform the up-
grade. Note that you must select the upgrade file downloaded to your local drive.
3. Confirm completion of the upgrading process when the following window appears. If
the Web page indicates that the upgrading fails, you can select to try upgrading again.
4. Restart SINAMICS V20 Smart Access.

5. Clear the Web browser cache.
6. Refresh your Web application.

Basic upgrading
1. Download the target upgrade file (*.bin file) from the following Web site to your local
drive (recommended on PC):
https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13208
2. Power off SINAMICS V20 Smart Access by sliding its power switch to "OFF". Keep the
reset button pressed and then slide the power switch to "ON".
3. Open the following Web site specific for basic upgrading:
http://192.168.1.1/factory/basicupgrade.html
4. Proceed as follows:
5. Restart SINAMICS V20 Smart Access.

6. Clear the Web browser cache.
7. Refresh your Web application.
Note
Refresh the basic upgrading page if the connection status unexpectedly becomes
"disconnected" during upgrading.

6.14 Viewing the support information

Proceed as follows to view the support information in case of any service need:
Editing the support information

You can also edit the telephone number and E-mail address of the service support by
proceeding as follows:
Make sure you observe the following rules when entering the telephone number and E-mail
address to pass the validity check:
● For telephone number: up to 22 characters starting with "+" and limited to numbers,
space, and "-";
● For E-mail address: up to 48 characters starting with numbers or letters.


Communicating with the PLC 7
The SINAMICS V20 supports communication with Siemens PLCs over USS on RS485. You
can parameterize whether the RS485 interface shall apply USS or MODBUS RTU protocol.
USS is the default bus setting. A screened twisted pair cable is recommended for the RS485
communication.
Make sure that you terminate the bus correctly by fitting a 120 R bus termination resistor
between the bus terminals (P+, N-) of the device at one end of the bus and a termination
network between the bus terminals of the device at the other end of the bus. The termination
network should be a 1.5 k resistor from 10 V to P+, 120 R from P+ to N- and 470 R from N-
to 0 V. A suitable termination network is available from your Siemens dealer.
7.1 USS communication
Overview
One PLC (master) can connect a maximum of 31 inverters (slaves) through the serial link
and control them with the USS serial bus protocol. A slave can never transmit without first
being initiated by the master so that direct information transfer between individual slaves is
not possible.

Communicating with the PLC
The messages are always sent in the following format (half-duplex communication):
● Response delay time: 20 ms

● Start delay time: depends on baud rate (minimum operation time for 2-character string:
0.12 to 2.3 ms)
● Message transfer sequence:
– master polls slave 1, then slave 1 responds
– master polls slave 2, then slave 2 responds
● Fixed framing characters that cannot be altered:
– 8 data bits
– 1 parity bit
– 1 or 2 stop bits
Abbreviation Significance Length Explanation

STX Start of text ASCII characters 02 hex
LGE Telegram length 1 byte Contains the telegram length
ADR Address 1 byte Contains the slave address and the
telegram type (binary coded)
1. ...... n. Net characters Each 1 byte Net data, contents are dependent
on the request
BCC Block check character 1 byte Data security characters
Request and response IDs

Request and response IDs are written in bits 12 to 15 of the PKW (parameter ID value) part
of USS telegram.
Request IDs (master → slave)
Request ID Description Response ID

positive negative
0 No request 0 7/8
1 Request parameter value 1/2 7/8
2 Modify parameter value (word) 1 7/8
3 Modify parameter value (double word) 2 7/8

Request ID Description Response ID

positive negative
4 Request descriptive element 3 7/8
6 Request parameter value (array) 4/5 7/8
7 Modify parameter value (array, word) 4 7/8
8 Modify parameter value (array, double word) 5 7/8
9 Request number of array elements 6 7/8
11 Modify parameter value (array, double word) and store in EEPROM 5 7/8
12 Modify parameter value (array, word) and store in EEPROM 4 7/8
13 Modify parameter value (double word) and store in EEPROM 2 7/8
14 Modify parameter value (word) and store in EEPROM 1 7/8
Response IDs (slave → master)
Response ID Description
0 No response
1 Transfer parameter value (word)
2 Transfer parameter value (double word)
3 Transfer descriptive element
4 Transfer parameter value (array, word)
5 Transfer parameter value (array, double word)
6 Transfer number of array elements
7 Request cannot be processed, task cannot be executed (with error number)
8 No master controller status/no parameter change rights for PKW interface
Error numbers in response ID 7 (request cannot be processed)
No. Description
0 Illegal PNU (illegal parameter number; parameter number not available)
1 Parameter value cannot be changed (parameter is read-only)
2 Lower or upper limit violated (limit exceeded)
3 Wrong sub-index
4 No array
5 Wrong parameter type/incorrect data type
6 Setting is not allowed (parameter value can only be reset to zero)
7 The descriptive element is not changeable and can only be read
9 Descriptive data not available
10 Access group incorrect
11 No parameter change rights. See parameter P0927. Must have status as master control.
12 Incorrect password
17 The current inverter operating status does not permit the request processing
18 Other error
20 Illegal value. Change request for a value which is within the limits, but it is not allowed for other reasons (pa-
rameter with defined single values)

No. Description
101 Parameter is currently deactivated; parameter has no function in the present inverter status
102 Communication channel width is insufficient for response; dependent on the number of PKW and the maximum
net data length of the inverter
104 Illegal parameter value
105 Parameter is indexed
106 Request is not included/task is not supported
109 PKW request access timeout/number of retries is exceeded/wait for response from CPU side
110 Parameter value cannot be changed (parameter is locked)
200/201 Changed lower/upper limits exceeded
202/203 No display on the BOP
204 The available access authorization does not cover parameter changes
300 Array elements differ
Basic inverter settings

P0010 Commissioning parameter = 30: restores to factory settings
P0970 Factory reset Possible settings:
= 1: resets all parameters (not user defaults) to their default
values
= 21: resets all parameters and all user defaults to factory
reset state
Note: Parameters P2010, P2011, P2023 retain their values after a factory
reset.
P0003 User access level =3
P0700 Selection of command source = 5: USS/MODBUS on RS485
Factory default: 1 (operator panel)
P1000 Selection of frequency set- = 5: USS/MODBUS on RS485
point Factory default: 1 (MOP setpoint)
P2023 RS485 protocol selection = 1: USS (factory default)
Note: After changing P2023, powercycle the inverter. During the powercycle,
wait until LED has gone off or the display has gone blank (may take a few
seconds) before re-applying power. If P2023 has been changed via a PLC,
make sure the change has been saved to EEPROM via P0971.
P2010[0] USS/MODBUS baudrate Possible settings:
= 6: 9600 bps (factory default)
= 7: 19200 bps
= 8: 38400 bps
...
= 12: 115200 bps
P2011[0] USS address Sets the unique address for the inverter.

7.2 MODBUS communication

P2012[0] USS PZD (process data) Defines the number of 16-bit words in PZD part of USS telegram.
length Range: 0 to 8 (factory default: 2)
P2013[0] USS PKW (parameter ID Defines the number of 16-bit words in PKW part of USS telegram.
value) length Possible settings:
= 0, 3, 4: 0, 3 or 4 words
= 127: variable length (factory default)
P2014[0] USS/MODBUS telegram off If time set to 0, no fault is generated (i.e. watchdog disabled).
time [ms]
r2024[0] USS/MODBUS error statistics The state of the telegram information on RS485 is reported regardless of the
... protocol set in P2023.
r2031[0]
r2018[0...7] CO: PZD from USS/MODBUS Displays process data received via USS/MODBUS on RS485.
on RS485
P2019[0...7] CI: PZD to USS/MODBUS on Displays process data transmitted via USS/MODBUS on RS485.
RS485
P2034 MODBUS parity on RS485 Sets the parity of MODBUS telegrams on RS485.
Possible settings:
= 0: no parity
= 1: odd parity
= 2: even parity
P2035 MODBUS stop bits on RS485 Sets the number of stop bits in MODBUS telegrams on RS485.
Possible settings:
= 1: 1 stop bit
= 2: 2 stop bits
Overview
In MODBUS, only the master can start a communication and the slave will answer it. There
are two ways of sending a message to a slave. One is unicast mode (address 1 to 247),
where the master addresses the slave directly; the other is broadcast mode (address 0),
where the master addresses all slaves.
When a slave has received a message, which was addressed at it, the Function Code tells it
what to do. For the task defined by the Function Code, the slave may receive some data.
And for error checking a CRC code is also included.
After receiving and processing a unicast message, the MODBUS slave will send a reply, but
only if no error was detected in the received message. If a processing error occurs, the slave
will reply with an error message. The following fixed framing characters in a message cannot
be altered: 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, and 1 or 2 stop bits.

Supported Function Codes

The SINAMICS V20 supports only three Function Codes. If a request with an unknown
Function Code is received, an error message will be returned.
FC3 - Read Holding Registers

When a message with FC = 0x03 is received, then 4 bytes of data are expected, that is, FC3
has 4 bytes of data:
● 2 bytes for the starting address of register
● 2 bytes for the number of registers
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8

Address FC (0x03) Start address Number of registers CRC
High Low High Low High Low
Inverter response
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 ... Byte N*2 - 1 Byte N*2 Byte N*2 + 1 Byte N*2 + 2
Address FC (0x03) Number Register 1 value ... Register N value CRC
of bytes High Low High Low High Low
FC6 - Write Single Register

When a message with FC = 0x06 is received, then 4 bytes of data are expected, that is, FC6
has 4 bytes of data:
● 2 bytes for the register value

Address FC (0x06) Start address New register value CRC
Inverter response

Address FC (0x06) Start address New register value CRC

FC16 - Write Multiple Registers

When a message with FC = 0x10 is received, then 5 + N bytes of data are expected, that is,
FC16 has 5 + N bytes of data:
● 2 bytes for the number of registers
● 1 byte for the byte count
● N bytes for the register values
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 ... Byte N - 1 Byte N Byte N + 1 Byte N + 2
Address FC Start address Number of regis- Number ... Register N value CRC
(0x10) ters of bytes
High Low High Low High Low High Low
Inverter response

Address FC (0x10) Start address Number of registers CRC
Exception Responses
If an error is detected through the MODBUS processing, the slave will respond with the FC
of the request, but with most significant bit of the FC high and with the Exception Code in the
data field. However, any error detected on the global address 0 does not result in a response
since all slaves cannot respond at once.
If an error is detected within the received message (for example, parity error, incorrect CRC
and so on), then NO response is sent to the master.
Note that if a request with FC16 is received which contains a write that the inverter cannot
perform (including write to a zero entry), other valid writes will still be performed even though
an exception response is returned.
The following MODBUS Exception Codes are supported by SINAMICS V20:
Exception Code MODBUS name Meaning

01 Illegal function code The function code is not supported – only FC3,
FC6 and FC16 are supported.
02 Illegal data address An invalid address was queried.
03 Illegal data value An invalid data value was recognized.
04 Slave device failure An unrecoverable error occurred while the device
was processing the action.

The table below shows the cases in which an Exception Code is returned:
Error description Exception Code

Unknown Function Code 01
Read registers, which are out of boundary 02
Write register, which is out of boundary 02
Read request of too many registers (>125) 03
Write request of too many registers (>123) 03
Incorrect message length 03
Write to a read-only register 04
Write register, error in parameter access 04
Read register, error in Parameter Manager 04
Write to a zero entry 04
Unknown error 04
Basic inverter settings

P0010 Commissioning parameter = 30: restores to factory settings
P0970 Factory reset Possible settings:
= 1: resets all parameters (not user defaults) to their default
values
= 21: resets all parameters and all user defaults to factory
reset state
Note: Parameters P2010, P2021, P2023 retain their values
after a factory reset.
P0003 User access level =3
P0700 Selection of command source = 5: USS/MODBUS on RS485
Factory default: 1 (operator panel)
P2010[0] USS/MODBUS baudrate Possible settings:
= 6: 9600 bps (factory default)
= 7: 19200 bps
= 8: 38400 bps
...
=12: 115200 bps
P2014[0] USS/MODBUS telegram off time [ms] If time set to 0, no fault is generated (i.e. watchdog disabled).
P2021 Modbus address Sets the unique address for the inverter.
P2022 Modbus reply timeout [ms] Range: 0 to 10000 (factory default: 1000)


P2023 RS485 protocol selection = 2: Modbus
Factory default: 1 (USS)
Note: After changing P2023, powercycle the inverter. During the
powercycle, wait until LED has gone off or the display has gone
blank (may take a few seconds) before re-applying power. If
P2023 has been changed via a PLC, make sure the change
has been saved to EEPROM via P0971.
r2024[0] USS/MODBUS error statistics The state of the telegram information on RS485 is reported
... regardless of the protocol set in P2023.
r2031[0]
r2018[0...7] CO: PZD from USS/ MODBUS on RS485 Displays process data received via USS/MODBUS on RS485.
P2019[0...7] CI: PZD to USS/MODBUS on RS485 Displays process data transmitted via USS/MODBUS on RS485.
P2034 MODBUS parity on RS485 Sets the parity of MODBUS telegrams on RS485.
Possible settings:
= 0: no parity
= 1: odd parity
= 2: even parity
P2035 MODBUS stop bits on RS485 Sets the number of stop bits in MODBUS telegrams on RS485.
Possible settings:
= 1: 1 stop bit
= 2: 2 stop bits
Mapping table
The table below shows registers that the SINAMICS V20 inverter supports. "R", "W", and
"R/W" in the "Access" column stand for read, write, and read/write respectively. Registers
with * are available only when the optional I/O Extension Module is connected.
HSW (speed setpoint), HIW (actual speed), STW (control word), and ZSW (status word)
refer to control data. For more information, see parameters r2018 and P2019 in Chapter
"Parameter list (Page 183)".
Register No. Description Ac- Unit Scaling Range or On/Off Read Write
Inverter MODBUS cess factor text
0 40001 Watchdog time R/W ms 1 0 - 65535 - -
1 40002 Watchdog action R/W - 1 - - -
2 40003 Frequency setpoint R/W % 100 0.00 - 100.00 HSW HSW
3 40004 Run enable R/W - 1 0-1 STW:3 STW:3
4 40005 Forward/reverse R/W - 1 0-1 STW:11 STW:11
command
5 40006 Start command R/W - 1 0-1 STW:0 STW:0
6 40007 Fault acknowledge- R/W - 1 0-1 STW:7 STW:7
ment
7 40008 PID setpoint refer- R/W % 100 -200.0 - 200.0 P2240 P2240
ence
8 40009 PID enable R/W - 1 0-1 r0055.8 (BICO) P2200

9 40010 Current limit R/W % 10 10.0 - 400.0 P0640 P0640
10 40011 Acceleration time R/W s 100 0.00 - 650.0 P1120 P1120
11 40012 Deceleration time R/W s 100 0.00 - 650.0 P1121 P1121
12 40013 (Reserved)
13 40014 Digital output 1 R/W - 1 HIGH LOW r0747.0 (BICO) P0731
15 40016 Reference frequency R/W Hz 100 1.00 - 550.00 P2000 P2000
16 40017 PID upper limit R/W % 100 -200.0 - 200.0 P2291 P2291
17 40018 PID lower limit R/W % 100 -200.0 - 200.0 P2292 P2292
18 40019 Proportional gain R/W - 1000 0.000 - 65.000 P2280 P2280
19 40020 Integral gain R/W s 1 0 - 60 P2285 P2285
20 40021 Differential gain R/W - 1 0 - 60 P2274 P2274
21 40022 Feedback gain R/W % 100 0.00 - 500.00 P2269 P2269
22 40023 Low pass R/W - 100 0.00 - 60.00 P2265 P2265
23 40024 Frequency output R Hz 100 -327.68 - 327.67 r0024 r0024
24 40025 Speed R RPM 1 -16250 - 16250 r0022 r0022
25 40026 Current filtered R A 100 0 - 163.83 r0027 r0027
26 40027 Torque R Nm 100 -325.00 - 325.00 r0031 r0031
27 40028 Actual power R kW 100 0 - 327.67 r0032 r0032
28 40029 Total kWh R kWh 1 0 - 32767 r0039 r0039
29 40030 DC bus voltage R V 1 0 - 32767 r0026 r0026
30 40031 Reference R Hz 100 -327.68 - 327.67 r0020 r0020
31 40032 Rated power R kW 100 0 - 327.67 r0206 r0206
32 40033 Voltage output R V 1 0 - 32767 r0025 r0025
33 40034 Forward/reverse R - 1 FWD REV ZSW:14 ZSW:14
34 40035 Stop/run R - 1 STOP RUN ZSW:2 ZSW:2
35 40036 Run at maximum R - 1 MAX NO ZSW:10 ZSW:10
frequency
36 40037 Control mode R - 1 SERIAL LOCAL ZSW:9 ZSW:9
37 40038 Enabled R - 1 ON OFF ZSW:0 ZSW:0
38 40039 Ready to run R - 1 READY OFF ZSW:1 ZSW:1
39 40040 Analog input 1 R % 100 -300.0 - 300.0 r0754[0] r0754[0]
40 40041 Analog input 2 R % 100 -300.0 - 300.0 r0754[1] r0754[1]
41 40042 Analog output 1 R % 100 -100.0 - 100.0 r0774[0] r0774[0]
43 40044 Actual frequency R % 100 -100.0 - 100.0 HIW HIW
44 40045 PID setpoint output R % 100 -100.0 - 100.0 r2250 r2250
45 40046 PID output R % 100 -100.0 - 100.0 r2294 r2294
46 40047 PID feedback R % 100 -100.0 - 100.0 r2266 r2266
47 40048 Digital input 1 R - 1 HIGH LOW r0722.0 r0722.0

53 40054 Fault R - 1 FAULT OFF ZSW:3 ZSW:3
54 40055 Last fault R - 1 0 - 32767 r0947[0] r0947[0]
55 40056 Fault 1 R - 1 0 - 32767 r0947[1] r0947[1]
56 40057 Fault 2 R - 1 0 - 32767 r0947[2] r0947[2]
57 40058 Fault 3 R - 1 0 - 32767 r0947[3] r0947[3]
58 40059 Warning R - 1 WARN OK ZSW:7 ZSW:7
59 40060 Last warning R - 1 0 - 32767 r2110 r2110
60 40061 Inverter version R - 100 0.00 - 327.67 r0018 r0018
61 40062 Inverter model R - 1 0 - 32767 r0201 r0201
99 40100 STW R/W - 1 PZD 1 PZD 1
100 40101 HSW R/W - 1 PZD 2 PZD 2
109 40110 ZSW R - 1 PZD 1 PZD 1
110 40111 HIW R - 1 PZD 2 PZD 2
201 40202 Digital output 3* R/W - 1 HIGH LOW r0747.2 (BICO) P0733
202 40203 Digital output 4* R/W - 1 HIGH LOW r0747.3 (BICO) P0734
219 40220 Analog output 1 R % 100 -100.0 - 100.0 r0774[0] r0774[0]
243 40244 Digital input 5* R - 1 HIGH LOW r0722.4 r0722.4
244 40245 Digital input 6* R - 1 HIGH LOW r0722.5 r0722.5
259 40260 Analog input 1 R % 100 -300.0 - 300.0 r0754[0] r0754[0]
260 40261 Analog input 2 R % 100 -300.0 - 300.0 r0754[1] r0754[1]
299 40300 Inverter model R - 1 0 - 32767 r0201 r0201
300 40301 Inverter version R - 100 0.00 - 327.67 r0018 r0018
319 40320 Rated power R kW 100 0 - 327.67 r0206 r0206
320 40321 Current limit R/W % 10 10.0 - 400.0 P0640 P0640
321 40322 Acceleration time R/W s 100 0.00 - 650.0 P1120 P1120
322 40323 Deceleration time R/W s 100 0.00 - 650.0 P1121 P1121
323 40324 Reference frequency R/W Hz 100 1.00 - 650.0 P2000 P2000
324 40325 Fixed frequency 1 R/W Hz 100 -327.68 - 327.67 P1001 P1001
329 40330 Fixed setpoint 1 R/W % 100 -200 - 200 P2889 P2889
330 40331 Fixed setpoint 2 R/W % 100 -200 - 200 P2890 P2890
339 40340 Reference R Hz 100 -327.68 - 327.67 r0020 r0020

340 40341 Speed R RPM 1 -16250 - 16250 r0022 r0022
341 40342 Frequency output R Hz 100 -327.68 - 327.67 r0024 r0024
342 40343 Voltage output R V 1 0 - 32767 r0025 r0025
343 40344 DC bus voltage R V 1 0 - 32767 r0026 r0026
344 40345 Current filtered R A 100 0 - 163.83 r0027 r0027
345 40346 Torque R Nm 100 -325.00 - 325.00 r0031 r0031
346 40347 Actual power R kW 100 0 - 327.67 r0032 r0032
347 40348 Total kWh R kWh 1 0 - 32767 r0039 r0039
348 40349 Hand/auto R - 1 HAND AUTO r0807 r0807
349 40350 Current unfiltered R A 100 0 - 163.83 r0068 r0068
399 40400 Fault 1 R - 1 0 - 32767 r0947[0] r0947[0]
400 40401 Fault 2 R - 1 0 - 32767 r0947[1] r0947[1]
401 40402 Fault 3 R - 1 0 - 32767 r0947[2] r0947[2]
402 40403 Fault 4 R - 1 0 - 32767 r0947[3] r0947[3]
403 40404 Fault 5 R - 1 0 - 32767 r0947[4] r0947[4]
404 40405 Fault 6 R - 1 0 - 32767 r0947[5] r0947[5]
405 40406 Fault 7 R - 1 0 - 32767 r0947[6] r0947[6]
406 40407 Fault 8 R - 1 0 - 32767 r0947[7] r0947[7]
407 40408 Warning R - 1 0 - 32767 r2110[0] r2110[0]
498 40499 Parameter error code R - 1 0 - 254 - -
499 40500 PID enable R/W - 1 0-1 r0055.8 (BICO) P2200
500 40501 PID setpoint refer- R/W % 100 -200.0 - 200.0 P2240 P2240
ence
509 40510 Low pass R/W - 100 0.00 - 60.0 P2265 P2265
510 40511 Feedback gain R/W % 100 0.00 - 500.00 P2269 P2269
511 40512 Proportional gain R/W - 1000 0.000 - 65.000 P2280 P2280
512 40513 Integral gain R/W s 1 0 - 60 P2285 P2285
513 40514 Differential gain R/W - 1 0 - 60 P2274 P2274
514 40515 PID upper limit R/W % 100 -200.0 - 200.0 P2291 P2291
515 40516 PID lower limit R/W % 100 -200.0 - 200.0 P2292 P2292
519 40520 PID setpoint output R % 100 -100.0 - 100.0 r2250 r2250
520 40521 PID feedback R % 100 -100.0 - 100.0 r2266 r2266
521 40522 PID output R % 100 -100.0 - 100.0 r2294 r2294
549 40550 Parameter number RW - 1 0 - 65535 - -
550 40551 Parameter index RW - 1 0 - 65535 - -
551 40552 Reserved RO - - - - -
553 40554 Parameter upper RW - 1 0 - 65535 - -
word
554 40555 Parameter lower RW - 1 0 - 65535 - -
word
557 40558 Parameter upper word RO - 1 0 - 65535 - -
558 40559 Parameter lower word RO - 1 0 - 65535 - -

Program example
The program below gives an example of calculating the CRC for MODBUS RTU.
unsigned int crc_16 (unsigned char *buffer, unsigned int length)
{
unsigned int i, j, temp_bit, temp_int, crc;
crc = 0xFFFF;
for ( i = 0; i < length; i++ )
{
temp_int = (unsigned char) *buffer++;
crc ^= temp_int;
for ( j = 0; j < 8; j++ )
{
temp_bit = crc & 0x0001;
crc >>= 1;
if ( temp_bit != 0 )
crc ^= 0xA001;
}
}
}
Parameter scaling
Due to the limits of the integer data in the MODBUS protocol, it is necessary to convert the
inverter parameters before transmitting them. This is done by scaling, so that a parameter,
which has a position after decimal point, is multiplied by a factor, to get rid of the fractional
part. The scaling factor is as defined in the above table.
BICO parameters
The updating of BICO parameters will also be done in the parameter processing in the
background. Because of the limitations of the register value, it is only possible to write a ‘0’
or a ‘1’ to a BICO parameter. This will set BICO input to a static value of either ‘0’ or ‘1’. The
previous connection to another parameter is lost. Reading the BICO parameter will return the
current value of the BICO output.
For example: MODBUS register number 40200. Writing a value 0 or 1 to that register will set
the BICO input P0731 statically to that value. Reading will return the BICO output, which is
stored in r0747.0.
Fault
The inverter displays the fault F72 when the following three conditions are met:
● The parameter P2014 (USS/MODBUS telegram off time) is not equal to 0.
● Process data has been received from the master since the inverter's start-up.
● The time between receipts of two consecutive process data telegrams exceeds the value
of P2014.


Parameter list 8
8.1 Introduction to parameters
Parameter number
Numbers prefixed with an "r" indicate that the parameter is a "read-only" parameter.
Numbers prefixed with a "P" indicate that the parameter is a "writable" parameter.
[index] indicates that the parameter is an indexed parameter and specifies the range of
indices available. If the index is [0...2] and the meaning is not listed, then see "Data set".
.0...15 indicates that the parameter has several bits, which can be evaluated or connected
individually.
Data set
Note
The "Index" chapter at the end of this manual provides complete lists of CDS/DDS
parameters.
In the inverter, the parameters which are used to define the sources for commands and
setpoints are combined in the Command Data Set (CDS), while the parameters for the open
and closed-loop control of the motor are combined in the Inverter Data Set (DDS).
The inverter can be operated from different signal sources by switching over the command
data sets. When switching over the inverter data sets, it is possible to switch between
different inverter configurations (control type, motor).
Three independent settings are possible for each data set. These settings can be made
using the index [0...2] of the particular parameter.
Index CDS DDS

[0] Command data set 0 Inverter data set 0

Parameter list
SINAMICS V20 has an integrated copy function which is used to transfer data sets. This can
be used to copy CDS/DDS parameters corresponding to the particular application.
Copy CDS Copy DDS Remarks

P0809[0] P0819[0] The data set which is to be copied (source)
P0809[1] P0819[1] The data set into which data is to be copied (target)
P0809[2] P0819[2] = 1: Start copying
= 0: Copying completed
For example, copying of all values from CDS0 to CDS2 can be accomplished by the
following procedure:
1. Set P0809[0] = 0: copy from CDS0
2. Set P0809[1] = 2: copy to CDS2
3. Set P0809[2] = 1: start copy
Command data set

The command data sets are changed over using the BICO parameters P0810 and P0811,
whereby the active command data set is displayed in parameter r0050. Changeover is
possible in both the "Ready" and the "Run" states.
P0810 = 0 CDS0
P0811 = 0
P0810 = 1 CDS1
P0811 = 0
P0810 = 0 or 1 CDS2
P0811 = 1
Inverter data set

The inverter data sets are changed over using the BICO parameters P0820 and P0821,
whereby the active inverter data set is displayed in parameter r0051. Inverter data sets can
only be changed over in the "Ready" state.
P0820 = 0 DDS0
P0821 = 0
P0820 = 1 DDS1
P0821 = 0
P0820 = 0 or 1 DDS2
P0821 = 1
BI, BO, CI, CO, CO/BO in parameter names
Note
The "Index" chapter at the end of this manual provides groups of the BICO parameters.

Parameter list
Certain parameter names include the following abbreviated prefixes: BI, BO, CI, CO and
CO/BO followed by a colon. These abbreviations have the following meanings:
BI = Binector input: Parameter selects the source of a binary signal

Each BI parameter can connect as the input to any BO or CO/BO parameter.
BO = Binector output: Parameter connects as a binary signal

Each BO parameter can connect as the output to any BI parameter.
CI = Connector input: Parameter selects the source of an analog signal
Each CI parameter can connect as the input to any CO or CO/BO parameter.
CO = Connector output: Parameter connects as an analog signal

Each CO parameter can connect as the output to any CI parameter.
CO/BO = Connector/binector output: Parameter connects as an analog signal and/or as a binary signal
Each CO/BO parameter can connect as the output to any BI or CI parameter.
BICO example
BICO or the binary interconnection technology can help the user to connect internal function
and values to realize more customized features.
BICO functionality is a different, more flexible way of setting and combining input and output
functions. It can be used in most cases in conjunction with the simple, access level 2 settings.
The BICO system allows complex functions to be programmed. Boolean and mathematical
relationships can be set up between inputs (digital, analog, serial etc.) and outputs (inverter
current, frequency, analog output, digital outputs, etc.).
The default parameter that a BI or CI parameter is connected to is shown in the Factory
default column of the parameter list.

Parameter list
Access level (P0003)

Defines the level of user access to parameter sets.
Access level Description Remarks

0 User-defined parameter list Defines a limited set of parameters to which the end
user has access. See P0013 for details on use.
1 Standard Allows access into most frequently used parameters.
2 Extended Allows extended access to more parameters.
3 Expert For expert use only.
4 Service Only for use by authorized service personnel, password
protected.
Data type
The data types available are shown in the table below.
U8 8-bit unsigned
U16 16-bit unsigned
U32 32-bit unsigned
I16 16-bit integer
I32 32-bit integer
Float 32-bit floating point number
Depending on the data type of the BICO input parameter (signal sink) and BICO output
parameter (signal source) the following combinations are possible when creating BICO
interconnections:
BICO input parameter

CI parameter BI parameter
BICO output parameter U32/I16 U32/I32 U32/Float U32/Bin
CO: U8 √ √ - -
CO: U16 √ √ - -
CO: U32 √ √ - -
CO: I16 √ √ - -
CO: I32 √ √ - -
CO: Float √ √ √ -
BO: U8 - - - √
BO: U16 - - - √
BO: U32 - - - √
BO: I16 - - - √
BO: I32 - - - √
BO: Float - - - -
Legend:
√: BICO interconnection permitted
-: BICO interconnection not permitted

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
Scaling
Specification of the reference quantity with which the signal value will be converted
automatically.
Reference quantities, corresponding to 100 %, are required for the statement of physical
units as percentages. These reference quantities are entered in P2000 to P2004.
In addition to P2000 to P2004 the following normalizations are used:
● TEMP: 100 °C = 100 %
● PERCENT: 1.0 = 100 %
● 4000H: 4000 hex = 100 %
Can be changed
Inverter state in which the parameter is changeable. Three states are possible:
● Commissioning: C, C(1) or C(30)
● Run: U
● Ready to run: T
This indicates when the parameter can be changed. One, two or all three states may be
specified. If all three states are specified, this means that it is possible to change this
parameter setting in all three inverter states. C shows the parameter is changeable whatever
P0010 equals; C(1) shows that the parameter is changeable only when P0010 = 1; C(30)
shows that the parameter is changeable only when P0010 = 30.
8.2 Parameter list
Parameter Function Range Factory Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.

default changed set type Level
r0002 Inverter state - - - - - U16 2
Displays actual inverter state.
0 Commissioning mode (P0010 ≠ 0)
1 Inverter ready
2 Inverter fault active
3 Inverter starting (visible only while pre-charging DC link)
4 Inverter running
5 Stopping (ramping down)
6 Inverter inhibited
P0003 User access level 0-4 1 U, T - - U16 1
Defines user access level to parameter sets.
0 User defined parameter list - see P0013 for details on use
1 Standard: Allows access into most frequently used parameters
2 Extended: Allows extended access, for example, to inverter I/O functions
3 Expert: For expert use only
4 Service: Only for use by authorized service, password protected

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P0004 Parameter filter 0 - 24 0 U, T - - U16 1
Filters parameters according to functionality to enable a more focused approach to commissioning.
0 All parameters
2 Inverter
3 Motor
5 Technology application/units
7 Commands, binary I/O
8 Analog input and analog output
10 Setpoint channel/RFG
12 Inverter features
13 Motor control
19 Motor identification
20 Communication
21 Warnings/faults/monitoring
22 Technology controller
24 List of modified parameters
P0005 Parameter display 0 - 9580 0 C, U, T - - U16 2
selection
Selects default display parameter (inverter display).
Example: The inverter displays the value of the parameter selected here by default.
Notice: If you have set P0005 to a non-zero value which represents an actual parameter number, then the inverter
displays the value of the selected parameter as the default display value; if you have set P0005 to 0 or a
non-zero value which does not represent an actual parameter number, then the default display remains
unchanged.
P0007 Backlight delay time 0 - 2000 0 U, T - - U16 3
Defines time period after which the backlight of the operator panel display turns off if no buttons have been
pressed.
0 Backlight always on
1 - 2000 Number of seconds after which the backlight turns off.
P0010 Commissioning pa- 0 - 30 0 T - - U16 1
rameter
Filters parameters so that only those related to a particular functional group are selected.
0 Ready
1 Quick commissioning
2 Inverter
29 Download
30 Factory setting
Dependency: Reset to 0 for inverter to run.
P0003 (user access level) also determines access to parameters.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

Note: • P0010 = 1
The inverter can be commissioned very quickly and easily by setting P0010 = 1. After that only the im-
portant parameters (e.g.: P0304, P0305, etc.) are visible. The value of these parameters must be en-
tered one after the other. The end of quick commissioning and the start of internal calculation will be
done by setting P3900 = 1 - 3. Afterwards parameter P0010 and P3900 will be reset to zero automatically.
• P0010 = 2
For service purposes only.

• P0010 = 30
When resetting the parameters or user default values of inverter P0010 must be set to 30.
Resetting of the parameters will be started by setting parameter P0970 = 1. The inverter will automati-
cally reset all its parameters to their default settings. This can prove beneficial if you experience prob-
lems during parameter setup and wish to start again.
Resetting of the user default values will be started by setting parameter P0970 = 21. The inverter will
automatically reset all its parameters to the factory default settings. Duration of factory setting will take
about 60 seconds.
P0011 Lock for user-defined 0 - 65535 0 U, T - - U16 3
parameter
See P0013
P0012 Key for user-defined 0 - 65535 0 U, T - - U16 3
parameter
See P0013
P0013[0...19] User-defined parame- 0 - 65535 [0...16] 0 U, T - - U16 3
ter [17] 3
[18] 10
[19] 12
Defines a limited set of parameters to which the end user has access.
Instructions for use:
1. Set P0003 = 3 (expert user).
2. Go to P0013 indices 0 to 16 (user list)
3. Enter into P0013 index 0 to 16 the parameters required to be visible in the user-defined list.
The following values are fixed and cannot be changed:
- P0013 index 17 = 3 (user access level)
- P0013 index 18 = 10 (commissioning parameter filter)
- P0013 index 19 = 12 (key for user defined parameter)
4. Set P0003 = 0 to activate the user defined parameter.
Index: [0] 1st user parameter
[1] 2nd user parameter
... ...
[19] 20th user parameter
Dependency: First, set P0011 ("lock") to a different value then P0012 ("key") to prevent changes to user-defined parameter.
Then, set P0003 to 0 to activate the user-defined list.
When locked and the user-defined parameter is activated, the only way to exit the user-defined parameter
(and view other parameters) is to set P0012 ("key") to the value in P0011 ("lock").

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P0014[0...2] Store mode 0-1 0 U, T - - U16 3
Sets the store mode for parameters. The store mode can be configured for all interfaces under "Index".
0 Volatile ( RAM)
1 Non-volatile (EEPROM)
Index: [0] USS/Modbus on RS485
[1] USS on RS232 (reserved)
[2] Reserved
Note: An independent store request may be part of the serial communications (for example, PKE bits 15-12 of
USS protocol). See the table below for an influence on the settings of P0014.
Value of P0014 [x] Store request via USS Result
RAM EEPROM EEPROM
EEPROM EEPROM EEPROM
RAM RAM RAM
EEPROM RAM EEPROM
1. P0014 itself will always be stored in the EEPROM.
2. P0014 will not be changed by performing a factory reset.
When transferring parameter P0014, the inverter uses its processor to carry-out internal calculations.
Communications - both via USS as well as Modbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to make
these calculations.
r0017 CO/BO: BOP button - - - - - U16 3
status
Shows the immediate status of the BOP buttons.
Bit Signal name 1 signal 0 signal
00 Run button Yes No
01 Stop button Yes No
02 HAND/AUTO button combination (OK + M) Yes No
03 OK button Yes No
05 Up button Yes No
06 Down button Yes No
07 Run/stop latch Yes No
Note: Bit 07 (ON/OFF), will remain high if the run button has been pressed and released. It will only be reset
once the stop button has been pressed.
r0018 Firmware version - - - - - Float 1
Displays version number of installed firmware.
r0019.0...14 CO/BO: Operator - - - - - U16 3
panel control word
Displays status of operator panel commands. The settings below are used as the "source" codes for key-
pad control when connecting to BICO input parameters.
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No
01 OFF2: Electrical stop No Yes
08 JOG right Yes No
11 Reverse (setpoint inversion) Yes No
13 Motor potentiometer MOP up Yes No
14 Motor potentiometer MOP down Yes No
Note: When BICO technology is used to allocate functions to panel buttons, this parameter displays the actual
status of the relevant command.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r0020 CO: Frequency set- - - - - - Float 3
point before RFG [Hz]
Displays actual frequency setpoint (input of ramp function generator). This value is available filtered
(r0020) and unfiltered (r1119). The actual frequency setpoint after RFG is displayed in r1170.
r0021 CO: Actual filtered - - - - - Float 2
frequency [Hz]
Displays actual inverter output frequency (r0024) excluding slip compensation (and resonance damping,
frequency limitation in V/f mode).
r0022 Actual filtered rotor - - - - - Float 3
speed [RPM]
Displays calculated rotor speed based on r0021 (filtered output frequency [Hz] x 120/number of poles). The
value is updated every 128 ms.
Note: This calculation makes no allowance for load-dependent slip.
output frequency [Hz]
Displays actual filtered output frequency (slip compensation, resonance damping and frequency limitation
are included). See also r0021. This value is available filtered (r0024) and unfiltered (r0066).
r0025 CO: Actual output - - - - - Float 2
voltage [V]
Displays filtered [rms] voltage applied to motor. This value is available filtered (r0025) and unfiltered
(r0072).
r0026[0] CO: Actual filtered - - - - - Float 2
DC-link voltage [V]
Displays filtered DC-link voltage. This value is available filtered (r0026) and unfiltered (r0070).
Index: [0] Compensation DC voltage channel
Note: r0026[0] = Main DC-link voltage
r0027 CO: Actual output - - - P2002 - Float 2
current [A]
Displays rms value of motor current. This value is available filtered (r0027) and unfiltered (r0068).
r0028 CO: Motor current - - - P2002 - Float 3
modulus
Displays estimated rms value of motor current calculated from dclink current.
torque [Nm]
Displays electrical torque. This value is available filtered (r0031) and unfiltered (r0080).
Note: The electrical torque is not the same as the mechanical torque, which can be measured on the shaft. Due
to windage and friction a part of the electrical torque is lost in the motor.
r0032 CO: Actual filtered - - - r2004 - Float 2
power
Displays (mechanical) shaft power. Value is displayed in [kW] or [hp] depending on setting for P0100 (op-
eration for Europe/North America).
P_mech = 2 * Pi * f * M -->
r0032[kW] = (2 * Pi/1000) * (r0022/60)[1/min] * r0031[Nm]
r0032[hp] = r0032[kW]/0.75

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r0035[0...2] CO: Actual motor - - - - DDS Float 2
temperature [°C]
Displays calculated motor temperature.
r0036 CO: Inverter overload - - - PERCENT - Float 3
utilization [%]
Displays inverter overload utilization calculated via the I2t model.
The actual I2t value relative to the maximum possible I2t value supplies utilization in [%].
If the current exceeds the threshold for P0294 (inverter I2t overload warning), warning A505 (inverter I2t) is
generated and the output current of the inverter reduced via P0290 (inverter overload reaction).
If 100 % utilization is exceeded, fault F5 (inverter I2t) is tripped.
r0037[0...1] CO: Inverter tempera- - - - - - Float 3
ture [°C]
Displays measured heat sink temperature and calculated junction temperature of IGBTs based on thermal
model.
Index: [0] Measured heat sink temperature
[1] Total Chip Junction Temperature
Note: The values are updated every 128 ms.
r0038 CO: Filtered power - - - - - Float 3
factor
Displays the filtered power factor.
r0039 CO: Energy con- - - - - - Float 2
sumpt. meter [kWh]
Displays electrical energy used by inverter since display was last reset (see P0040 - reset energy con-
sumption meter).
Dependency: Value is reset when P0040 = 1 (reset energy consumption meter).
P0040 Reset energy con- 0-1 0 T - - U16 2
sumpt. and energy
saved meter
Resets value of r0039 (energy consumption meter) and r0043 (energy saved meter) to zero.
0 No reset
1 Reset r0039 to 0
P0042[0...1] Energy saving scaling 0.000 - 0.000 T - - Float 2
100.00
Scales the calculated energy saved value
Index: [0] Factor for kWh to currency conversion
[1] Factor for kWh to CO2 conversion
r0043[0...2] Energy saved [kWh] - - - - - Float 2
Displays calculated energy saved
Index: [0] Energy saving in kWh
[1] Energy saving in currency
[2] Energy saving in CO2

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r0050 CO/BO: Active com- - - - - - U16 2
mand data set
Displays currently active command data set.
0 Command data set 0 (CDS)
Note: See P0810
r0051[0...1] CO: Active inverter - - - - - U16 2
data set (DDS)
Displays currently selected and active inverter data set (DDS).
0 Inverter data set 0 (DDS0)
Index: [0] Selected inverter data set
[1] Active inverter data set
Note: See P0820
r0052.0...15 CO/BO: Active status - - - - - U16 2
word 1
Displays first active status word of inverter (bit format) and can be used to diagnose inverter status.
00 Inverter ready Yes No
01 Inverter ready to run Yes No
02 Inverter running Yes No
03 Inverter fault active Yes No
04 OFF2 active No Yes
05 OFF3 active No Yes
06 ON inhibit active Yes No
07 Inverter warning active Yes No
08 Deviation setpoint/act. value No Yes
09 PZD control Yes No
10 |f_act| >= P1082 (f_max) Yes No
11 Warning: Motor current/torque limit No Yes
12 Brake open Yes No
13 Motor overload No Yes
14 Motor runs right Yes No
15 Inverter overload No Yes
Dependency: r0052 bit 03 "Inverter fault active": Output of bit 3 (Fault) will be inverted on digital output (Low = Fault,
High = No Fault);
r0052 bit 06 "On inhibit" is active with OFF2 or OFF3 and becomes disabled with OFF1, NOT OFF2 and
NOT OFF3.
Note: See r2197 and r2198.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r0053.0...11 CO/BO: Active status - - - - - U16 2
word 2
Displays second status word of inverter (in bit format).
00 DC brake active Yes No
01 |f_act| > P2167 (f_off) Yes No
02 |f_act| > P1080 (f_min) Yes No
03 Act. current |r0068| >= P2170 Yes No
04 |f_act| > P2155 (f_1) Yes No
05 |f_act| <= P2155 (f_1) Yes No
06 f_act >= setpoint (f_set) Yes No
07 Act. unfilt. Vdc < P2172 Yes No
08 Act. unfilt. Vdc > P2172 Yes No
09 Ramping finished Yes No
10 PID output r2294 == P2292 (PID_min) Yes No
11 PID output r2294 == P2291 (PID_max) Yes No
Notice: r0053 bit 00 "DC brake active" ==> see P1233
Note: See r2197 and r2198.
r0054.0...15 CO/BO: Active control - - - - - U16 3
word 1
Displays first control word of inverter (in bit format) and can be used to diagnose which commands are
active.
00 ON/OFF1 Yes No
01 OFF2: electrical stop No Yes
02 OFF3: fast stop No Yes
03 Pulse enable Yes No
04 RFG enable Yes No
05 RFG start Yes No
06 Setpoint enable Yes No
07 Fault acknowledge Yes No
08 JOG right Yes No
09 JOG left Yes No
10 Control from PLC Yes No
11 Reverse (setpoint inversion) Yes No
13 Motor potentiometer MOP up Yes No
14 Motor potentiometer MOP down Yes No
15 CDS Bit 0 (Hand/Auto) Yes No
Notice: r0054 is identical to r2036 if USS is selected as command source via P0700 or P0719.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r0055.0...15 CO/BO: Active control - - - - - U16 3
word 2
Displays additional control word of inverter (in bit format) and can be used to diagnose which commands
are active.
00 Fixed frequency Bit 0 Yes No
04 Inverter data set (DDS) Bit 0 Yes No
05 Inverter data set (DDS) Bit 1 Yes No
06 Quick stop disable Yes No
08 Enable PID Yes No
09 Enable DC brake Yes No
13 External fault 1 No Yes
15 Command data set (CDS) Bit 1 Yes No
Notice: r0055 is identical to r2037 if USS is selected as command source via P0700 or P0719.
r0056.0...15 CO/BO: Status of - - - - - U16 3
motor control
Displays status of motor control (in bit format), which can be used to diagnose inverter status.
00 Init. control finished Yes No
01 Motor demagnetizing finished Yes No
02 Pulses enabled Yes No
03 Voltage soft start select Yes No
04 Motor excitation finished Yes No
05 Starting boost active Yes No
06 Acceleration boost active Yes No
07 Frequency is negative Yes No
08 Field weakening active Yes No
09 Volts setpoint limited Yes No
10 Slip frequency limited Yes No
11 f_out > f_max Freq. limited Yes No
12 Phase reversal selected Yes No
13 Imax controller active/torque limit reached Yes No
14 Vdc_max controller active Yes No
15 KIB (Vdc_min control) active Yes No
Notice: The I-max controller (r0056 bit 13) will be activated when the actual output current (r0027) exceeds the
current limit in r0067.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

frequency [Hz]
Displays actual output frequency in Hz. This value is available filtered (r0024) and unfiltered (r0066).
Note: The output frequency is limited by the values entered in P1080 (minimum frequency) and P1082 (maxi-
mum frequency).
r0067 CO: Actual output - - - P2002 - Float 3
current limit [A]
Displays valid maximum output current of inverter.
r0067 is influenced/determined by the following factors:
• Inverter application P0205
• Rated motor current P0305
• Motor overload factor P0640
• Motor protection in dependency of P0610
• r0067 is less than or equal to maximum inverter current r0209
• Inverter protection in dependency of P0290
Note: A reduction of r0067 may indicate an inverter overload or a motor overload.
r0068 CO: Output current [A] - - - P2002 - Float 3
Displays unfiltered [rms] value of motor current. This value is available filtered (r0027) and unfiltered
(r0068).
Note: Used for process control purposes (in contrast to r0027, which is filtered and is used to display the value
through USS).
r0069[0...5] CO: Actual phase - - - P2002 - Float 4
currents [A]
Displays measured phase currents.
Index: [0] U_Phase/ Emitter1/
[1] Dclink/Emitter2
[2] Dclink
[3] Offset U_phase/Emitter
[4] Offset dclink
[5] Not used
r0070 CO: Actual DC-link - - - - - Float 3
voltage [V]
Displays DC-link voltage. This value is available filtered (r0026) and unfiltered (r0070).
Note: Used for process control purposes (in contrast to r0026 (actual DC-link voltage), which is filtered).
r0071 CO: Maximum output - - - - - Float 3
voltage [V]
Displays maximum output voltage.
Dependency: Actual maximum output voltage depends on the actual input supply voltage.
voltage [V]
Displays output voltage. This value is available filtered (r0025) and unfiltered (r0072).
r0074 CO: Actual modulation - - - PERCENT - Float 4
[%]
Displays actual modulation index. The modulation index is defined as ratio between the magnitude of the
fundamental component in the inverter phase output voltage and half of the DC-link voltage.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r0078 CO: Actual current Isq - - - P2002 - Float 3
[A]
Displays component of torque generating current. This value is available filtered (r0030) and unfiltered
(r0078).
r0080 CO: Actual torque [Nm] - - - - - Float 4
Displays actual torque. This value is available filtered (r0031) and unfiltered (r0080).
r0084 CO: Actual air gap flux - - - PERCENT - Float 4
[%]
Displays air gap flux relative to the rated motor flux.
r0085 CO: Actual re-active - - - P2002 - Float 3
current [A]
Displays re-active (imaginary part) of motor current.
Dependency: Applies when V/f control is selected in P1300 (control mode); otherwise, the display shows the value zero.
r0086 CO: Actual active - - - P2002 - Float 3
current [A]
Displays active (real part) of motor current.
Dependency: See r0085
r0087 CO: Actual power factor - - - - - Float 3
Displays the actual power factor.
r0094 CO: Transformation - 0.0 - 4000H - Float 3
angle [°]
Displays the transformation angle (flux angle in VC mode or angle from frequency in Vf mode).
P0095[0...9] CI: Display PZD sig- 0- 0 T 4000H - U32 3
nals 4294967295
Selects source of display for PZD signals.
Index: [0] 1st PZD signal
[1] 2nd PZD signal
... ...
[9] 10th PZD signal
r0096[0...9] PZD signals [%] - - - - - Float 3
Displays PZD signals.
Index: [0] 1st PZD signal
[1] 2nd PZD signal
... ...
[9] 10th PZD signal
Note: r0096 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.
P0100 Europe/North America 0 - 2 0 C(1) - - U16 1
Determines whether the power settings are expressed in [kW] or [hp] (e.g. Rated motor power P0307).
The default settings for the rated motor frequency P0310 and maximum frequency P1082 are set automat-
ically here, in addition to reference frequency P2000.
0 Europe [kW], motor base frequency is 50 Hz
1 North America [hp], motor base frequency is 60 Hz
2 North America [kW], motor base frequency is 60 Hz

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

Dependency: Where:
• Stop inverter first (i.e. disable all pulses) before you change this parameter.
• P0100 can only be changed with P0010 = 1 (Commissioning mode) via the respective interface (for
example, USS).
• Changing P0100 resets all rated motor parameters as well as other parameters that depend on the
rated motor parameters (see P0340 - calculation of motor parameters).
r0191[0...2] Configuration inverter - 0 - - - U32 4
Displays the actual hardware configuration (SZL vector) of the inverter.
Index: [0] SZL vector of inverter and power module
[1] SZL vector of inverter
[2] SZL vector of power module
P0199 Equipment system 0 - 65535 0 U, T - - U16 2
number
Specifies the unique equipment system number for the inverter.
P0201[0...2] Actual power module 0 - 65535 0 T - - U16 3
code number
Identifies hardware variant.
Index: [0] Inverter code
[1] Functionality version - last digit of the article number
[2] Last used inverter ID
Notice: Parameter P0201 = 0 indicates that no power module has been identified.
r0204 Power module fea- - 0 - - - U32 3
tures
Displays hardware features of power module.
00 DC input voltage Yes No
01 RFI filter Yes No
02 Active line module Yes No
03 SLM Yes No
04 BLM with thryistor Yes No
05 BLM with diode Yes No
06 Water cooled Yes No
07 F3E inverter Yes No
12 Safe brake Yes No
13 Safety enabled Yes No
14 Integrated output filter Yes No
Note: Parameter r0204 = 0 indicates that no power module has been identified.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P0205 Inverter application 0-1 0 C1 - - U16 3
Selects inverter application.
The inverter and motor requirements are determined by the speed range and torque requirements of the
load. The relationship between speed and torque for different loads (high overloads or low overloads) is
shown in the following figure:
• High overload (HO):
HO mode is used if the application needs a high overload on the whole frequency range. Many loads
can be considered to be high overloads. Typical high overloads are conveyors, compressors and posi-
tive displacement pumps.
• Low overload (LO):
LO mode is used if the application has a parabolic frequency/torque characteristic like many fans and
pumps. Low overload offers the following possibilities with the same inverter:
– Higher rated inverter current r0207
– Higher rated inverter power r0206
– Higher threshold for I2t protection
If P0205 is modified in quick commissioning it immediately calculates various motor parameters:
– P0305 Rated motor current
– P0307 Rated motor power
– P0640 Motor overload factor
It is recommended to modify P0205 first. Afterwards motor parameter may be adapted.
Motor parameter will be overridden by changing this sequence.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

Values: 0 High overload
1 Low overload
Notice: Use setting 1 (low overload) only for low-overload applications (for example, pumps and fans).
If it is used for high-overload applications, I2t warning will be produced too late, causing overheating in the
motor.
Note: This parameter selects inverter application for FSE only. The parameter value is not reset by the factory
setting (see P0970).
r0206 Rated inverter power - - - - - Float 2
[kW]/[hp]
Displays nominal rated motor power from inverter.
Dependency: Value is displayed in [kW] or [hp] depending on setting for P0100 (operation for Europe/North America).
r0207[0...2] Rated inverter current - - - - - Float 2
[A]
Displays rated inverter current.
Index: [0] Rated inverter current
[1] Rated LO current
[2] Rated HO current
Note: The rated high overload (HO) current r0207[2] values correspond to suitable 4-pole Siemens standard
motors (IEC) for the selected load cycle (see diagram). r0207[2] is the default value of P0305 in associa-
tion with the HO application (load cycle).
r0208 Rated inverter voltage - - - - - U32 2

[V]
Displays nominal AC supply voltage of inverter.
Note: r0208 = 230: 200 V to 240 V (tolerance: -10% to +10%)
r0208 = 400: 380 V to 480 V (tolerance: -15% to +10%)

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r0209 Maximum inverter current [A] - - - - - Float 2
Displays maximum output current of inverter.
Dependency: r0209 depends on the derating which is affected by pulse frequency P1800, surrounding temperature and
altitude. The data of deration is given in the Operating Instructions.
P0210 Supply voltage [V] 380 - 480 400 T - - U16 3
P0210 defines the supply voltage. Its default value depends upon the type of inverter. If P0210 does not
correspond to the supply voltage, then it must be modified.
Dependency: Optimizes Vdc controller, which extends the ramp-down time if regenerative energy from motor would
otherwise cause DC-link overvoltage trips.
Reducing the value enables controller to cut in earlier and reduce the risk of overvoltage.
Set P1254 ("Auto detect Vdc switch-on levels") = 0. Cut-in levels for Vdc controller and compound braking
are then derived directly from P0210 (supply voltage):
• Vdc_min switch-on level (r1246) = P1245 * sqrt(2) * P0210
• Vdc_max switch-on level (r1242) = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * P0210
• Dynamic braking switch-on level = 1.13 * sqrt(2) * P0210
• Compound braking switch-on level = 1.13 * sqrt(2) * P0210
Set P1254 ("Auto detect Vdc switch-on levels") = 1. Cut-in levels for Vdc controller and compound braking
are then derived from r0070 (DC-link voltage):
• Vdc_min switch-on level (r1246) = P1245 * r0070
• Vdc_max switch-on level (r1242) = 1.15 * r0070
• Dynamic braking switch-on level = 0.98 * r1242
• Compound braking switch-on level = 0.98 * r1242
Auto-detection calculations are only performed when the inverter has been in standby for over 20s. When
pulses are enabled, the calculated values are frozen until 20s after pulses cease.
Note: For best results, it is recommended that auto-detection of Vdc switch-on levels (P1254 = 1) is used. Set-
ting P1254 = 0 is only recommended when there is a high degree of fluctuation of the DC-link when the
motor is being driven. In this case, ensure the setting of P0210 is correct.
If mains voltage is higher than value entered, automatic deactivation of the Vdc controller may occur to
avoid acceleration of the motor. A warning will be issued in this case (A910).
Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.
r0231[0...1] Maximum cable length [m] - - - - - U16 3
Indexed parameter to display maximum allowable cable length between inverter and motor.
Index: [0] Maximum allowed unscreened cable length
[1] Maximum allowed screened cable length
Notice: For full EMC compliance, the screened cable must not exceed 25 m in length when an EMC filter is fitted.
P0290 Inverter overload reaction 0-3 2 T - - U16 3
Selects reaction of inverter to an internal thermal overload condition.
0 Reduce output frequency and output current
1 No reduction, trip (F4/5/6) when thermal limits reached
2 Reduce pulse frequency, output current and output frequency
3 Reduce pulse frequency only and trip (F6) when overload too high

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

Dependency: Following physical values influence the inverter overload protection (see diagram):
• Heat sink temperature (r0037[0]); causes A504 and F4.
• IGBT Junction temperature (r0037[1]); causes F4 or F6.
• Delta temperature between heat sink and junction temperature; causes A504 and F6.
• Inverter I2t (r0036); causes A505 and F5.
Notice: P0290 = 0, 2:
• Reduction of output frequency is only effective if the load is also reduced.
This is for example valid for light overload applications with a quadratic torque characteristic as pumps
or fans.
• For settings P0290 = 0 or 2, the I-max controller will act upon the output current limit (r0067) in case of
overtemperature.
P0290 = 0:
• With pulse frequencies above nominal, pulse frequency will be reduced to nominal immediately in the
event of r0027 greater than r0067 (current limit).
P0290 = 2, 3:
• The pulse frequency P1800 is reduced only if higher than 2 kHz and if the operating frequency is below
2 Hz.
• The actual pulse frequency is displayed in r1801[0] and the minimal pulse frequency for reduction is
displayed in r1801[1].
• Inverter I2t acts upon output current and output frequency, but not on pulse frequency.
A trip will always result, if the action taken does not sufficiently reduce internal temperatures.
P0291[0...2] Inverter protection 0-7 1 T - DDS U16 4
Bit 00 for enabling/disabling automatic pulse frequency reduction at output frequencies below 2 Hz. The
benefit is to reduce the noises at frequencies below 2 Hz.
00 Pulse frequency reduced below 2 Hz Yes No
01 Reserved Yes No
02 Phase loss detection enable Yes No
Note: See P0290

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P0292 Inverter temperature warning [°C] 0 - 25 5 U, T - - U16 3
Defines the temperature difference (in °C) between the overtemperature trip threshold (F4) and the warn-
ing threshold (A504) of the inverter. The trip threshold is stored internally by the inverter and cannot be
changed by the user.
P0294 Inverter I2t warning [%] 10.0 - 100.0 95.0 U, T - - Float 3
Defines the [%] value at which warning A505 (inverter I2t) is generated.
Inverter I2t calculation is used to determine a maximum tolerable period for inverter overload.
The I2t calculation value is deemed = 100 % when this maximum tolerable period is reached.
Dependency: • The output current of the inverter has been reduced.
• The value of I2t does not exceed 100 %.
Note: P0294 = 100 % corresponds to stationary nominal load.
P0295 Inverter fan off delay time [s] 0 - 3600 0 U, T - - U16 3
Defines inverter fan switch off delay time in seconds after inverter has stopped.
Note: Setting to 0, inverter fan will switch off when the inverter stops, that means no delay.
P0301[0...2] Easy motor data, rated motor 0 - 2000 0 C(1) - DDS Float 1
power [kW]
Rated motor power from the rating plate. No other data is necessary. If this parameter is used, the rest of
the motor data are then estimated by the firmware.
Dependency: Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
Caution: This functionality is only valid with 50 Hz supply, star configuration on 4-pole motors. You must set this
parameter to zero if you desire to set the other motor data.
P0304[0...2] Rated motor voltage [V] 10 - 2000 400 C(1) - DDS U16 1
Nominal motor voltage from rating plate.
Caution: The input of rating plate data must correspond with the wiring of the motor (star/delta). This means, if delta
wiring is used for the motor, delta rating plate data has to be entered.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

Note: Following diagram shows a typical rating plate with the locations of the relevant motor data.
P0305[0...2] Rated motor current [A] 0.01 - 1.86 C(1) - DDS Float 1
10000.00
Nominal motor current from rating plate.
Depends also on P0320 (motor magnetization current).
Note: The maximum value of P0305 depends on the maximum inverter current r0209 and the motor type:
Asynchronous motor : P0305_max = P0209
It is recommended that the ratio of P0305 (rated motor current) and r0207 (rated inverter current) should
not be lower than: (1/8) <= (P0305/r0207)
When the relation of the nominal motor current P0305 and half of the maximal inverter current (r0209)
exceeds 1.5 an additional current derating is applied. This is necessary to protect the inverter from har-
monic current waves.

P0307[0...2] Rated motor power 0.01 - 0.75 C(1) - DDS Float 1
2000.00
Nominal motor power [kW/hp] from rating plate.
Dependency: If P0100 = 1, values will be in [hp].
Changeable only when P0010 = 1 (quick commissioning).
Note: Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.
P0308[0...2] Rated motor cosφ 0.000 - 1.000 0.000 C(1) - DDS Float 1
Nominal motor power factor (cosφ) from rating plate.
Visible only when P0100 = 0 or 2, (motor power entered in [kW]).
Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value. The value is displayed in r0332.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P0309[0...2] Rated motor efficiency [%] 0.0 - 99.9 0.0 C(1) - DDS Float 1
Nominal motor efficiency from rating plate.
Visible only when P0100 = 1, (i.e. motor power entered in [hp]).
Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value. The value is displayed in r0332.
P0310[0...2] Rated motor frequency [Hz] 12.00 - 50.00 C(1) - DDS Float 1
550.00
Nominal motor frequency from rating plate.
Pole pair number recalculated automatically if parameter is changed.
Note: Changes to P0310 can influence the maximum motor frequency. For further information see P1082.
P0311[0...2] Rated motor speed [RPM] 0 - 40000 1395 C(1) - DDS U16 1
Nominal motor speed from rating plate.
Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value.
Slip compensation in V/f control requires rated motor speed for correct operation.
Pole pair number recalculated automatically if parameter is changed.
Note: Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.
r0313[0...2] Motor pole pairs - - - - DDS U16 3
Displays number of motor pole pairs that the inverter is currently using for internal calculations.
Dependency: Recalculated automatically when P0310 (rated motor frequency) or P0311 (rated motor speed) is changed.
r0313 = 1: 2-pole motor
r0313 = 2: 4-pole motor
...
P0314[0...2] Motor pole pair number 0 - 99 0 C(1) - DDS U16 3
Specifies number of pole pairs of motor.
Setting 0 causes r0313 (calculated motor pole pairs) to be used during operation. Setting to > 0 overrides
r0313.
P0314 = 1: 2-pole motor
P0314 = 2: 4-pole motor
...
P0320[0...2] Motor magnetizing current [%] 0.0 - 99.0 0.0 C, T - DDS Float 3
Defines motor magnetization current relative to P0305 (rated motor current).
Dependency: Setting 0 causes calculation by P0340 = 1 (data entered from rating plate) or by P3900 = 1 - 3 (end of
quick commissioning). The calculated value is displayed in r0331.
r0330[0...2] Rated motor slip [%] - - - PERCE DDS Float 3
NT
Displays nominal motor slip relative to P0310 (rated motor frequency) and P0311 (rated motor speed).
r0330[%] = ((P0310 - r0313 * (P0311/60))/P0310) * 100%
r0331[0...2] Rated magnetization current - - - - DDS Float 3
[A]
Displays calculated magnetizing current of motor.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r0332[0...2] Rated power factor - - - - DDS Float 3
Displays power factor for motor.
Dependency: Value is calculated internally if P0308 (rated motor cosφ) set to 0; otherwise, value entered in P0308 is
displayed.
r0333[0...2] Rated motor torque [Nm] - - - - DDS Float 3
Displays rated motor torque.
Dependency: Value is calculated from P0307 (rated motor power) and P0311 (rated motor speed). r0333[Nm] =
(P0307[kW] * 1000)/((P0311[1/min]/60) * 2 * Pi)
P0335[0...2] Motor cooling 0-3 0 C, T - DDS U16 2
Selects motor cooling system used.
0 Self-cooled: Shaft mounted fan attached motor
1 Force-cooled: Separately powered cooling fan
2 Self-cooled and internal fan
3 Force-cooled and internal fan
P0340[0...2] Calculation of motor parame- 0-4 0 T - DDS U16 2
ters
Calculates various motor parameters.
P0340 = 1 P0340 = 2 P0340 = 3 P0340 = 4
P0341[0...2] Motor inertia [kg*m^2] x
P0342[0...2] Total/motor inertia ratio x
P0344[0...2] Motor weight x
P0346[0...2] Magnetization time x x
P0347[0...2] Demagnetization time x x
P0350[0...2] Stator resistance (line-to-line) x x
P0352[0...2] Cable resistance x x
P0354[0...2] Rotor resistance x x
P0356[0...2] Stator leakage inductance x x
P0358[0...2] Rotor leakage inductance x x
P0360[0...2] Main inductance x x
P0625[0...2] Surrounding motor temperature x x
P1253[0...2] Controller output limitation x x
P1316[0...2] Boost end frequency x x
P1338[0...2] Resonance damping gain V/f x x x
P1341[0...2] Imax controller integral time x x x
P1345[0...2] Imax voltage ctrl. prop. gain x x x
P1346[0...2] Imax voltage ctrl. integral time x x x
P2002[0...2] Reference current x
P2003[0...2] Reference torque x
P2185[0...2] Upper torque threshold 1 x

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

0 No calculation
1 Complete parameterization
2 Calculation of equivalent circuit data
3 Calculation of V/f control data
4 Calculation of controller settings only
Note: This parameter is required during commissioning to optimize inverter performance. If there is a large mis-
match in Power ratings of Inverter to Motor it is possible that r0384 and r0386 may not be calculated cor-
rectly. In these cases use P1900.
When transferring P0340, the inverter uses its processor to carry out internal calculations. Communica-
tions to the inverter may be interrupted.
The faults can be acknowledged as soon as the calculations have been completed in the inverter. These
calculations can take approximately 10s to complete.
P0341[0...2] Motor inertia [kg*m^2] 0.0001 - 0.0018 U, T - DDS Float 3
1000.0
Sets no-load inertia of motor.
Together with P0342 (inertia ratio total/motor) and P1496 (scaling factor acceleration), this value produces
the acceleration torque (r1518), which can be added to any additional torque produced from a BICO
source (P1511), and incorporated in the torque control function.
Dependency: This parameter is influenced by automatic calculations defined by P0340.
Note: The result of P0341 * P0342 is included in the speed controller calculation.
P0341 * P0342 = total motor inertia
P1496 = 100 % activates acceleration pre-control for the speed controller and calculates the torque from
P0341 and P0342.
P0342[0...2] Total/motor inertia ratio 1.000 - 1.000 U, T - DDS Float 3
400.00
Specifies ratio between total inertia (load + motor) and motor inertia.
Dependency: See P0341
P0344[0...2] Motor weight [kg] 1.0 - 6500.0 9.4 U, T - DDS Float 3
Specifies motor weight [kg].
Note: This value is used in the motor thermal model. It is normally calculated automatically from P0340 (motor
parameters) but can also be entered manually. Default value is depending on inverter type and its rating data.
r0345[0...2] Motor start-up time [s] - - - - DDS Float 3
Displays motor start-up time. This time corresponds to the standardized motor inertia. The start-up time is
the time taken to reach rated motor speed from standstill at acceleration with rated motor torque (r0333).
P0346[0...2] Magnetization time [s] 0.000 - 1.000 U, T - DDS Float 3
20.000
Sets magnetization time [s], i.e. waiting time between pulse enable and start of ramp-up. Motor magnetiza-
tion builds up during this time. Magnetization time is normally calculated automatically from the motor data
and corresponds to the rotor time constant.
Notice: An excessive reduction of this time can result in insufficient motor magnetization.
Note: If boost settings are higher than 100 %, magnetization time may be reduced. Default value is depending
on inverter type and its rating data.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P0347[0...2] Demagnetization time [s] 0.000 - 1.000 U, T - DDS Float 3
20.000
Changes time allowed after OFF2/fault condition, before pulses can be re-enabled.
Notice: Not active following a normally completed ramp-down, e.g. after OFF1, OFF3 or JOG. Overcurrent trips
will occur if the time is decreased excessively.
Note: The demagnetization time is approximately 2.5 x rotor time constant in seconds. Default value is depend-
ing on inverter type and its rating data.
P0350[0...2] Stator resistance (line) [Ω] 0.00001 - 2.0000 U, T - DDS Float 3
2000.0
Stator resistance value for connected motor (line value). The parameter value doesn't include the cable
resistance.
Note: There are three ways to determine the value for this parameter:
• Calculate using
– P0340 = 1 (data entered from rating plate) or
– P0010 = 1, P3900 = 1, 2 or 3 (end of quick commissioning).
• Measure using P1900 = 2 (standard motor data identification - value for stator resistance is overwrit-
ten).
• Measure manually using an Ohmmeter.
Since the manually measured resistor is a line-to-line value, which includes the cable resistors, the meas-
ured value has to be divided by two and the cable resistor of a line has to be subtracted from that value.
The value entered in P0350 is the one obtained by the method last used. Default value is depending on
inverter type and its rating data.
P0352[0...2] Cable resistance [Ω] 0.0 - 120.0 0.0 U, T - DDS Float 3
Cable resistance value between inverter and motor for one phase.
P0354[0...2] Rotor resistance [Ω] 0.0 - 300.0 10.0 U, T - DDS Float 3
Sets rotor resistance of motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
Dependency: Calculated automatically using the motor model or determined using P1900 (motor identification). This
parameter is influenced by automatic calculations defined by P0340.
P0356[0...2] Stator leakage inductance 0.00001 - 10.000 U, T - DDS Float 3
[mH] 1000.0
Sets stator leakage inductance of motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
P0358[0...2] Rotor leakage inductance 0.0 - 1000.0 10.0 U, T - DDS Float 3
[mH]
Sets rotor leakage inductance of motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
P0360[0...2] Main inductance [mH] 0.0 - 10000.0 10.0 U, T - DDS Float 3
Sets main inductance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
Caution: The data of equivalent circuit relates to the star equivalent circuit. Any data of the delta equivalent circuit
available therefore must be transformed to the star equivalent circuit before entering into the inverter.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r0370[0...2] Stator resistance [%] - - - PERCE DDS Float 4
NT
Displays standardized stator resistance of motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
r0372[0...2] Cable resistance [%] - - - PERCE DDS Float 4
NT
Displays standardized cable resistance of motor equivalent circuit (phase value). It is estimated to be 20 %
of the stator resistance.
r0373[0...2] Rated stator resistance [%] - - - PERCE DDS Float 4
NT
Displays rated stator resistance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
r0374[0...2] Rotor resistance [%] - - - PERCE DDS Float 4
NT
Displays standardized rotor resistance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
r0376[0...2] Rated rotor resistance [%] - - - PERCE DDS Float 4
NT
Displays rated rotor resistance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
r0377[0...2] Total leakage reactance [%] - - - PERCE DDS Float 4
NT
Displays standardized total leakage reactance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
r0382[0...2] Main reactance [%] - - - PERCE DDS Float 4
NT
Displays standardized main reactance of the motor equivalent circuit (phase value).
r0384[0...2] Rotor time constant [ms] - - - - DDS Float 3
Displays calculated rotor time constant.
r0386[0...2] Total leakage time constant - - - - DDS Float 4
[ms]
Displays total leakage time constant of motor.
r0395 CO: Total stator resistance - - - PERCE - Float 3
[%] NT
Displays stator resistance of motor of combined stator/cable resistance.
P0503[0...2] Enable Keep-running Opera- 0-1 0 T - - U16 3
tion
Enables keep-running operation. This attempts to prevent the inverter from tripping by enabling all possible
existing de-rating features, and the automatic restart function. May be used with P2113 = 1 (inverter warn-
ings disabled) to mask resulting warnings from the user.
0 Keep-running mode disabled
1 Keep-running mode enabled
Index: [0] Inverter data set 0 (DDS0)
[1] Inverter data set 1 (DDS1)

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

Notice: P0503 = 1
Sets the following parameter values to minimize likelihood of a trip:
• P0290 = 2 (inverter overload reaction: reduce pulse frequency, output current and output frequency)
• P1210 = 7 (automatic restart function: restart after mains brown- /blackout or fault, trip when P1211
expires)
• P1211 = 10 (number of times inverter will attempt to restart)
• P1240 = 3 (configuration of Vdc controller: Vdc_max controller and kinetic buffering (KIB) enabled)
P0503 = 0
Resets the parameters to their default values:
• P0290 = 2 (inverter overload reaction: reduce pulse frequency, output current and output frequency)
• P1210 = 1 (automatic restart function: trip reset after power on, P1211 disabled)
• P1211 = 3 (number of times inverter will attempt to restart)
• P1240 = 1(configuration of Vdc controller: Vdc_max controller enabled)
Note: See also P0290, P1210, P1211, P1240, and P2113
P0507 Application macro 0 - 255 0 C(1) - - U16 1
Selects a given Application macro, which is a set of parameter values for a given application. There are a
number of application macros covering a set of basic applications such as simple pump, conveyor, com-
pressor etc.
Note: Please note that to guarantee correct setting of the Application macro, the Application macro number
should only be changed during Setup directly after a parameter reset.
P0511[0...2] Scaling for display 0.00 - 100.00 [0] 1.00 [1] U, T - - Float 3
1.00 [2]
0.00
Allows operator to enter the scaling factors for the display of motor frequency.
Index 0 = value of multiplier (a)
Index 1 = value of divisor (b)
Index 2 = value of constant (c)
With the parameter set to a non-default value the displayed value for frequency and setpoint on internal
and external BOPs is scaled accordingly. Note - the units "Hz" is no longer displayed if the value is scaled.
The formula used to scale the display is: (a/b)*N + c.
Index: [0] Multiplier for Scaling for display
[1] Divider for Scaling for display
[2] Constant for Scaling for display
r0512 CO: Scaled filtered frequency - - - - - Float 2
Displays actual inverter output frequency (r0024) excluding slip compensation (and resonance damping,
frequency limitation in V/f mode).
P0604[0...2] Threshold motor temperature 0.0 - 200.0 130.0 U, T - DDS Float 2
[°C]
Enters warning threshold for motor temperature protection. The trip temperature defined is always 10 %
higher than the warning threshold P0604. When actual motor temperature exceeds warning temperature
then inverter reacts as defined in P0610.
Dependency: This value should be at least 40°C higher than the motor surrounding temperature P0625.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P0610[0...2] Motor I2t temperature reaction 0 - 6 6 T - DDS U16 3
Defines reaction when motor temperature reaches warning threshold.
0 Warning only. Does not recall the motor temperature (stored at power
down) on power up
1 Warning with Imax control (motor current reduced) and trip (F11). Does
not recall the motor temperature (stored at power down) on power up
2 Warning and trip (F11). Does not recall the motor temperature (stored at
power down) on power up
4 Warning only. Recalls the motor temperature (stored at power down) on
power up
5 Warning with Imax control (motor current reduced) and trip (F11). Recalls
the motor temperature (stored at power down) on power up
6 Warning and trip (F11). Recalls the motor temperature (stored at power
down) on power up
Dependency: Trip level = P0604 (motor temperature threshold) * 110 %
Note: • P0610 = 0 (No reaction, warning only)
When temperature reaches warning level defined in P0604, the inverter displays warning A511, no reac-
tion is done.
• P0610 = 1 (Warning, Imax reduction and Trip)
When temperature reaches warning level defined in P0604, the inverter displays warning A511, reduce
frequency and trips F11, when temperature exceeds the trip level.
• P0610 = 2 (Warning and trip F11)
When temperature reaches warning level defined in P0604, the inverter displays warning A511 and trips
F11, when temperature exceeds the trip level.
The purpose of motor I2t is to calculate the motor temperature and disable the inverter if the motor is in
danger of overheating.
I2t operation:
The measured motor current is displayed in r0027. The motor temperature in °C is displayed in r0035.
This temperature is derived from a calculated value using motor thermal model.
The reaction to the warning can be changed from this default using P0610.
r0035 is particularly useful to monitor if the calculated motor temperature is rising excessively.
P0622[0...2] Magnetizing time for temp id 0.000 - 20000 0.000 U, T - DDS Float 3
after start up [ms]
Specifies the magnetization time for stator resistance identification.
r0623[0...2] CO: Display for the identified - - - - DDS Float 4
stator resistance [Ω]
Display of the actual identified stator resistance after temperature identification.
P0625[0...2] Surrounding motor tempera- -40.0 - 80.0 20.0 C, U, T - DDS Float 3
ture [°C]
Surrounding temperature of motor at time of motor data identification. It is only allowed to change the value
when the motor is cold. A motor identification has to be made after changing the value.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
Parameter Function Range Factory de- Can be Scaling Data Data Acc.
fault changed set type Level
P0626[0...2] Overtemperature stator 20.0 - 200.0 50.0 U, T - DDS Float 4
iron [°C]
Overtemperature of stator iron.
Note: Temperature rises are valid for sinusoidal operations (line supply temperature rises). Temperature rises
due to inverter operation (modulation losses) and output filter are also considered.
P0627[0...2] Overtemperature stator 20.0 - 200.0 80.0 U, T - DDS Float 4
winding [°C]
Overtemperature of the stator winding. It is only allowed to change the value when the motor is cold. A
motor identification has to be made after changing the value.
Note: See P0626
P0628[0...2] Overtemperature rotor 20.0 - 200.0 100.0 U, T - DDS Float 4
winding [°C]
Overtemperature of the rotor winding.
Note: See P0626
r0630[0...2] CO: Motor model sur- - - - - DDS Float 4
rounding temp. [°C]
Displays the surrounding temperature of the motor mass model.
r0631[0...2] CO: Stator iron tempera- - - - - DDS Float 4
ture [°C]
Displays the iron temperature of the motor mass model.
r0632[0...2] CO: Stator winding tem- - - - - DDS Float 4
perature [°C]
Displays the stator winding temperature of the motor mass model.
r0633[0...2] CO: Rotor winding tem- - - - - DDS Float 4
perature [°C]
Displays the rotor winding temperature of the motor mass model.
P0640[0...2] Motor overload factor 10.0 - 400.0 150.0 C, U, T - DDS Float 2
[%]
Defines motor overload current limit relative to P0305 (rated motor current).
Dependency: Limited to maximum inverter current or to 400 % of rated motor current (P0305), whichever is the lower.
P0640_max = (min(r0209, 4 * P0305)/P0305) * 100
Note: Changes to P0640 will be effective only after the next off state.
P0700[0...2] Selection of command 0-5 1 C, T - CDS U16 1
source
Selects digital command source.
0 Factory default setting
1 Operator panel (keypad)
2 Terminal
5 USS/MODBUS on RS485
Dependency: Changing this parameter sets (to default) all settings on item selected. These are the following parame-
ters: P0701, ... (function of digital input), P0840, P0842, P0844, P0845, P0848, P0849, P0852, P1020,
P1021, P1022, P1023, P1035, P1036, P1055, P1056, P1074, P1110, P1113, P1124, P1140, P1141,
P1142, P1230, P2103, P2104, P2106, P2200, P2220, P2221, P2222, P2223, P2235, P2236
Caution: Be aware, by changing of P0700 all BI parameters are reset to the default value.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
Note: RS485 also supports MODBUS protocol as well as USS. All USS options on RS485 are also applicable to
MODBUS.
If P0700 = 0, the values of the following parameters relevant to the digital input function will be restricted
to their defaults: P0701, P0702, P0703, P0704, P0712 and P0713.
P0701[0...2] Function of digital input 1 0 - 99 0 T - CDS U16 2
Selects function of digital input 1.
0 Digital input disabled
1 ON/OFF1
2 ON reverse/OFF1
3 OFF2 - coast to standstill
4 OFF3 - quick ramp-down
5 ON/OFF2
9 Fault acknowledge
10 JOG right
11 JOG left
12 Reverse
13 MOP up (increase frequency)
14 MOP down (decrease frequency)
15 Fixed frequency selector bit0
22 QuickStop Source 1
23 QuickStop Source 2
24 QuickStop Override
25 DC brake enable
27 Enable PID
29 External trip
33 Disable additional freq setpoint
99 Enable BICO parameterization
Dependency: Resetting 99 (enable BICO parameterization) requires:
• P0700 command source or
• P0010 = 1, P3900 = 1, 2 or 3 (quick commissioning) or
• P0010 = 30, P0970 = 1 factory reset in order to reset
Note: "ON/OFF1" can only be selected for one digital input (e.g. P0700 = 2 and P0701 = 1). Configuring DI2
with P0702 = 1 will disable digital input 1 by setting P0701 = 0. Only the last activated digital input serves
as a command source. "ON/OFF1" on a digital input can be combined with "ON reverse/OFF1" on another
digital input.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
See P0701.
See P0701.
See P0701.
See P0701.
Note: This digital input is provided by the optional I/O Extension Module.
See P0701.
Note: This digital input is provided by the optional I/O Extension Module.
P0712[0...2] Analog/digital input 1 0 - 99 0 T - CDS U16 2
Selects function of digital input AI1 (via analog input).
See P0701.
Note: See P0701. Signals above 4 V are active; signals below 1.6 V are inactive.
P0713[0...2] Analog/digital input 2 0 - 99 0 T - CDS U16 2
Selects function of digital input AI2 (via analog input).
See P0701.
Note: See P0701. Signals above 4 V are active; signals below 1.6 V are inactive.
P0717 Connection macro 0 - 255 0 C(1) - - U16 1
Selects a given connection macro, which is a set of parameter values for a given set of control connec-
tions. There are a number of connection macros which define basic control connection settings such as
Terminals, BOP, PID with analog setpoint etc.
Note: Please note that to guarantee correct setting of the Connection macro, the Connection macro number
should only be changed during Setup directly after a parameter reset.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
P0719[0...2] Selection of command & 0 - 57 0 T - CDS U16 4
frequency setpoint
Central switch to select control command source for inverter. Switches command and setpoint source
between freely programmable BICO parameters and fixed command/setpoint profiles. Command and
setpoint sources can be changed independently. The tens digit chooses the command source and the
units digit chooses the setpoint source.
0 Cmd = BICO parameter, Setpoint = BICO parameter
1 Cmd = BICO parameter, Setpoint = MOP setpoint
2 Cmd = BICO parameter, Setpoint = Analog setpoint
3 Cmd = BICO parameter, Setpoint = Fixed frequency
4 Cmd = BICO parameter, Setpoint = USS on RS232 (reserved)
5 Cmd = BICO parameter, Setpoint = USS/MODBUS on RS485
7 Cmd = BICO parameter, Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2
40 Cmd = USS on RS232 (reserved), Setpoint = BICO parameter
41 Cmd = USS on RS232 (reserved), Setpoint = MOP setpoint
42 Cmd = USS on RS232 (reserved), Setpoint = Analog setpoint
43 Cmd = USS on RS232 (reserved), Setpoint = Fixed frequency
44 Cmd = USS on RS232 (reserved), Setpoint = USS on RS232 (reserved)
45 Cmd = USS on RS232 (reserved), Setpoint = USS/MODBUS on RS485
47 Cmd = USS on RS232 (reserved), Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2
50 Cmd = USS/MODBUS on RS485, Setpoint = BICO parameter
51 Cmd = USS/MODBUS on RS485, Setpoint = MOP setpoint
52 Cmd = USS/MODBUS on RS485, Setpoint = Analog setpoint
53 Cmd = USS/MODBUS on RS485, Setpoint = Fixed frequency
54 Cmd = USS/MODBUS on RS485, Setpoint = USS on RS232 (reserved)
55 Cmd = USS/MODBUS on RS485, Setpoint = USS/MODBUS on RS485
57 Cmd = USS/MODBUS on RS485, Setpoint = Analog setpoint 2
Dependency: P0719 has higher priority than P0700 and P1000. If set to a value other than 0 (i.e. BICO parameter is not
the setpoint source), P0844/P0848 (first source of OFF2/OFF3) are not effective; instead, P0845/P0849
(second source of OFF2/OFF3) apply and the OFF commands are obtained via the particular source
defined. BICO connections made previously remain unchanged.
Notice: Particularly useful when e.g. changing command source temporarily from P0700 = 2. Settings in P0719
(contrary to P0700 settings) do not reset the digital inputs (P0701, P0702, ...)
r0720 Number of digital inputs - - - - - U16 3
Displays number of digital inputs.
r0722.0...12 CO/BO: Digital input - - - - - U16 2
values
Displays status of digital inputs.
00 Digital input 1 Yes No

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
11 Analog input 1 Yes No
12 Analog input 2 Yes No
Note: Segment is lit when signal is active.
The digital input 5 and 6 are provided by the optional I/O Extension Module.
P0724 Debounce time for digital 0 - 3 3 T - - U16 3
inputs
Defines debounce time (filtering time) used for digital inputs.
0 No debounce time
1 2.5 ms debounce time
P0727[0...2] Selection of 2/3-wire 0-3 0 C, T - CDS U16 2
method
Determines the control method using the terminals. This parameter allows the selection of the control
philosophy. The control philosophies exclude each other.
2/3-wire control allows to start, stop and reverse the inverter in one of the following ways:
• 2-wire control with Siemens standard control
using ON/OFF1 and REV as permanent signals
• 2-wire control with Siemens standard control
using ON/OFF1 and ON_REV/OFF1 as permanent signals

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
• 2-wire control
using ON_FWD and ON_REV as permanent signals
• 3-wire control
using STOP as permanent signal, FWD and REVP as pulses
• 3 wire control
using OFF1/HOLD and REV as permanent signal, ON as pulse signal
0 Siemens (start/dir)
1 2-wire (fwd/rev)
2 3-wire (fwd/rev)
3 3-wire (start/dir)

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
Note: Where:
• P denotes Pulse
• FWD denotes FORWARD
• REV denotes REVERSE
When any of the control functions are selected using P0727, the setting for the digital inputs (P0701 -
P0704) are redefined as follows:
Settings of P0701 P0727 = 0 (Siemens Standard Con- P0727 = 1 P0727 = 2 (3-wire P0727 = 3 (3-
- P0706 trol) (2-wire Control) wire Control)
Control)
= 1 (P0840) ON/OFF1 ON_FWD STOP ON_PULSE
= 2 (P0842) ON_REV/OFF1 ON_REV FWDP OFF1/HOLD
= 12 (P1113) REV REV REVP REV
To use the 2/3-wire control, the sources for ON/OFF1 (P0840), ON_REV/OFF1 (P0842) and REV (P1113)
corresponding to the redefined values have to be set accordingly.
The ON/OFF2 functionality is not supported in 2/3 wire modes. Do not select ON/OFF2 unless P0727 = 0.
Regarding the use of fixed frequencies see P1000 and P1001.
r0730 Number of digital outputs - - - - - U16 3
Displays number of digital outputs.
P0731[0...2] BI: Function of digital 0- 52.3 U, T - CDS U32/ 2
output 1 4294967295 Bin
Defines source of digital output 1.
Notice: An inverse logic can be realized by inverting the digital outputs in P0748.
Note: Output of fault bit 52.3 is inverted on digital output. Therefore, with P0748 = 0, the digital output is set to
low when a fault is triggered, and when there is no fault, it is set to high.
Monitor functions ==> see r0052, r0053
Motor holding brake ==> see P1215
DC-Brake ==> see P1232, P1233
P0732[0...2] BI: Function of digital 0- 52.7 U, T - CDS U32/ 2
output 2 4294967295 Bin
P0733[0...2] BI: Function of digital 0- 0 U, T - CDS U32/ 2
output 3 4294967295 Bin
Note: This digital output is provided by the optional I/O Extension Module.
P0734[0...2] BI: Function of digital 0- 0 U, T - CDS U32/ 2
output 4 4294967295 Bin
Note: This digital output is provided by the optional I/O Extension Module.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
r0747.0...1 CO/BO: State of digital - - - - - U16 3
outputs
Displays status of digital outputs (also includes inversion of digital outputs via P0748).
00 Digital output 1 energized Yes No
Dependency: Bit = 0 signal: Contacts open
Bit = 1 signal: Contacts closed
Note: The digital output 3 and 4 are provided by the optional I/O Extension Module.
P0748 Invert digital outputs - 0000 bin U, T - - U16 3
Defines high and low states of digital output for a given function.
00 Invert digital output 1 Yes No
Note: The digital output 3 and 4 are provided by the optional I/O Extension Module.
r0750 Number of analog inputs - - - - - U16 3
Displays number of analog inputs available.
r0751.0...9 CO/BO: Status word of - - - - - U16 3
analog input
Displays status of analog input.
00 Signal lost on analog input 1 Yes No
01 Signal lost on analog input 2 Yes No
08 No signal lost on analog input 1 Yes No
09 No signal lost on analog input 2 Yes No
r0752[0...1] Actual analog input [V] - - - - - Float 2
or [mA]
Displays smoothed analog input value in volts or milliamps before the scaling block.
Index: [0] Analog input 1 (AI1)
[1] Analog input 2 (AI2)
P0753[0...1] Smooth time analog 0 - 10000 3 U, T - - U16 3
input [ms]
Defines filter time (PT1 filter) for analog input.
Index: See r0752
Note: Increasing this time (smooth) reduces jitter but slows down response to the analog input.
P0753 = 0: No filtering

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
r0754[0...1] Actual analog input val- - - - - - Float 2
ue after scaling [%]
Shows smoothed value of analog input after scaling block.
Index: See r0752
Dependency: P0757 to P0760 define range (analog input scaling).
r0755[0...1] CO: Actual analog input - - - 4000H - I16 2
after scaling [4000h]
Displays analog input, scaled using ASPmin and ASPmax (ASP = analog setpoint).
Analog setpoint (ASP) from the analog scaling block can vary from minimum analog setpoint (ASPmin) to
a maximum analog setpoint (ASPmax).
The largest magnitude (value without sign) of ASPmin and ASPmax defines the scaling of 16384.
By associating r0755 with an internal value (e.g. frequency setpoint), a scaled value is calculated internal-
ly by the inverter.
The frequency value is calculated using the following equation:
r0755 [Hz] = (r0755 [hex]/4000 [hex]) * P2000 * (max (|ASP_max|, |ASP_min|)/100%)
Example: Case a:
ASPmin = 300 %, ASPmax = 100 % then 16384 represents 300 %.
This parameter will vary from 5461 to 16384.
Case b:
ASPmin = -200 %, ASPmax = 100 % then 16384 represents 200 %.
This parameter will vary from -16384 to +8192.
Index: See r0752

Note: This value is used as an input to analog BICO connectors. ASPmax represents the highest analog set-
point (this may be at 10 V). ASPmin represents the lowest analog setpoint (this may be at 0 V). See
P0757 to P0760 (analog input scaling).
P0756[0...1] Type of analog input 0-4 0 T - - U16 2
Defines type of analog input and also enables analog input monitoring.
0 Unipolar voltage input (0 to 10 V)
1 Unipolar voltage input with monitoring (0 to 10 V)
2 Unipolar current input (0 to 20 mA)
3 Unipolar current input with monitoring (0 to 20 mA)
4 Bipolar voltage input (-10 V to 10 V)

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
Index: See r0752
Dependency: The monitoring function is disabled if the analog scaling block is programmed to output negative setpoints
(see P0757 to P0760).
Notice: When monitoring is enabled and a deadband defined (P0761), a fault condition will be generated (F80) if
the analog input voltage falls below 50 % of the deadband voltage. It is not possible to select the bipolar
voltage for analog input 2.
For P0756 = 4, you need to ensure the analog input scaling, for example, if you desire to obtain an output
frequency within the range of -50 Hz to 50 Hz, you can set parameters P0757 to P0760 within their nega-
tive ranges (examples: P0757 = -10 V, P0758 = -100%).
Note: See P0757 to P0760 (analog input scaling).
In current mode, if the input exceeds 24mA, the inverter will trip F80/11 for analog input 1 and F80/12 for
analog input 2. This will result in channel switching back to voltage mode. Analog input parameter read-
ings for the channel concerned will no longer be updated until the fault (F80) has been reset. Once the
fault has been reset then the input will switch back to current mode and normal readings will resume.
P0757[0...1] Value x1 of analog input -20 - 20 0 U, T - - Float 2
scaling
P0757 - P0760 configure the input scaling. x1 is the first value of the two pairs of variants x1/y1 and x2/y2
which determine the straight line. The value x2 of analog input scaling P0759 must be greater than the
value x1 of analog input scaling P0757.
Index: See r0752
Notice: • Analog setpoints represent a [%] of the normalized frequency in P2000.
• Analog setpoints may be larger than 100 %.
• ASPmax represents highest analog setpoint (this may be at 10 V or 20 mA).
• ASPmin represents lowest analog setpoint (this may be at 0 V or 20 mA).
• Default values provide a scaling of 0 V or 0 mA = 0 %, and 10 V or 20 mA = 100 %.
P0758[0...1] Value y1 of analog input -99999.9 - 0.0 U, T - - Float 2
scaling [%] 99999.9
Sets value of y1 as described in P0757 (analog input scaling)
Index: See r0752
Dependency: Affects P2000 to P2003 (reference frequency, voltage, current or torque) depending on which setpoint is
to be generated.
P0759[0...1] Value x2 of analog input -20 - 20 10 U, T - - Float 2
scaling
Sets value of x2 as described in P0757 (analog input scaling).
Index: See r0752
Notice: The value x2 of analog input scaling P0759 must be greater than the value x1 of analog input scaling
P0757.
P0760[0...1] Value y2 of analog input -99999.9 - 100.0 U, T - - Float 2
scaling [%] 99999.9
Sets value of y2 as described in P0757 (analog input scaling).
Index: See r0752
P0761[0...1] Width of analog input 0 - 20 0 U, T - - Float 2
deadband
Defines width of deadband on analog input.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
Example: The following example produces a 2 V to 10 V, 0 Hz to 50 Hz analog input (analog input value 2 V to 10 V,
0 Hz to 50 Hz):
• P2000 = 50 Hz
• P0759 = 8.75 V P0760 = 75 %
• P0757 = 1.25 V P0758 = -75 %
• P0761 = 0.1 V
• P0756 = 0 or 1
The following example produces a 0 V to 10 V analog input (-50 Hz to +50 Hz) with center zero and a
"holding point" 0.2 V wide (0.1 V to each side of center, analog input value 0 V to 10 V, -50 Hz to +50 Hz):
• P2000 = 50 Hz
• P0759 = 8 V P0760 = 75 %
• P0757 = 2 V P0758 = -75 %
• P0761 = 0.1 V
• P0756 = 0 or 1
Index: See r0752
Notice: Deadband starts from 0 V to value of P0761, if both values of P0758 and P0760 (y coordinates of analog
input scaling) are positive or negative respectively. However, deadband is active in both directions from
point of intersection (x axis with analog input scaling curve), if sign of P0758 and P0760 are opposite.
Note: P0761[x] = 0: No deadband active.
Minimum frequency P1080 should be zero when using center zero setup.
There is no hysteresis at the end of the deadband.
P0762[0...1] Delay for loss of signal 0 - 10000 10 U, T - - U16 3
action [ms]
Defines time delay between loss of analog setpoint and appearance of fault code F80.
Index: See r0752
Note: Expert users can choose the desired reaction to F80 (default is OFF2).
r0770 Number of analog output - - - - - U16 3
Displays number of analog outputs available.
P0771[0] CI: Analog output 0- 21[0] U, T - - U32 2
4294967295
Defines function of the analog output.
Index: [0] Analog output 1 (AO1)
Setting: 21 CO: Actual frequency (scaled to P2000)
24 CO: Actual output frequency (scaled to P2000)
25 CO: Actual output voltage (scaled to P2001)
26 CO: Actual DC-link voltage (scaled to P2001)
27 CO: Actual output current (scaled to P2002)
P0773[0] Smooth time analog 0 - 1000 2 U, T - - U16 2
output [ms]
Defines smoothing time for analog output signal. This parameter enables smoothing for analog output
using a PT1 filter.
Index: See P0771
Dependency: P0773 = 0: Deactivates filter.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r0774[0] Actual analog output - - - - - Float 2
value [V] or [mA]
Shows value of analog output after filtering and scaling.
Index: See P0771
Note: The analog output is only a current output. By connecting an external resistor of 500 Ω to the terminals
(4/5) a voltage output with a range of 0 V to 10 V can be created.
P0775[0] Permit absolute value 0-1 0 T - - U16 2
Decides if the absolute value of the analog output is used. If enabled, this parameter will take the absolute
value to be outputed. If the value was originally negative then the corresponding bit in r0785 is set, other-
wise it is cleared.
Index: See P0771
P0777[0] Value x1 of analog out- -99999 - 99999 0.0 U, T - - Float 2
put scaling [%]
Defines x1 output characteristic. Scaling block is responsible for adjustment of output value defined in
P0771 (analog output connector input). x1 is the first value of the two pairs of variants x1/y1 and x2/y2
which determine the straight line. The two points P1 (x1, y1) and P2 (x2, y2) can be chosen freely.
Note: See P0771
P0778[0] Value y1 of analog out- 0 - 20 0 U, T - - Float 2
put scaling
Defines y1 of output characteristic.
Index: See P0771
P0779[0] Value x2 of analog out- -99999 - 99999 100.0 U, T - - Float 2
put scaling [%]
Defines x2 of output characteristic.
Index: See P0771
P0780[0] Value y2 of analog out- 0 - 20 20 U, T - - Float 2
put scaling
Defines y2 of output characteristic.
Index: See P0771
P0781[0] Width of analog output 0 - 20 0 U, T - - Float 2
deadband
Sets width of dead-band for analog output.
Index: See P0771
r0785.0 CO/BO: Status word of - - - - - U16 2
analog output
Displays status of analog output. Bit 0 indicates that the value of analog output 1 is negative.
00 Analog output 1 negative Yes No

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P0802 Transfer data from 0-2 0 C(30) - - U16 3
EEPROM
Transfers values from the inverter to external device when P0802 ≠ 0. P0010 must be set to 30 for this to
be possible.
0 Disabled
2 Start data transfer to the SD card
Note: Parameter is automatically reset to 0 (default) after transfer.
P0010 will be reset to 0 on successful completion.
Ensure that enough space exists on the SD card before transferring data (8 KB).
P0803 Transfer data to 0-3 0 C(30) - - U16 3
EEPROM
0 Disabled
2 Start data transfer from the SD card
3 Start data transfer from the SD card (except the motor data)
Transfers parameter values from the SD clone file to the inverter when P0803 ≠ 0. P0010 must be set to
30 to activate this parameter. See P0802 for parameter values.
Note: Parameter is automatically reset to 0 (default) after transfer.
P0010 will be reset to 0 on successful completion.
P0804 Select Clone file 0 - 99 0 C(30) - - U16 3
Select clone file to upload/download.
if P0804 = 0, then the file name is clone00.bin
if P0804 = 1, then the file name is clone01.bin
etc.
P0806 BI: Inhibit panel access 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 3
Binector input to lock control panel access through external client.
r0807.0 BO: Displays client ac- - - - - - U16 3
cess
Binector output to display whether command and setpoint source is connected to an external client.
00 Master control active Yes No
P0809[0...2] Copy command data set 0 - 2 [0] 0 [1] 1 T - - U16 2
(CDS) [2] 0
Calls 'Copy command data set (CDS)' function. The list of all command data sets (CDS) parameters is
shown in "Index" at the end of the manual.
Example: Copying of all values from CDS0 to CDS2 can be accomplished by the following procedure:
P0809[0] = 0 Copy from CDS0
P0809[1] = 2 Copy to CDS2
P0809[2] = 1 Start copy
Index: [0] Copy from CDS
[1] Copy to CDS
[2] Start copy
Note: Start value in index 2 is automatically reset to '0' after execution of function.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P0810 BI: command data set 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 2
bit 0 (Hand/Auto)
Selects command source from which to read Bit 0 for selecting a command data set (CDS). The actual
selected CDS is displayed in r0054.15 (CDS bit 0) and r0055.15 (CDS bit 1). The actual active CDS is
displayed in r0050.
Setting: 722.0 Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
722.1 Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
Note: P0811 is also relevant for command data set (CDS) selection.
P0811 BI: command data set 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 2
bit 1
Selects command source from which to read Bit 1 for selecting a command data set (see P0810).
Setting: See P0810.
Note: P0810 is also relevant for command data set (CDS) selection.
P0819[0...2] Copy inverter data set 0-2 [0] 0 [1] 1 T - - U16 2
(DDS) [2] 0
Calls 'Copy inverter data set (DDS)' function. The list of all inverter data set (DDS) parameters is shown in
"Index" at the end of the manual.
Example: Copying of all values from DDS0 to DDS2 can be accomplished by the following procedure:
P0819[0] = 0 Copy from DDS0
P0819[1] = 2 Copy to DDS2
P0819[2] = 1 Start copy
Index: [0] Copy from DDS
[1] Copy to DDS
[2] Start copy
Note: See P0809
P0820 BI: inverter data set bit 0 0 - 4294967295 0 T - - U32 3
Selects command source from which to read Bit 0 for selecting an inverter data set (DDS). The actual
selected inverter data set (DDS) is displayed in parameter r0051[0]. The actual active inverter data set
(DDS) is displayed in parameter r0051[1].
Setting: See P0810
Note: P0821 is also relevant for inverter data set (DDS) selection.
P0821 BI: inverter data set bit 1 0 - 4294967295 0 T - - U32 3
Selects command source from which Bit 1 for selecting an inverter data set is to be read in (see P0820).
Setting: See P0810
Note: P0820 is also relevant for inverter data set (DDS) selection.
P0840[0...2] BI: ON/OFF1 0 - 4294967295 19.0 T - CDS U32 3
Allows ON/OFF1 command source to be selected using BICO. The digits in front of the colon show the
parameter number of the command source; the digits following the colon denote the bit setting for that
parameter.
Setting: See P0810
Dependency: For digital inputs as command source BICO requires P0700 set to 2 (enable BICO). The default setting
(ON right) is digital input 1 (722.0). Alternative source possible only when function of digital input 1 is
changed (via P0701) before changing value of P0840.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P0842[0...2] BI: ON reverse/OFF1 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 3
Allows ON/OFF1 reverse command source to be selected using BICO. In general a positive frequency
setpoint is run up counterclockwise (negative frequency).
Setting: See P0810
P0843[0...2] BI: ON/OFF2 0 - 4294967295 1 T - CDS U32/Bi 3
n
Allows ON/OFF2 command source to be selected using BICO. The default setting 1.0 will disable this
parameter.
Setting: See P0810
Dependency: For digital inputs as command source BICO requires P0700 set to 2 (enable BICO). If one of the digital
inputs is selected for ON/OFF2, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active. OFF2 means
immediate pulse-disabling; the motor is coasting. OFF2 is low-active, i.e. :0 = Pulse disabling. 1 = Pulses
enabled. (As long as there are no other OFF conditions active).
Note: The ON/OFF2 functionality is not supported in 2/3 wire modes. Do not select ON/OFF2 unless P0727 = 0.
P0844[0...2] BI: 1. OFF2 0 - 4294967295 19.1 T - CDS U32 3
Defines first source of OFF2 when P0719 = 0 (BICO).
Setting: See P0810
Dependency: If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF2, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active.
Note: OFF2 means immediate pulse-disabling; the motor is coasting. OFF2 is low-active, i.e.:
0 = Pulse disabling.
1 = Operating condition.
P0845[0...2] BI: 2. OFF2 0 - 4294967295 1 T - CDS U32 3
Defines second source of OFF2.
Setting: See P0810
Dependency: In contrast to P0844 (first source of OFF2), this parameter is always active, independent of P0719 (selec-
tion of command and frequency setpoint). See P0844.
Note: See P0844
P0848[0...2] BI: 1. OFF3 0 - 4294967295 1 T - CDS U32 3
Defines first source of OFF3 when P0719 = 0 (BICO).
Setting: See P0810
Dependency: If one of the digital inputs is selected for OFF3, the inverter will not run unless the digital input is active.
Note: OFF3 means quick ramp-down to 0.
OFF3 is low-active, i.e.
0 = Quick ramp-down.
1 = Operating condition.
P0849[0...2] BI: 2. OFF3 0 - 4294967295 1 T - CDS U32 3
Defines second source of OFF3.
Setting: See P0810
Dependency: In contrast to P0848 (first source of OFF3), this parameter is always active, independent of P0719 (selec-
tion of command and frequency setpoint). See P0848.
Note: See P0848

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P0852[0...2] BI: Pulse enable 0 - 4294967295 1 T - CDS U32 3
Defines source of pulse enable/disable signal.
Setting: See P0810
Dependency: Active only when P0719 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source).
P0881[0...2] BI: Quick stop source 1 0 - 4294967295 1 T - CDS U32 3
Allows quick stop source 1 command to be selected using BICO. The signal is expected to be active low
(default setting P0886 = 2).
Setting: See P0810
P0882[0...2] BI: Quick stop source 2 0 - 4294967295 1 T - CDS U32 3
Allows quick stop source 2 command to be selected using BICO. The signal is expected to be active low
(default setting P0886 = 2).
Setting: See P0810
P0883[0...2] BI: Quick stop override 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 3
Allows quick stop override command source to be selected using BICO. The signal is expected to be ac-
tive high.
Setting: See P0810
P0886[0...2] Quick stop input type 0-4 2 T - CDS U16 3
Control Word for selecting the quick stop input type.
0 Quick stop not selected
1 Quick stop input active high
2 Quick stop input active low
3 Quick stop input positive edge triggered
4 Quick stop input negative edge triggered
P0927 Parameter changeable 0 - 31 31 U, T - - U16 2
via specified interfaces
Specifies the interfaces which can be used to change parameters. This parameter allows the user to easily
protect the inverter from unauthorized modification of parameters.
Annotation: P0927 is not password protected.
00 Not used Yes No
01 BOP (including built-in BOP and external BOP) Yes No
02 USS on RS232 Yes No
03 USS on RS485 Yes No
04 Script terminal on RS485 Yes No
Example: Default: All bits are set.
The default setting allows parameters to be changed via any interface.
r0944 Total number of mes- - - - - - U16 3
sages
Displays the total number of messages available.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r0947[0...63] CO: Last fault code - - - - - U16 2
Displays fault history.
Index: [0] Recent fault trip --, fault 1

... ...
[7] Recent fault trip --, fault 8
[8] Recent fault trip -1, fault 1
... ...
... ...
... ...
Notice: It is possible that this parameter is empty but a fault is still indicated by the inverter. The reason for this is
most likely due to a SAFE condition still existing in the system. In this situation the fault is cleared from this
parameter and it makes no sense to go back to a READY state. First remove the reason for the SAFE
condition and then the inverter will be able to change to a READY state (SAFE condition example is "safe-
ty function is activated").
Note: The function "inverter status at fault" (Page 323) serves as a snapshot record in time of the relative pa-
rameters being monitored at the point of a fault occurring. Some recorded parameters are filtered values.
Therefore if a hardware trip occurs, (r0949 = 0), some filtered values may not appear to reflect those val-
ues which caused the trip.
Example: If a hardware overvoltage trip occurs, (r0947 = 2 and r0949 = 0), the value of the filtered DC link voltage in
r0956 may appear to be under the trip limit. In this case, the filtered DC link value had not had enough time
to rise to the trip level; however, the actual limit had been exceeded and hence the hardware had tripped
to protect itself.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r0948[0...63] Fault time - - - - - U32 3
Time stamp to indicate when a fault has occurred.
P0969 (system run time counter) is the possible source of the time stamp.
Index: [0] Recent fault trip --, fault time 1
... ...
[7] Recent fault trip --, fault time 8
[8] Recent fault trip -1, fault time 1
... ...
... ...
... ...
r0949[0...63] CO: Fault value - - - - - U32 3
Displays inverter fault values. It is for service purposes and indicates the type of fault reported.
The values are not documented. They are listed in the code where faults are reported.
Index: [0] Recent fault trip --, fault value 1
... ...
[7] Recent fault trip --, fault value 8
[8] Recent fault trip -1, fault value 1
... ...
... ...
... ...
P0952 Total number of trips 0 - 65535 0 T - - U16 3
Displays number of trips stored in r0947 (last fault code).
Dependency: Setting 0 resets fault history (changing to 0 also resets r0948 - fault time).
Note: If the source of a non-momentary fault remains active before a factory reset, the inverter removes the
source first and then places the fault into the fault history during a factory reset. That means P0952 still
has a non-zero value after the factory reset. If you want to clear the fault history, you need to perform a
second factory reset or set P0952 = 0.
r0954[0...2] CO: Freq. setpoint after - - - - - Float 3
RFG at fault [Hz]
Displays the setpoint after RFG when the first instantaneous fault occurs (see r1170).
Index: [0] Recent trip - Fault information
[1] Recent trip - 1 Fault information
Note: Only one set of fault information is stored per block of instantaneous faults. r0954[0] corresponds to
r0947[0...7], r0954[1] corresponds to r0947[8...15] and r0954[2] corresponds to r0947[16...23].

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r0955[0...2] CO/BO: Status word 2 at - - - - - U16 3
fault
Displays status word 2 when the first instantaneous fault occurs (see r0053).
r0956[0...2] CO: DC-link voltage at - - - - - Float 3
fault [V]
Displays the DC link voltage when the first instantaneous fault occurs (see r0026).
r0957[0...2] CO: Act. output current - - - - - Float 3
at fault [A]
Displays the output current RMS when the first instantaneous fault occurs (see r0027).
r0958[0...2] CO: Act. output voltage - - - - - Float 3
at fault [V]
Displays the output voltage when the first instantaneous fault occurs (see r0025).
r0964[0...6] Firmware version data - - - - - U16 3
Firmware version data.
Index: [0] Company (Siemens = 42)
[1] Product type (V20 = 8001)
[2] Firmware version
[3] Firmware date (year)
[4] Firmware date (day/month)
[5] Number of inverter objects
[6] Firmware version
r0967 Control word 1 - - - - - U16 3
Displays control word 1. See r0054 for the bit field description.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r0968 Status word 1 - - - - - U16 3
Displays active status word of inverter (in binary) and can be used to diagnose which commands are ac-
tive. See r0052 for the bit field description.
P0969 Resettable system run 0 - 4294967295 0 T - - U32 3
time counter
Resettable system run time counter.
P0970 Factory reset 0 - 21 0 C(30) - - U16 1
P0970 = 1 resets all parameters (not user defaults) to their default values.
P0970 = 21 resets all parameters and all user defaults to Factory Reset state.
When resetting all parameters by setting P0970 = 1 or P0970 = 21, please note the following aspects:
• When you reset parameters through the BOP, parameters in both RAM and EEPROM are reset.
• When you select USS/MODBUS communication on RS485 and the volatile storage mode (P0014[0] =
0), only parameters in RAM are reset.
• When you select USS/MODBUS communication on RS485 and the non-volatile storage mode
(P0014[0] =1), parameters in both RAM and EEPROM are reset.
0 Disabled
1 Parameter reset
21 User Default Parameter Reset
Dependency: First set P0010 = 30 (factory settings).
Stop inverter (i.e. disable all pulses) before you can reset parameters to default values.
Note: The following parameters retain their values after a factory reset:
• r0039 CO: Energy consumption meter [kWh]
• P0014 Store mode
• P0100 Europe/North America
• P0205 Inverter application
• P2010 USS/MODBUS baudrate
• P2011 USS address
• P2021 MODBUS address
• P2023 RS485 protocol selection
• P8458 Clone control
When transferring P0970, the inverter uses its processor to carry out internal calculations. Communica-
tions are interrupted for the time that it takes to make these calculations.
P0971 Transfer data from RAM 0 - 21 0 U, T - - U16 3
to EEPROM
Transfers values from RAM to EEPROM when set to 1.
Transfers new user default values from RAM to EEPROM when set to 21.
0 Disabled
1 Start transfer
21 Start User Defaults transfer
Note: All values in RAM are transferred to EEPROM.
Parameter is automatically reset to 0 (default) after successful transfer.
The storage from RAM to EEPROM is accomplished via P0971. The communications are reset, if the
transfer was successful. During the reset process communications will be interrupted.
• BOP displays 88888
After completion of the transfer process, the communication between the inverter and external peripherals
(BOP, USS or Modbus Master) is automatically re-established.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r0980[0...99] List of available parame- 0 - 65535 981 - - - U16 4
ter numbers
Contains 100 parameter numbers index 0 - 99.
Index: [0] Parameter 1
[1] Parameter 2
... ...
[98] Parameter 99
[99] Next parameter list
Note: The parameter list array has 2 elements to reduce memory consumption. On each access to an element
index 0 - 99, the individual result is determined dynamically by the 'BeforeAccess' function. The last ele-
ment contains the number of the following parameter array, 0 indicates end of list.
ter numbers
Index: See r0980
Note: See r0980
ter numbers
Index: See r0980
Note: See r0980
ter numbers
Index: See r0980
Note: See r0980
ter numbers
Index: See r0980
Note: See r0980
ter numbers
Index: See r0980
Note: See r0980
ter numbers
Index: See r0980
Note: See r0980
ter numbers
Index: See r0980
Note: See r0980
ter numbers
Index: See r0980
Note: See r0980

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

ter numbers
Index: See r0980
Note: See r0980
P1000[0...2] Selection of frequency 0 - 77 1 C, T - CDS U16 1
setpoint
Selects frequency setpoint source. The main setpoint is given by the least significant digit (right-hand posi-
tion) and the additional setpoint is given by the most significant digit (left-hand position). Single digits de-
note main setpoints that have no additional setpoint.
0 No main setpoint
1 MOP setpoint
2 Analog setpoint
3 Fixed frequency
5 USS/MODBUS on RS485
7 Analog setpoint 2
10 No main setpoint + MOP setpoint
11 MOP setpoint + MOP setpoint
12 Analog setpoint + MOP setpoint
13 Fixed frequency + MOP setpoint
15 USS/MODBUS on RS485 + MOP setpoint
17 Analog setpoint 2 + MOP setpoint
20 No main setpoint + Analog setpoint
21 MOP setpoint + Analog setpoint
22 Analog setpoint + Analog setpoint
23 Fixed frequency + Analog setpoint
25 USS/MODBUS on RS485 + Analog setpoint
27 Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint
30 No main setpoint + Fixed frequency
31 MOP setpoint + Fixed frequency
32 Analog setpoint + Fixed frequency

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

33 Fixed frequency + Fixed frequency
35 USS/MODBUS on RS485 + Fixed frequency
37 Analog setpoint 2 + Fixed frequency
50 No main setpoint + USS/MODBUS on RS485
51 MOP setpoint + USS/MODBUS on RS485
52 Analog setpoint + USS/MODBUS on RS485
53 Fixed frequency + USS/MODBUS on RS485
55 USS/MODBUS on RS485 + USS/MODBUS on RS485
57 Analog setpoint 2 + USS/MODBUS on RS485
70 No main setpoint + Analog setpoint 2
71 MOP setpoint + Analog setpoint 2
72 Analog setpoint + Analog setpoint 2
73 Fixed frequency + Analog setpoint 2
75 USS/MODBUS on RS485 + Analog setpoint 2
77 Analog setpoint 2 + Analog setpoint 2
Dependency: Related parameter: P1074 (BI: Disable additional setpoint)
Caution: Changing this parameter sets (to default) all settings on item selected. These are the following parameters:
P1070, P1071, P1075, P1076
If P1000 = 1 or 1X, and P1032 (inhibit reverse direction of MOP) = 1, then reverse motor direction will be
inhibited.
Note: RS485 also supports MODBUS protocol as well as USS. All USS options on RS485 are also applicable to
MODBUS. To alter the setpoint using the BOP when the command source P0700 is not set to 1, you must
check that P1035 is set to r0019 bit 13 and P1036 is set to r0019 bit 14.
P1001[0...2] Fixed frequency 1 [Hz] -550.00 - 550.00 10.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
Defines fixed frequency setpoint 1. There are 2 types of fixed frequencies:
• Direct selection (P1016 = 1):
– In this mode of operation 1 Fixed Frequency selector (P1020 to P1023) selects 1 fixed frequency.
– If several inputs are active together, the selected frequencies are summed. E.g.: FF1 + FF2 + FF3
+ FF4.
• Binary coded selection (P1016 = 2):
– Up to 16 different fixed frequency values can be selected using this method.
See P1020 to P1023 for assigning desired digital inputs to the fixed speed bits.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

Dependency: Select fixed frequency operation (using P1000).
Inverter requires ON command to start in the case of direct selection. Therefore r1025 must be connected
to P0840 to start.
Note: Fixed frequencies can be selected using the digital inputs.
Defines fixed frequency setpoint 2.
Note: See P1001
Note: See P1001
Note: See P1001
Note: See P1001
Note: See P1001
Note: See P1001
Note: See P1001
Note: See P1001

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

Note: See P1001
Note: See P1001
Note: See P1001
Note: See P1001
Note: See P1001
Note: See P1001
P1016[0...2] Fixed frequency mode 1-2 1 T - DDS U16 2
Fixed frequencies can be selected in two different modes. P1016 defines the mode.
1 Direct selection
2 Binary selection
Note: See P1001 for description of how to use fixed frequencies.
P1020[0...2] BI: Fixed frequency 0 - 4294967295 722.3 T - CDS U32 3
selection Bit 0
Defines origin of fixed frequency selection.
Example: = 722.0 Digital input 1 (requires P0701 to be set to 99, BICO)
= 722.1 Digital input 2 (requires P0702 to be set to 99, BICO)
Dependency: Accessible only if P0701 - P070x = 99 (function of digital inputs = BICO)
selection Bit 1
See P1020
selection Bit 2
See P1020

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

selection Bit 3
See P1020
r1024 CO: Actual fixed fre- - - - - - Float 3
quency [Hz]
Displays sum total of selected fixed frequencies.
r1025.0 BO: Fixed frequency - - - - - U16 3
status
Displays the status of fixed frequencies.
00 Status of FF Yes No
P1031[0...2] MOP mode 0-3 1 U, T - DDS U16 2
MOP mode specification.
00 Setpoint store active Yes No
01 No On-state for MOP necessary Yes No
Note: Defines the operation mode of the motorized potentiometer. See P1040.
P1032 Inhibit reverse direction 0-1 1 T - - U16 2
of MOP
Inhibits reverse setpoint selection of the MOP.
0 Reverse direction is allowed
1 Reverse direction inhibited
Note: It is possible to change motor direction using the motor potentiometer setpoint (increase/decrease fre-
quency).
Setting 0 enables a change of motor direction using the motor potentiometer setpoint (increase/decrease
frequency).
If P1032 = 1 and P1000 = 1 or 1X, then reverse motor direction will be inhibited.
P1035[0...2] BI: Enable MOP (UP- 0 - 4294967295 19.13 T - CDS U32 3
command)
Defines source for motor potentiometer setpoint increase frequency.
Notice: If this command is enabled by short pulses of less than 1 second, the frequency is changed in steps of 0.1
Hz. When the signal is enabled longer than 1 second the ramp generator accelerates with the rate of
P1047.
P1036[0...2] BI: Enable MOP 0 - 4294967295 19.14 T - CDS U32 3
(DOWN-command)
Defines source for motor potentiometer setpoint decrease frequency.
Setting: See P1035
Notice: If this command is enabled by short pulses of less than 1 second, the frequency is changed in steps of 0.1
Hz. When the signal is enabled longer than 1 second the ramp generator decelerates with the rate of
P1048.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P1040[0...2] Setpoint of the MOP [Hz] -550.00 - 550.00 5.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
Determines setpoint for motor potentiometer control (P1000 = 1).
Dependency: Motor potentiometer (P1040) must be chosen as main setpoint or additional setpoint (using P1000).
Note: If motor potentiometer setpoint is selected either as main setpoint or additional setpoint, the reverse direc-
tion will be inhibited by default of P1032 (inhibit reverse direction of MOP). To re-enable reverse direction,
set P1032 = 0.
A short press of the 'up' or 'down' keys (e.g.: operator panel) will change the frequency setpoint in steps of
0.1 Hz. A longer press will cause an accelerated frequency setpoint change.
The start value gets active (for the MOP output) only at the start of the MOP. P1031 influences the start
value behavior as follows:
• P1031 = 0: Last MOP setpoint not saved in P1040
MOP UP/DOWN requires an ON command to become active.

• P1031 = 1: Last MOP setpoint saved in P1040 on every OFF
MOP UP/DOWN requires an ON command to become active (default).

• P1031 = 2: Last MOP setpoint not saved in P1040
MOP UP/DOWN active without additional ON command.

• P1031 = 3: Last MOP setpoint saved in P1040 on powering‐up
MOP UP/DOWN active without additional ON command.
P1041[0...2] BI: MOP select setpoint 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 3
automatically/manually
Sets the signal source to change over from manual to automatic mode. If using the motorized potentiome-
ter in the manual mode the setpoint is changed using two signals for up and down e.g. P1035 and P1036.
If using the automatic mode the setpoint must be interconnected via the connector input (P1042).
0: manually
1: automatically
Notice: Refer to: P1035, P1036, P1042
P1042[0...2] CI: MOP auto setpoint 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 3
Sets the signal source for the setpoint of the motorized potentiometer if automatic mode P1041 is select-
ed.
Notice: Refer to: P1041
P1043[0...2] BI: MOP accept 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 3
rampgenerator setpoint
Sets the signal source for the setting command to accept the setting value for the motorized potentiome-
ter. The value becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command.
P1044[0...2] CI: MOP rampgenerator 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 3
setpoint
Sets the signal source for the setpoint value for the MOP. The value becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of
the setting command.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r1045 CO: MOP input frequen- - - - - - Float 3
cy of the RFG [Hz]
Displays the motorized potentiometer setpoint before it passed the MOP RFG.
P1047[0...2] MOP ramp-up time of 0.00 - 1000.00 10.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
the RFG [s]
Sets the ramp-up time for the internal MOP ramp-function generator. The setpoint is changed from zero
up to limit defined in P1082 within this time.
Notice: Refer to: P1048, P1082
P1048[0...2] MOP ramp-down time of 0.00 - 1000.0 10.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
the RFG [s]
Sets the ramp-down time for the internal MOP ramp-function generator. The setpoint is changed from limit
defined in P1082 down to zero within this time.
r1050 CO: Actual output freq. - - - - - Float 2
of the MOP [Hz]
Displays output frequency of motor potentiometer setpoint.
P1055[0...2] BI: Enable JOG right 0 - 4294967295 19.8 T - CDS U32 3
Defines source of JOG right when P0719 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source).
P1056[0...2] BI: Enable JOG left 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 3
Defines source of JOG left when P0719 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source).
P1057 JOG enable 0-1 1 T - - U16 3
While JOG enable is '0' Jogging (P1056 and P1055) is disabled. When '1' Jogging is enabled.
P1058[0...2] JOG frequency [Hz] 0.00 - 550.00 5.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
Jogging increases the motor speed by small amounts. The JOG mode allows the operator to perform a
specific number of revolutions and position the rotor manually. In JOG mode, the RUN button on the op-
erator panel for jogging uses a non-latching switch on one of the digital inputs to control the motor speed.
While jogging, P1058 determines the frequency at which the inverter will run. The motor speed is in-
creased as long as 'JOG left' or 'JOG right' are selected and until the left or right JOG frequency is
reached.
Dependency: P1060 and P1061 set up and down ramp times respectively for jogging. Rounding times (P1130 - P1133),
rounding type (P1134) and P2167 will also have influence on the JOG ramp.
P1059[0...2] JOG frequency left [Hz] 0.00 - 550.00 5.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
While JOG left is selected, this parameter determines the frequency at which the inverter will run.
Dependency: P1060 and P1061 set up and down ramp times respectively for jogging.
P1060[0...2] JOG ramp-up time [s] 0.00 - 650.00 10.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
Sets jog ramp-up time. This is the time used while jogging is active.
Dependency: See also P3350, P3353.
Notice: Ramp times will be used as follows:
• P1060/P1061 : JOG mode is active
• P1120/P1121 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) is active
• P1060/P1061 : Normal mode (ON/OFF) and P1124 is active
The rounding of P1130 - P1133 also applies to the JOG ramping.
Note: If the SuperTorque function is enabled, the inverter will initially ramp using the value in P3353.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P1061[0...2] JOG ramp-down time [s] 0.00 - 650.00 10.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
Sets ramp-down time. This is the time used while jogging is active.
Dependency: See also P3350, P3353.
Note: See P1060
P1070[0...2] CI: Main setpoint 0 - 4294967295 1050[0] T - CDS U32 3
Defines source of main setpoint.
Setting: 755 Analog input 1 setpoint
1024 Fixed frequency setpoint
1050 Motor potentiometer (MOP) setpoint
P1071[0...2] CI: Main setpoint scaling 0 - 4294967295 1 T 4000H CDS U32 3
Defines source of the main setpoint scaling.
Setting: See P1070
P1074[0...2] BI: Disable additional 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - CDS U32 3
setpoint
Disables additional setpoint.
Setting: See P1070
P1075[0...2] CI: Additional setpoint 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 3
Defines source of the additional setpoint (to be added to main setpoint).
Setting: See P1070
P1076[0...2] CI: Additional setpoint 0 - 4294967295 [0] 1 T 4000H CDS U32 3
scaling [1] 0
[2] 1
Defines source of scaling for additional setpoint (to be added to main setpoint).
Setting: 1 Scaling of 1.0 (100%)
755 Analog input 1 setpoint
1024 Fixed frequency setpoint
1050 MOP setpoint
r1078 CO: Total frequency - - - - - Float 3
setpoint [Hz]
Displays sum of main and additional setpoints.
r1079 CO: Selected frequency - - - - - Float 3
setpoint [Hz]
Displays selected frequency setpoint. Following frequency setpoints are displayed:
• r1078 Total frequency setpoint
• P1058 JOG frequency right
• P1059 JOG frequency left
Dependency: P1055 (BI: Enable JOG right) or P1056 (BI: Enable JOG left) define command source of JOG right or JOG
left respectively.
Note: P1055 = 0 and P1056 = 0 ==> Total frequency setpoint is selected.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P1080[0...2] Minimum frequency [Hz] 0.00 - 550.00 0.00 C, U, T - DDS Float 1
Sets minimum motor frequency at which motor will run irrespective of frequency setpoint. The minimum
frequency P1080 represents a masking frequency of 0 Hz for all frequency target value sources e.g. ana-
log input, MOP, FF, USS with the exception of the JOG target value source (analogous to P1091). Thus
the frequency band +/-P1080 is run through in optimum time by means of the acceleration/deceleration
ramps. Dwelling in the frequency band is not possible. Furthermore, an overshoot of the actual frequency
f_act upper minimum frequency P1080 is output by the signal function |f_act| > f_min.
Note: Value set here is valid both for clockwise and for counterclockwise rotation.
Under certain conditions (e.g. ramping, current limiting), motor can run below minimum frequency.
P1082[0...2] Maximum frequency [Hz] 0.00 - 550.00 50.00 C, T - DDS Float 1
Sets maximum motor frequency at which motor will run irrespective of the frequency setpoint. The value
set here is valid for both clockwise and counterclockwise rotation.
Furthermore, the monitoring function |f_act| >= P1082 (r0052 bit 10, see example below) is affected by
this parameter.
Example:
Dependency: The maximum value of P1082 also depends on the nominal frequency: Max. P1082 = min (15*P0310,
550.0 Hz). As consequence P1082 can be affected if P0310 is changed to a smaller value. The maximum
frequency and the pulse frequency depending on each other. The maximum frequency affects the pulse
frequency according to the following table.
P1800
2 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 - 16 kHz
fmax P1082 0 - 133.3 Hz 0 - 266.6 Hz 0 - 400 Hz 0 - 550.0 Hz
Example:
If P1082 is set to 350 Hz a pulse frequency from at least 6 kHz is necessary. If P1800 is smaller than 6
kHz the parameter is changed P1800 = 6 kHz.
The maximum output frequency of inverter can be exceeded if one of the following is active:

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

Note: When using the setpoint source
• Analog Input
• USS
the setpoint frequency (in Hz) is cyclically calculated using
• a percentage value(e.g. for the analog input r0754)
• a hexadecimal value (e.g. for the USS r2018[1])
• and the reference frequency P2000.
If for example P1082 = 80 Hz, P2000 = 50 Hz and the analog input is parameterized with P0757 = 0 V,
P0758 = 0 %, P0759 = 10 V, P0760 = 100 %, a setpoint frequency of 50 Hz will be applied at 10 V of the
analog input. When Quick Commissioning is carried out P2000 is changed as follows: P2000 = P1082.
r1084 Resultant maximum - - - - - Float 3
frequency [Hz]
Displays resultant maximum frequency.
P1091[0...2] Skip frequency [Hz] 0.00 - 550.00 0.00 U, T - DDS Float 3
Defines skip frequency 1 which avoids effects of mechanical resonance and suppresses frequencies with-
in +/-P1101 (skip frequency bandwidth).
Notice: Stationary operation is not possible within the suppressed frequency range; the range is merely passed
through (on the ramp). For example, if P1091 = 10 Hz and P1101 = 2 Hz, it is not possible to operate
continuously between 10 Hz +/- 2 Hz (i.e. between 8 and 12 Hz).
Note: The function is disabled if P1091 = 0.
P1092[0...2] Skip frequency 2 [Hz] 0.00 - 550.00 0.00 U, T - DDS Float 3
Note: See P1091
Note: See P1091
Note: See P1091
P1101[0...2] Skip frequency band- 0.00 - 10.00 2.00 U, T - DDS Float 3
width [Hz]
Delivers frequency bandwidth to be applied to skip frequencies.
Note: See P1091
P1110[0...2] BI: Inhibit negative fre- 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 3
quency setpoint
This parameter suppresses negative setpoints. Therefore, modification of the motor direction is inhibited
to the set-point channel. If a minimum frequency (P1080) and a negative setpoint are given, the motor is
accelerated by a positive value in relationship to the minimum frequency.
Setting: 0 Disabled
1 Enabled

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P1113[0...2] BI: Reverse 0 - 4294967295 19.11 T - CDS U32 3
Defines source of reverse command used when P0719 = 0 (Auto selection of command/setpoint source).
r1114 CO: Freq. setpoint after - - - - - Float 3
direction control [Hz]
Displays setpoint frequency after change of direction.
r1119 CO: Freq. setpoint be- - - - - - Float 3
fore RFG [Hz]
Displays frequency setpoint at the input to the ramp function generator after modification by other func-
tions, e.g.:
• P1110 BI: Inhibit neg. freq. setpoint,
• P1091 - P1094 skip frequencies,
• P1080 min. frequency,
• P1082 max. frequency,
This value is available filtered (r0020) and unfiltered (r1119).
P1120[0...2] Ramp-up time [s] 0.00 - 650.00 10.00 C, U, T - DDS Float 1
Time taken for motor to accelerate from standstill up to maximum motor frequency (P1082) when no
rounding is used. Setting the ramp-up time too short can cause the inverter to trip (overcurrent F1).
Dependency: Rounding times (P1130 - P1133), rounding type (P1134), and ramp-up time scaling factor (P1138) will
also have influence on the ramp.
See also P3350, P3353.
Notice: Ramp times will be used as follows:
Set ramp-up time = ramp-up time scaling factor (P1138) x ramp-up time (P1120).
Note: If an external frequency setpoint with set ramp rates is used (e.g. from a PLC), the best way to achieve
optimum inverter performance is to set ramp times in P1120 and P1121 slightly shorter than those of the
PLC. Changes to P1120 will be immediately effective. If the SuperTorque function is enabled, the inverter
will initially ramp using the value in P3353.
P1121[0...2] Ramp-down time [s] 0.00 - 650.00 10.00 C, U, T - DDS Float 1
Time taken for motor to decelerate from maximum motor frequency (P1082) down to standstill when no
rounding is used.
Dependency: Ramp-down time scaling factor (P1139) will also have influence on the ramp.
See also P3350, P3353.
Notice: Setting the ramp-down time too short can cause the inverter to trip (overcurrent F1/overvoltage F2).
Ramp times will be used as follows:
Set ramp-down time = ramp-down time scaling factor (P1139) x ramp-down time (P1121).
Note: Changes to P1121 will be immediately effective.
See P1120

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P1124[0...2] BI: Enable JOG ramp 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 3
times
Defines source for switching between jog ramp times (P1060, P1061) and normal ramp times (P1120,
P1121) as applied to the RFG. This parameter is valid for normal mode (ON/OFF) only.
Dependency: See also P1175.
Notice: P1124 does not have any impact when JOG mode is selected. In this case, jog ramp times (P1060,
P1061) will be used all the time. If the Dual Ramp function is selected using P1175, ramp times will switch
between normal (P1120, P1121) and JOG (P1060, P1061) ramp times, depending on the settings of
P2150, P2157 and P2159. Therefore, it is not recommended that JOG ramp is selected at the same time
as Dual Ramp.
See P1120.
P1130[0...2] Ramp-up initial rounding 0.00 - 40.00 0.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
time [s]
Defines rounding time in seconds at start of ramp-up.
Notice: Rounding times are recommended, since they prevent an abrupt response, thus avoiding detrimental
effects on the mechanics.
Rounding times are not recommended when analog inputs are used, since they would result in over-
shoot/undershoot in the inverter response.
Note: If short or zero ramp times (P1120, P1121 < P1130, P1131, P1132, P1133) are set, the total ramp up time
(t_up) or ramp down time (t_down) will not depend on P1130.
P1131[0...2] Ramp-up final rounding 0.00 - 40.00 0.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
time [s]
Defines rounding time at end of ramp-up.
Notice: See P1130
P1132[0...2] Ramp-down initial round- 0.00 - 40.00 0.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
ing time [s]
Defines rounding time at start of ramp-down.
Notice: See P1130
P1133[0...2] Ramp-down final round- 0.00 - 40.00 0.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
ing time [s]
Defines rounding time at end of ramp-down.
Notice: See P1130
P1134[0...2] Rounding type 0-1 0 U, T - DDS U16 2
Defines the smoothing which is active by setpoint modifications during acceleration or deceleration (e.g.
new setpoint, OFF1, OFF3, REV). This smoothing is applied, if the motor is ramped-up or ramped-down
and
• P1134 = 0,
• P1132 > 0, P1133 > 0 and
• the setpoint is not yet reached.
0 Continuous smoothing
1 Discontinuous smoothing
Dependency: Effect only when P1130 (Ramp-up initial rounding time) or P1131 (Ramp-up final rounding time) or P1132
(Ramp-down initial rounding time) or P1133 (Ramp-down final rounding time) > 0 s.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P1135[0...2] OFF3 ramp-down time 0.00 - 650.00 5.00 C, U, T - DDS Float 2
[s]
Defines ramp-down time from maximum frequency to standstill for OFF3 command. Settings in P1130 and
P1134 will have no effect on OFF3 ramp-down characteristic. An initial ramp-down rounding time of ap-
proximately 10% of P1135 is however included. For the total OFF3 ramp-down time: t_down,OFF3 =
f(P1134) = 1.1 * P1135 * (|f_2|/P1082)
Note: This time may be exceeded if the Vdc_max level is reached.
P1138[0...2] Ramp-up time scaling 1.00 - 10.00 1.00 C, U, T - DDS Float 1
factor
Defines the scaling factor for the ramp-up time. This is a ramp-up time multiplier, extending the maximum
ramp-up time to 6500 s. Set ramp-up time = ramp-up time scaling factor (P1138) x ramp-up time (P1120).
Note: This time may be exceeded if the Vdc_max level is reached.
P1139[0...2] Ramp-down time scaling 1.00 - 10.00 1.00 C, U, T - DDS Float 1
factor
Defines the scaling factor for the ramp-down time.This is a ramp-down time multiplier, extending the max-
imum ramp-down time to 6500 s. Set ramp-down time = ramp-down time scaling factor (P1139) x ramp-
down time (P1121).
Note: This time may be exceeded if the VDC_max level is reached.
P1140[0...2] BI: RFG enable 0 - 4294967295 1 T - CDS U32 3
Defines command source of RFG enable command (RFG: ramp function generator). If binary input is
equal to zero then the RFG output will be set immediately to 0.
P1141[0...2] BI: RFG start 0 - 4294967295 1 T - CDS U32 3
Defines command source of RFG start command (RFG: ramp function generator). If binary input is equal
to zero then the RFG output is held at its present value.
P1142[0...2] BI: RFG enable setpoint 0 - 4294967295 1 T - CDS U32 3
Defines command source of RFG enable setpoint command (RFG: ramp function generator). If binary
input is equal to zero, the RFG input will be set to zero and the RFG output will ramp-down to zero.
r1170 CO: Frequency setpoint - - - - - Float 3
after RFG [Hz]
Displays overall frequency setpoint after ramp generator.
P1175[0...2] BI: Dual ramp enable 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 3

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

Defines command source of dual ramp enable command. If binary input is equal to one, then the dual
ramp will be applied. This works as follows:
• Ramp-up:
– Inverter starts ramp-up using ramp time from P1120
– When f_act > P2157, switch to ramp time from P1060
• Ramp-down:
– Inverter starts ramp-down using ramp time from P1061
– When f_act < P2159, switch to ramp time from P1121
Dependency: See P2150, P2157, P2159, r2198.

Note: The dual ramp algorithm uses r2198 bits 1 and 2 to determine (f_act > P2157) and (f_act < P2159). P2150
is used to apply hysteresis to these settings, so the user may wish to change the value of this parameter
to make the dual ramp function more responsive. It is not recommended that the dual ramp function is
used in conjunction with JOG ramp.
See P1124.
r1199.7...12 CO/BO: RFG status word - - - - - U16 3
Displays status of ramp function generator (RFG).
07 Ramp #0 active Yes No
08 Ramp #1 active Yes No
09 Ramping finished Yes No
10 Direction right/left Yes No
11 f_act > P2157(f_2) Yes No
12 f_act < P2159(f_3) Yes No
Note: See P2157 and P2159.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P1200 Flying start 0-6 0 U, T - - U16 2
Starts inverter onto a spinning motor by rapidly changing the output frequency of the inverter until the
actual motor speed has been found. Then, the motor runs up to setpoint using the normal ramp time.
0 Flying start disabled
1 Flying start always active; searches in both directions
2 Flying start active after power on, fault, OFF2; searches in both directions
3 Flying start active after fault, OFF2; searches in both directions
4 Flying start always active; searches in direction of setpoint only
5 Flying start active after power on, fault, OFF2; searches in direction of setpoint
only
6 Flying start active after fault, OFF2; searches in direction of setpoint only
Notice: Flying start must be used in cases where the motor may still be turning (e.g. after a short mains break) or
can be driven by the load. Otherwise, overcurrent trips will occur.
Note: Useful for motors with high inertia loads. Settings 1 to 3 search in both directions. Settings 4 to 6 search
only in direction of setpoint.
P1202[0...2] Motor-current: flying start 10 - 200 100 U, T - DDS U16 3
[%]
Defines search current used for flying start. Value is in [%] based on rated motor current (P0305).
Note: Reducing the search current may improve performance for flying start if the inertia of the system is not
very high. However, search current settings in P1202 that are below 30% (and sometimes other settings
in P1202 and P1203) may cause motor speed to be found prematurely or too late, which can result in F1
or F2 trips.
P1203[0...2] Search rate: flying start 10 - 500 100 U, T - DDS U16 3
[%]
Sets factor (in V/f mode only) by which the output frequency changes during flying start to synchronize
with turning motor. This value is entered in [%]. It defines the reciprocal initial gradient in the search se-
quence. P1203 influences the time taken to search for the motor frequency.
Example: For a motor with 50 Hz, 1350 rpm, 100 % would produce a maximum search time of 600 ms.
Note: A higher value produces a flatter gradient and thus a longer search time. A lower value has the opposite
effect.
r1204 Status word: flying start - - - - - U16 4
V/f
Bit parameter for checking and monitoring states during search.
00 Current applied Yes No
01 Current could not be applied Yes No
02 Voltage reduced Yes No
03 Slope-filter started Yes No
04 Current less threshold Yes No
05 Current-minimum Yes No
07 Speed could not be found Yes No

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
Parameter Function Range Factory Can be Scaling Data set Data Acc.
default changed type Level
P1210 Automatic restart 0-8 1 U, T - - U16 2
Configures automatic restart function.
0 Disabled
1 Trip reset after power on, P1211 disabled
2 Restart after mains blackout, P1211 disabled
3 Restart after mains brownout or fault, P1211 enabled
4 Restart after mains brownout, P1211 enabled
5 Restart after mains blackout and fault, P1211 disabled
6 Restart after mains brown- /blackout or fault, P1211 enabled
7 Restart after mains brown- /blackout or fault, trip when P1211 expires
8 Restart after mains brown- /blackout with F3 and leave an interval in seconds de-
termined by P1214, P1211 disabled
9 Restart after mains brown- /blackout with F3 during the attempt time determined by
P1214, P1211 disabled
10 Restart after mains brown- /blackout with F3 during the attempt time determined by
P1214 or manual fault acknowledgement, P1211 disabled
Dependency: Automatic restart requires constant ON command via a digital input wire link.
Caution: P1210 > 2 can cause the motor to restart automatically without toggling the ON command!
Notice: A "mains brownout" is a very short mains break, where the DC link has not fully collapsed before the pow-
er is reapplied.
A "mains blackout" is a long mains break, where the DC link has fully collapsed before the power is re-
applied.
"Delay Time" is the time between attempts of quitting fault. The "Delay Time" of first attempt is 1 second,
then it will be doubled every next attempt.
The "Number of Restart Attempts" can be set in P1211. This is the number of restarts the inverter will try to
quit fault.
When faults are quit and after 4 seconds of no fault condition, "Number of Restart Attempts" will be reset to
P1211 and "Delay Time" will be reset to 1 second.
P1210 = 0:
Automatic restart is disabled.
P1210 = 1:
The inverter will acknowledge (reset) faults i.e. it will reset a fault when the power is re-applied. This
means the inverter must be fully powered down, a brownout is not sufficed. The inverter will not run until
the ON command has been toggled.
P1210 = 2:
The inverter will acknowledge the fault F3 at power on after blackout and restarts the inverter. It is neces-
sary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (digital input).
P1210 = 3:
For these settings it is fundamental that the inverter only restarts if it has been in a RUN state at the time of
the faults (F3, etc.). The inverter will acknowledge the fault and restarts the inverter after a brownout. It is
necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (digital input).
P1210 = 4:
For these settings it is fundamental that the inverter only restarts if it has been in a RUN state at the time of
the fault (F3). The inverter will acknowledge the fault and restarts the inverter after a brownout. It is neces-
sary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (digital input).
P1210 = 5:
The inverter will acknowledge the faults F3 etc. at power on after blackout and restarts the inverter. It is
necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (digital input).

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
P1210 = 6:
The inverter will acknowledge the faults (F3 etc.) at power on after blackout or brownout and restarts the
inverter. It is necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (digital input). Setting 6 causes
the motor to restart immediately.
P1210 = 7:
The inverter will acknowledge the faults (F3 etc.) at power on after blackout or brownout and restarts the
inverter. It is necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (digital input). Setting 7 causes
the motor to restart immediately.
The difference between this mode and Mode 6 is that the fault status bit (r0052.3) is not set until the num-
ber of restarts defined by P1211 have been exhausted.
Flying start must be used in cases where the motor may still be turning (e.g. after a short mains break) or
can be driven by the load (P1200).
P1210 = 8:
The inverter will acknowledge the fault (F3) at power on after blackout or brownout and restarts. It is nec-
essary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (DI). Setting 8 causes the motor to restart immedi-
ately. The interval between restarts is determined by P1214.
P1210 = 9:
The inverter will acknowledge the fault (F3) at power on after blackout or brownout and restarts. It is nec-
essary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (DI). The interval between restarts is fixed at 0.5 s.
P1214 sets the total restart attempt time. If an F3 occurs and cannot be acknowledged within the time set
in P1214, the F3 will go permanent and must be acknowledged manually to restart the inverter.
P1210 = 10:
• The inverter will acknowledge the fault (F3) at power on after blackout or brownout and restarts. It is
necessary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (DI). The interval between restarts is fixed
at 1.0 s. P1214 sets the total restart attempt time, but it must be equal to or less than 8 s. If an F3 oc-
curs and cannot be acknowledged within the time set in P1214, the F3 will go permanent and must be
acknowledged manually to restart the inverter.
• If a fault (the inverter cannot recover from F6, F51, F52, F85, F100, and F101) occurs, the fault must
be acknowledged manually at power on after blackout or brownout and the inverter restarts. It is nec-
essary that the ON command is wired via a digital input (DI).
Flying start must be used in cases where the motor may still be turning (e.g. after a short mains break) or
can be driven by the load (P1200).
P1211 Number of restart 0 - 10 3 U, T - - U16 3
attempts
Specifies number of times inverter will attempt to restart if automatic restart P1210 is activated.
P1214 Restart time interval 0 - 1000 30 - - - U16 3
[s]
This parameter has either of the following functions:
• Specifying the restart interval when P1210 = 8
• Specifying the total restart attempt time when P1210 = 9 or P1210 = 10
P1215 Holding brake ena- 0-1 0 C, T - - U16 2
ble
Enables/disables holding brake function. The motor holding brake (MHB) is controlled via status word 1
r0052 bit 12. This signal can be issued via:
• status word of the serial interface (e.g. USS)
• digital outputs (e.g. DO1: ==> P0731 = 52.C (r0052 bit 12))
0 Motor holding brake disabled
1 Motor holding brake enabled

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
Caution: If the inverter controls the motor holding brake, then a commissioning may not be carried out for potentially
hazardous loads (e.g. suspended loads for crane applications) unless the load has been secured.
It is not permissible to use the motor holding brake as working brake, as it is generally only designed for a
limited number of emergency braking operations.
P1216 Holding brake re- 0.0 - 20.0 1.0 C, T - - Float 2
lease delay[s]
Defines period during which inverter runs at minimum frequency P1080 before ramping up.
P1217 Holding time after 0.0 - 20.0 1.0 C, T - - Float 2
ramp down [s]
Defines time for which inverter runs at minimum frequency (P1080) after ramping down.
Note: If P1217 > P1227, P1227 will take precedence.
P1218[0...2] BI: Motor holding 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - CDS U32 3
brake override
Enables the motor holding brake output to be overridden, allowing the brake to be opened under separate
control.
P1227[0...2] Zero speed detection 0.0 - 300.0 4.0 U, T - DDS Float 2
monitoring time [s]
Sets the monitoring time for the standstill identification.
When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, standstill is identified after this time has expired, after the setpoint
speed has fallen below P2167. After this, the braking signal is started, the system waits for the closing time
and then the pulses are cancelled.
Note: P1227 = 300.0: function is deactivated
P1227 = 0.0: pulses are locked immediately
If P1217 > P1227, P1227 will take precedence.
P1230[0...2] BI: Enable DC braking 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - CDS U32 3
Enables DC braking via a signal applied from an external source. Function remains active while external
input signal is active. DC braking causes the motor to stop rapidly by applying a DC braking current (cur-
rent applied also holds shaft stationary).
When the DC braking signal is applied, the inverter output pulses are blocked and the DC current is not
applied until the motor has been sufficiently demagnetized. This delay time is set in P0347 (demagnetiza-
tion time). If this delay is too short, overcurrent trips can occur. The level of DC braking is set in P1232 (DC
braking current - relative to the rated motor current) which is set to 100 % by default.
Caution: With the DC braking, the kinetic energy of the motor is converted into heat in the motor. The inverter could
overheat if it remains in this status for an excessive period of time!
P1232[0...2] DC braking current [%] 0 - 250 100 U, T - DDS U16 2
Defines level of DC current relative to rated motor current (P0305). The DC braking can be issued observ-
ing the following dependencies:
• OFF1/OFF3 ==> see P1233
• BICO ==> see P1230
P1233[0...2] Duration of DC 0.00 - 250.00 0.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
braking [s]
Defines duration for which DC braking is active following an OFF1 or OFF3 command.
When an OFF1 or OFF3 command is received by the inverter, the output frequency starts to ramp to 0 Hz.
When the output frequency reaches the value set in P1234, the inverter injects a DC braking current
P1232 for the time duration set in P1233.
Caution: See P1230

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
Notice: The DC braking function causes the motor to stop rapidly by applying a DC braking current.
When the DC braking signal is applied, the inverter output pulses are blocked and the DC current not ap-
plied until the motor has been sufficiently demagnetized (demagnetization time is calculated automatically
from motor data).
Note: P1233 = 0 means that DC braking is not activated.
P1234[0...2] DC braking start 0.00 - 550.00 550.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
frequency [Hz]
Sets start frequency for DC braking.
When an OFF1 or OFF3 command is received by the inverter, the output frequency starts to ramp to 0 Hz.
When the output frequency reaches the value set in start frequency of DC braking P1234, the inverter
injects a DC braking current P1232 for the time duration set in P1233.
P1236[0...2] Compound braking 0 - 250 0 U, T - DDS U16 2
current [%]
Defines DC level superimposed on AC waveform after exceeding DC-link voltage threshold of compound
braking. The value is entered in [%] relative to rated motor current (P0305). Compound braking switch-on
level (V_DC,Comp):
If P1254 = 0 --> V_DC,Comp = 1.13 * sqrt(2) * V_mains = 1.13 * sqrt(2) * P0210
otherwise V_DC,Comp = 0.98 * r1242
The Compound Brake is an overlay of the DC brake function with regenerative braking (effective braking at
the ramp) after OFF1 or OFF3. This enables braking with controlled motor frequency and a minimum of
energy returned to the motor. Through optimization of the ramp-down time and the compound braking an
efficient braking without additional HW components is possible.
Dependency: Compound braking depends on the DC link voltage only (see threshold above). This will happen on OFF1,
OFF3 and any regenerative condition. It is disabled, when:
• DC braking is active
• Flying start is active
Notice: Increasing the value will generally improve braking performance; however, if you set the value too high, an
overcurrent trip may result.
If used with dynamic braking enabled as well compound braking will take priority.
If used with the Vdc_max controller enabled the inverter behavior when braking may be worsened particu-
larly with high values of compound braking.
Note: P1236 = 0 means that compound braking is not activated.
P1237 Dynamic braking 0-5 0 U, T - - U16 2
Dynamic braking absorbs the braking energy in a chopper resistor.
This parameter defines the rated duty cycle of the braking resistor (chopper resistor).
Dynamic braking is active when the function is enabled and DC-link voltage exceeds the dynamic braking
switch-on level.
Dynamic braking switch-on level (V_DC,Chopper) :
If P1254 = 0 --> V_DC,Chopper = 1.13 * sqrt(2) * V_mains = 1.13 * sqrt(2) * P0210
otherwise V_DC,Chopper = 0.98 * r1242
0 Disabled
1 5 % duty cycle
2 10 % duty cycle
3 20 % duty cycle
4 50 % duty cycle
5 100 % duty cycle
Note: This parameter is only applicable for inverters of frame size D. For frame sizes A to C, the duty cycle of the
braking resistor can be selected with the dynamic braking module (see Appendix "Dynamic braking mod-
ule (Page 355)").

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
Dependency: If dynamic braking is used with DC braking enabled as well as compound braking, DC braking and com-
pound braking will take priority.
Notice: Initially the brake will operate at a high duty cycle dependant on the DC link level until the thermal limit is
approached. The duty cycle specified by this parameter will then be imposed. The resistor should be able
to operate at this level indefinitely without overheating.
The threshold for the warning A535 is equivalent to 10 seconds running at 95 % duty cycle. The duty cycle
will be limited when it was running 12 seconds at 95 % duty cycle.
P1240[0...2] Configuration of 0-3 1 C, T - DDS U16 3
Vdc controller
Enables/disables Vdc controller. The Vdc controller dynamically controls the DC link voltage to prevent
overvoltage trips on high inertia systems.
0 Vdc controller disabled
1 Vdc_max controller enabled
2 Kinetic buffering (Vdc_min controller) enabled
3 Vdc_max controller and kinetic buffering (KIB) enabled
Caution: If P1245 increased too much, it may interfere with the inverter normal operation.
Note: • Vdc_max controller:
Vdc_max controller automatically increases ramp-down times to keep the DC-link voltage (r0026) with-
in limits (r1242).
• Vdc_min controller:
Vdc_min is activated if DC-link voltage falls below the switch on level P1245. The kinetic energy of the
motor is then used to buffer the DC-link voltage, thus causing deceleration of the inverter. If the inverter
trips with F3 immediately, try increasing the dynamic factor P1247 first. If still tripping with F3 try then
increasing the switch on level P1245.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
r1242 CO: Switch-on level - - - - - Float 3
of Vdc_max [V]
Displays switch-on level of Vdc_max controller.
Following equation is only valid, if P1254 = 0:
r1242 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * V_mains = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * P0210
otherwise r1242 is internally calculated.
P1243[0...2] Dynamic factor of 10 - 200 100 U, T - DDS U16 3
Vdc_max [%]
Defines dynamic factor for DC link controller.
Dependency: P1243 = 100 % means P1250, P1251 and P1252 (gain, integration time and differential time) are used as
set. Otherwise, these are multiplied by P1243 (dynamic factor of Vdc_max).
Note: Vdc controller adjustment is calculated automatically from motor and inverter data.
P1245[0...2] Switch on level 65 - 95 76 U, T - DDS U16 3
kinetic buffering [%]
Enter switch-on level for kinetic buffering (KIB) in [%] relative to supply voltage (P0210).
r1246[V] = (P1245[%]/100) * sqrt(2) * P0210
Warning: Increasing the value too much, may interfere with the inverter normal operation.
Note: P1254 has no effect on the switch-on-level for kinetic buffering.
P1245 default for the single phase variants is 74%.
r1246[0...2] CO: Switch-on level - - - - DDS Float 3
kinetic buffering [V]
Displays switch-on level of kinetic buffering (KIB, Vdc_min controller). If the dc-link voltage drops below the
value in r1246, kinetic buffering will be activated. That means the motor frequency will be reduced in order
to keep Vdc within the valid range. If there is not enough regenerative energy, the inverter trips with un-
dervoltage.
P1247[0...2] Dynamic factor of 10 - 200 100 U, T - DDS U16 3
kinetic buffering [%]
Enters dynamic factor for kinetic buffering (KIB, Vdc_min controller). P1247 = 100 % means P1250, P1251
and P1252 (gain, integration time and differential time) are used as set. Otherwise, these are multiplied by
P1247 (dynamic factor of Vdc_min).
Note: Vdc controller adjustment is calculated automatically from motor and inverter data.
P1250[0...2] Gain of Vdc control- 0.00 - 10.00 1.00 U, T - DDS Float 3
ler
Enters gain for Vdc controller.
P1251[0...2] Integration time Vdc 0.1 - 1000.0 40.0 U, T - DDS Float 3
controller [ms]
Enters integral time constant for Vdc controller.
P1252[0...2] Differential time Vdc 0.0 - 1000.0 1.0 U, T - DDS Float 3
controller [ms]
Enters differential time constant for Vdc controller.
P1253[0...2] Vdc controller out- 0.00 - 550.00 10.00 U, T - DDS Float 3
put limitation [Hz]
Limits maximum effect of Vdc_max controller.
Note: The Factory setting depends on inverter power.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
P1254 Auto detect Vdc 0-1 1 C, T - - U16 3
switch-on levels
Enables/disables auto-detection of switch-on levels for Vdc_max controller. For best results, it is recom-
mended to set P1254 = 1 (auto-detection of Vdc switch-on levels enabled). Setting P1254 = 0 is only rec-
ommended when there is a high degree of fluctuation of the DC-link when the motor is being driven. Note
that the auto detection only works when the inverter has been in standby for over 20s.
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
P1256[0...2] Reaction of kinetic 0-2 0 C, T - DDS U16 3
buffering
Enters reaction for kinetic buffering controller (Vdc_min controller). Depending on the setting selected, the
frequency limit defined in P1257 is used to either hold the speed or disable pulses. If not enough regenera-
tion is produced, inverter may trip with undervoltage.
0 Maintain DC-link until trip
1 Maintain DC-link until trip/stop
2 Control stop
Note: P1256 = 0:
Maintain DC-link voltage until mains is returned or inverter is tripped with undervoltage. The frequency is
kept above the frequency limit provided in P1257.
P1256 = 1:
Maintain DC-link voltage until mains is returned or inverter is tripped with undervoltage or pulses are disa-
bled when frequency falls below the limit in P1257.
P1256 = 2:
This option ramps down the frequency to standstill even when mains return.
If mains do not return, frequency brought down under the control of Vdc_min controller until P1257 limit.
Then pulses are disabled or undervoltage has occurred. If mains return, then an OFF1 is active until
P1257 limit. Then pulses are disabled.
P1257[0...2] Frequency limit for 0.00 - 550.00 2.50 U, T - DDS Float 3
kinetic buffering
[Hz]
Frequency which kinetic buffering (KIB) either hold speed or disable pulses depending on P1256.
P1300[0...2] Control mode 0 - 19 0 C, T - DDS U16 2
Parameter to select the control method. Controls relationship between speed of motor and voltage sup-
plied by inverter.
0 V/f with linear characteristic
1 V/f with FCC
2 V/f with quadratic characteristic
3 V/f with programmable characteristic
4 V/f with linear eco
5 V/f for textile applications
6 V/f with FCC for textile applications
7 V/f with quadratic eco
19 V/f control with independent voltage setpoint

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
Note: P1300 = 1: V/f with FCC (flux current control)

• Maintains motor flux current for improved efficiency
• If FCC is chosen, linear V/f is active at low frequencies
P1300 = 2: V/f with a quadratic characteristic
• Suitable for centrifugal fans/pumps
P1300 = 3: V/f with a programmable characteristic
• User defined characteristic (see P1320)
P1300 = 4: V/f with linear characteristic and Economy Mode
• Linear characteristic with Economy Mode
• Modifies the output voltage to reduce power consumption
P1300 = 5,6: V/f for textile applications
• Slip compensation disabled.
• Imax controller modifies the output voltage only.
• Imax controller does not influence the output frequency.
P1300 = 7: V/f with quadratic characteristic and Economy Mode
• Quadratic characteristic with Economy Mode
• Modifies the output voltage to reduce power consumption
P1300 = 19: V/f control with independent voltage setpoint

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
The following table presents an overview of control parameters (V/f) that can be modified in relationship to
P1300 dependencies:
P1310[0...2] Continuous boost 0.0 - 250.0 50.0 U, T PERCE DDS Float 2

[%] NT
Defines boost level in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) applicable to both linear and quadratic V/f
curves.
At low output frequencies the output voltage is low to keep the flux level constant. However, the output
voltage may be too low for the following:
• magnetization the asynchronous motor
• hold the load
• overcome losses in the system.
The inverter output voltage can be increased via P1310 for the compensation of losses, hold loads at 0 Hz
or maintain the magnetization.
The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:
V_ConBoost,100 = P0305 * Rsadj * (P1310/100)
Where:
Rsadj = stator resistance adjusted for temperature
Rsadj = (r0395/100) * (P0304/(sqrt(3) * P0305)) * P0305 * sqrt(3)
Note: Increasing the boost levels increases motor heating (especially at standstill).
Setting in P0640 (motor overload factor [%]) limits the boost:
sum(V_Boost)/(P0305 * Rsadj) <= P1310/100
The boost values are combined when continuous boost (P1310) used in conjunction with other boost pa-
rameters (acceleration boost P1311 and starting boost P1312). However priorities are allocated to these
parameters as follows:
P1310 > P1311 > P1312
The total boost is limited by following equation:
sum(V_Boost) <= 3 * R_S * I_Mot = 3 * P0305 * Rsadj

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
P1311[0...2] Acceleration boost 0.0 - 250.0 0.0 U, T PERCE DDS Float 2
[%] NT
Applies boost in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current) following a positive setpoint change and drops
back out once the setpoint is reached.
P1311 will only produce boost during ramping, and is therefore useful for additional torque during accelera-
tion and deceleration.
As opposed to P1312, which is only active on the first acceleration issued after the ON command, P1311
is always effect during an acceleration and deceleration when issued.
The magnitude of the boost in volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:
V_AccBoost,100 = P0305 * Rsadj * (P1311/100)
Where:
Note: See P1310
P1312[0...2] Starting boost [%] 0.0 - 250.0 0.0 U, T PERCE DDS Float 2
NT
Applies a constant linear offset (in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current)) to active V/f curve (either
linear or quadratic) after an ON command and is active until:
1. ramp output reaches setpoint for the first time respectively
2. setpoint is reduced to less than present ramp output
This is useful for starting loads with high inertia. Setting the starting boost (P1312) too high will cause the
inverter to limit the current, which will in turn restrict the output frequency to below the setpoint frequency.
The magnitude of the boost in volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:
V_StartBoost,100 = P0305 * Rsadj * (P1312/100)
Where:
Note: See P1310
r1315 CO: Total boost - - - - - Float 4
voltage [V]
Displays total value of voltage boost.
P1316[0...2] Boost end frequen- 0.0 - 100.0 20.0 U, T PERCE DDS Float 3
cy [%] NT
Defines point at which programmed boost reaches 50 % of its value. This value is expressed in [%] relative
to P0310 (rated motor frequency). The default frequency is defined as follows:
V_Boost,min = 2 * (3 + (153/sqrt(P_Motor))
Note: The expert user may change this value to alter the shape of the curve, e.g. to increase torque at a particu-
lar frequency.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
P1320[0...2] Programmable V/f 0.00 - 550.00 0.00 T - DDS Float 3
freq. coord. 1 [Hz]
Sets the frequency of the first point of V/f coordinates (P1320/1321 to P1324/1325) to define V/f character-
istic. These parameter pairs can be used to provide correct torque at correct frequency.
Dependency: To set parameter, select P1300 = 3 (V/f with programmable characteristic). The acceleration boost and
starting boost defined in P1311 and P1312 are applied to V/f with programmable characteristic.
Note: Linear interpolation will be applied between the individual data points.
V/f with programmable characteristic (P1300 = 3) has 3 programmable points and 2 non-programmable
points. The 2 non-programmable points are:
• Continuous boost P1310 at 0 Hz
• Rated motor voltage P0304 at rated motor frequency P0310
P1321[0...2] Programmable V/f 0.0 - 3000.0 0.0 U, T - DDS Float 3
volt. coord. 1 [V]
See P1320
freq. coord. 2 [Hz]
See P1320
volt. coord. 2 [V]
See P1320
freq. coord. 3 [Hz]
See P1320
volt. coord. 3 [V]
See P1320
P1330[0...2] CI: Voltage setpoint 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 3
BICO parameter for selecting source of voltage setpoint for independent V/f control (P1300 = 19).
P1333[0...2] Start frequency for 0.0 - 100.0 10.0 U, T PERCE DDS Float 3
FCC [%] NT
Defines start frequency at which FCC (flux current control) is enabled as [%] of rated motor frequency
(P0310).
Notice: If this value is too low, the system may become unstable.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
P1334[0...2] Slip compensation 1.0 - 20.0 6.0 U, T PERCE DDS Float 3
activation range [%] NT
To set the frequency activation range for slip compensation. The percentage value of P1334 refers to the
motor rated frequency P0310.
The upper threshold will always stay 4 % above P1334.
Dependency: Slip compensation (P1335) active.

Note: See P1335.
The starting frequency of the slip compensation is P1334 * P0310.
P1335[0...2] Slip compensation 0.0 - 600.0 0.0 U, T PERCE DDS Float 2
[%] NT
Parameter dynamically adjusts inverter output frequency so that motor speed is kept constant independent
of motor load.
In the V/f-control, the motor frequency will always be less than the inverter output frequency due to the slip
frequency. For a given output frequency, the motor frequency will drop as load is increased. This behavior,
typical for induction motors, can be compensated using slip compensation. P1335 can be used to enable
and fine-tune the slip compensation.
Dependency: Gain adjustment enables fine-tuning of the actual motor speed.
P1335 > 0, P1336 > 0, P1337 = 0 if P1300 = 5, 6.
Notice: The applied value of the slip compensation (scaled by P1335) is limited by following equation:
f_Slip_comp,max = r0330 * (P1336/100)
Note: P1335 = 0 %:
Slip compensation disabled.
P1335 = 50 % - 70 %:
Full slip compensation at cold motor (partial load).
P1335 = 100 % (standard setting for warm stator):
Full slip compensation at warm motor (full load).
P1336[0...2] Slip limit [%] 0 - 600 250 U, T - DDS U16 2
Compensation slip limit in [%] relative to r0330 (rated motor slip), which is added to frequency setpoint.
r1337 CO: V/f slip fre- - - - PERCE - Float 3
quency [%] NT
Displays actual compensated motor slip as [%]. f_slip [Hz] = r1337 [%] * P0310/100

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
P1338[0...2] Resonance damp- 0.00 - 10.00 0.00 U, T - DDS Float 3
ing gain V/f
Defines resonance damping gain for V/f. The di/dt of the active current will be scaled by P1338. If di/dt
increases the resonance damping circuit decreases the inverter output frequency.
Note: The resonance circuit damps oscillations of the active current which frequently occur during no-load opera-
tion. In V/ f modes (see P1300), the resonance damping circuit is active in a range from approx. 6 % to
80 % of rated motor frequency (P0310). If the value of P1338 is too high, this will cause instability (forward
control effect).
P1340[0...2] Imax controller 0.000 - 0.499 0.030 U, T - DDS Float 3
proportional gain
Proportional gain of the I_max controller.
The Imax controller reduces inverter current if the output current exceeds the maximum motor current
(r0067).
In linear V/f, parabolic V/f, FCC, and programmable V/f modes the I_max controller uses both a frequency
controller (see P1340 and P1341) and a voltage controller (see P1345 and P1346).
The frequency controller seeks to reduce current by limiting the inverter output frequency (to a minimum of
the two times nominal slip frequency).
If this action does not successfully remove the overcurrent condition, the inverter output voltage is reduced
using the I_max voltage controller.
When the overcurrent condition has been removed successfully, frequency limiting is removed using the
ramp-up time set in P1120.
In linear V/f for textiles, FCC for textiles, or external V/f modes only the I_max voltage controller is used to
reduce current (see P1345 and P1346).
Note: The I_max controller can be disabled by setting the frequency controller integral time P1341 to zero. This
disables both the frequency and voltage controllers.
Note that when disabled, the I_max controller will take no action to reduce current but overcurrent warn-
ings will still be generated, and the inverter will trip in excessive overcurrent or overload conditions.
P1341[0...2] Imax controller 0.000 - 50.000 0.300 U, T - DDS Float 3
integral time [s]
Integral time constant of the I_max controller.
• P1341 = 0: I_max controller disabled
• P1340 = 0 and P1341 > 0: frequency controller enhanced integral
• P1340 > 0 and P1341 > 0: frequency controller normal PI control
Note: See P1340 for further information. The Factory setting depends on inverter power.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r1343 CO: Imax controller - - - - - Float 3
frequency output [Hz]
Displays effective frequency limitation.
Dependency: If I_max controller not in operation, parameter normally shows maximum frequency P1082.
r1344 CO: Imax controller - - - - - Float 3
voltage output [V]
Displays amount by which the I_max controller is reducing the inverter output voltage.
P1345[0...2] Imax voltage controller 0.000 - 5.499 0.250 U, T - DDS Float 3
proportional gain
If the output current (r0068) exceeds the maximum current (r0067), the inverter is dynamically controlled
by reducing the output voltage. This parameter sets the proportional gain of this controller.
P1346[0...2] Imax voltage controller 0.000 - 50.000 0.300 U, T - DDS Float 3
integral time [s]
Integral time constant of the I_max voltage controller.
• P1341 = 0: I_max controller disabled
• P1345 = 0 and P1346 > 0: I_max voltage controller enhanced integral
• P1345 > 0 and P1346 > 0: I_max voltage controller normal PI control
r1348 Economy mode factor - - - PERCE - Float 2
[%] NT
Displays the calculated economy mode factor (range 80%-120%) applied to the demanded output volts.
Economy mode is used to find the most efficient operating point for a given load. It does this by a continu-
ous method of hill climbing optimization. Hill climbing optimization works by slightly changing the output
volts either up or down and monitoring the change in input power. If the input power has decreased, the
algorithm changes the output volts in the same direction. If the input power has increased then the algo-
rithm adjusts the output volts in the other direction. Using this algorithm, the software should be able to
find the minimum point on the graph between input power and output volts.
Notice: If this value is too low, the system may become unstable.
P1350[0...2] Voltage soft start 0-1 0 U, T - DDS U16 3
Sets whether voltage is built up smoothly during magnetization time (ON) or whether it simply jumps to
boost voltage (OFF).
0 OFF
1 ON
Note: The settings for this parameter bring benefits and drawbacks:
• P1350 = 0: OFF (jump to boost voltage)
Benefit: flux is built up quickly
Drawback: motor may move

• P1350 = 1: ON (smooth voltage build-up)
Benefit: motor less likely to move
Drawback: flux build-up takes longer

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P1780[0...2] Control word of Rs/Rr- 0-1 1 U, T - DDS U16 3
adaption
Enables thermal adaptation of stator and rotor resistance to reduce torque errors in speed/torque regula-
tion with speed sensor, or speed errors in speed/torque regulation without speed sensor.
00 Enable thermal Rs/Rr-adapt. Yes No
P1800[0...2] Pulse frequency [kHz] 2 - 16 4 U, T - DDS U16 2
Sets pulse frequency of power switches in inverter. The frequency can be changed in steps of 2 kHz.
Dependency: The minimum/maximum/default values of the pulse frequency are determined by the used power module.
Furthermore the minimum pulse frequency depends on the parameterization of P1082 (maximum fre-
quency) and P0310 (rated motor frequency).
Note: If the pulse frequency is increased, maximum inverter current r0209 can be reduced (derating). The derat-
ing characteristic depends on the type and power of the inverter.
If silent operation is not absolutely necessary, lower pulse frequencies may be selected to reduce inverter
losses and radio-frequency emissions.
Under certain circumstances, the inverter may reduce the pulse frequency to provide protection against
overtemperature (see P0290 and P0291 bit 00).
r1801[0...1] CO: Pulse frequency - - - - - U16 3
[kHz]
Displays information about pulse frequency of power switches in inverter.
r1801[0] displays the actual inverter pulse frequency.
r1801[1] displays the minimum inverter pulse frequency which can be reached when the functions "motor
identification" or "inverter overload reaction" are active. If no PM is plugged this parameter is set to 0 kHz.
Index: [0] Actual pulse frequency
[1] Minimum pulse frequency
Notice: Under certain conditions (inverter overtemperature, see P0290), this can differ from the values selected in
P1800 (pulse frequency).
P1802 Modulator mode 1-3 3 U, T - - U16 3
Selects inverter modulator mode.
1 Asymmetric SVM
2 Space vector modulation
3 SVM/ASVM controlled mode
Notice: • Asymmetric space vector modulation (ASVM) produces lower switching losses than space vector
modulation (SVM), but may cause irregular rotation at very low speeds.
• Space vector modulation (SVM) with over-modulation may produce current waveform distortion at high
output voltages.
• Space vector modulation (SVM) without over-modulation will reduce maximum output voltage available
to motor.
P1803[0...2] Maximum modulation 20.0 - 150.0 106.0 U, T - DDS Float 3
[%]
Sets maximum modulation index.
Note: P1803 = 100 %: Limit for over-control (for ideal inverter without switching delay).

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P1810 Control word Vdc control 0-3 3 U, T - - U16 3
Configures Vdc filtering and compensation.
00 Enable Vdc average filter Yes No
01 Enable Vdc compensation Yes No
Note: P1810 default for the single phase variants is 2.
P1820[0...2] Reverse output phase 0-1 0 T - DDS U16 2
sequence
Changes sequence of phases without changing setpoint polarity.
0 Forward
1 Reverse the Motor
Note: See P1000
P1825 On-state voltage of IGBT [V] 0.0 - 20.0 0.9 U, T - - Float 4
Corrects on-state voltage of the IGBTs.
P1828 Gating unit dead time [μs] 0.00 - 3.98 0.01 U, T - - Float 4
Sets compensation time of gating unit interlock.
P1900 Select motor data identi- 0-2 0 C, T - - U16 2
fication
Performs motor data identification.
0 Disabled
2 Identification of all parameters in standstill
Dependency: No measurement if motor data incorrect.
P1900 = 2: Calculated value for stator resistance (see P0350) is overwritten.
Notice: When the identification is finished P1900 is set to 0. When choosing the setting for measurement, observe
the following:
The value is actually adopted as P0350 parameter setting and applied to the control as well as being
shown in the read-only parameters below. Ensure that the motor holding brake is not active when per-
forming the motor identification.
Note: Before selecting motor data identification, "Quick commissioning" has to be performed in advance.
Since the cable length of the applications differs in a wide range, the preset resistor P0352 is only a rough
estimation. Better results of the motor identification can be achieved by specifying the cable resistor be-
fore the start of the motor identification by measuring/calculating.
Once enabled (P1900 > 0), A541 generates a warning that the next ON command will initiate measure-
ment of motor parameters.
Communications - both via USS as well as via the Modbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to
make internal calculations. These calculations can take up to one minute to complete.
P1909[0...2] Control word of motor 0 - 65519 23552 U, T - DDS U16 4
data identification
Control word of motor data identification.
00 Estimation of Xs Yes No
01 Motor ID at 2 kHz Yes No
02 Estimation of Tr Yes No
03 Estimation of Lsigma Yes No

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

05 Det. Tr meas. with 2 freq. Yes No
06 Measurement of on voltage Yes No
07 Deadtime detection from Rs measurement Yes No
08 MotID with hw deadtime comp activ Yes No
09 No deadtime detection with 2 freq Yes No
10 Detect Ls with LsBlock method Yes No
11 MotID adaption of magnetizing current Yes No
12 MotID adaption of main reactance Yes No
13 MotID switch off saturation curve optim. Yes No
14 MotID saturation curve optim. all framesizes Yes No
15 MotID saturation curve optim. big framesizes Yes No
P1910 Select motor data identi- 0 - 23 0 T - - U16 4
fication
Performs a motor data identification with extended figures.
Performs stator resistance measuring.
0 Disabled
1 Identification of all parameters with parameter change
2 Identification of all parameters without parameter change
3 Identification of saturation curve with parameter change
4 Identification of saturation curve without parameter change
5 Identification of XsigDyn without parameter change
6 Identification of Tdead without parameter change
7 Identification of Rs without parameter change
8 Identification of Xs without parameter change
9 Identification of Tr without parameter change
10 Identification of Xsigma without parameter change
20 Set voltage vector
21 Set voltage vector without filtering in r0069
22 Set voltage vector rectangle signal
23 Set voltage vector triangle signal
Notice: Ensure that the motor holding brake is not active when performing the motor identification. P1910 can't be
changed while the motor identification with P1900 is active (P1900 = 2 or 3). When the identification is
finished P1910 is set to 0. When choosing the setting for measurement, observe the following:
• "with parameter change"
means that the value is actually adopted as P0350 parameter setting and applied to the control as well
as being shown in the read-only parameters below.
• "without parameter change"
means that the value is only displayed, i.e. shown for checking purposes in the read-only parameter
r1912 (identified stator resistance).
The value is not applied to the control.
Dependency: No measurement if motor data incorrect.
P1910 = 1: Calculated value for stator resistance (see P0350) is overwritten.
Note: See P1900

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r1912[0] Identified stator re- - - - - - Float 4
sistance [Ω]
Displays measured stator resistance value (line-to-line). This value also includes the cable resistances.
Index: [0] U_phase
Notice: If the value identified (Rs = stator resistance) does not lie within the range 0.1 % < Rs [p. u.] < 100 % fault
message 41 (motor data identification failure) is issued. P0949 provides further information (fault value = 2
in this case).
Note: This value is measured using P1900 = 2.
r1920[0] Identified dynamic leak- - - - - - Float 4
age inductance
Displays identified total dynamic leakage inductance.
Index: [0] U_phase
r1925[0] Identified on-state volt- - - - - - Float 4
age [V]
Displays identified on-state voltage of IGBT.
Index: [0] U_phase
Notice: If the identified on-state voltage does not lie within the range 0.0V < 10V fault message 41 (motor data
identification failure) is issued. P0949 provides further information (fault value = 20 in this case).
r1926 Identified gating unit - - - - - Float 2
dead time [μs]
Displays identified dead time of gating unit interlock.
P2000[0...2] Reference frequency 1.00 - 550.00 50.00 T - DDS Float 2
[Hz]
P2000 represents the reference frequency for frequency values which are displayed/transferred as a per-
centage or a hexadecimal value.
Where:
• hexadecimal 4000 H ==> P2000 (e.g.: USS-PZD)
• percentage 100 % ==> P2000 (e.g.: analog input)
Example: If a BICO connection is made between two parameters or alternatively using P0719 or P1000, the 'unit' of
the parameters (standardized (Hex) or physical (i.e. Hz) values) may differ. SINAMICS implicitly makes an
automatic conversion to the target value.
Dependency: When Quick Commissioning is carried out, P2000 is changed as follows: P2000 = P1082.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

Caution: P2000 represents the reference frequency of the above mentioned interfaces.
A maximum frequency setpoint of 2*P2000 can be applied via the corresponding interface.
Unlike P1082 (Maximum Frequency) this limits the inverter frequency internally independent of the refer-
ence frequency.
By modification of P2000 it will also adapt the parameter to the new settings.
Notice: Reference parameters are intended as an aid to presenting setpoint and actual value signals in a uniform
manner.
This also applies to fixed settings entered as a percentage.
A value of 100 % corresponds to a process data value of 4000H, or 4000 0000H in the case of double
values.
In this respect, the following parameters are available:
Note: Changes to P2000 result in a new calculation of P2004.

P2001[0...2] Reference voltage [V] 10 - 2000 1000 T - DDS U16 3
Full-scale output voltage (i.e. 100 %) used over serial link (corresponds to 4000H).
Example:

P2002[0...2] Reference current [A] 0.10 - 10000.0 0.10 T - DDS Float 3
Full-scale output current used over serial link (corresponds to 4000H).
Example: If a BICO connection is made between two parameters, the 'unit' of the parameters (standardized (Hex) or
physical (i.e. A) values) may differ. In this case an automatic conversion to the target value is made.


Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2003[0...2] Reference torque [Nm] 0.10 - 99999.0 0.75 T - DDS Float 3
Full-scale reference torque used over the serial link (corresponds to 4000H).
physical (i.e. Nm) values) may differ. In this case an automatic conversion to the target value is made.

P2004[0...2] Reference power 0.01 - 2000.0 0.75 T - DDS Float 3
Full-scale reference power used over the serial link (corresponds to 4000H).
physical (i.e. kW/hp) values) may differ. In this case an automatic conversion to the target value is made.
P2010[0...1] USS/MODBUS baudrate 6 - 12 6 U, T - - U16 2

Sets baud rate for USS/MODBUS communication.
6 9600 bps
7 19200 bps
8 38400 bps
9 57600 bps
10 76800 bps
11 93750 bps
12 115200 bps
Index: [0] USS/MODBUS on RS485
Notice: Before fitting SINAMICS V20 Smart Access to V20, if RS485 communication is present, then you must set
P2010[1] = 12 via the BOP.
Note: This parameter, index 0, will alter the baudrate on RS485 regardless of the protocol selected in P2023.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2011[0...1] USS address 0 - 31 0 U, T - - U16 2
Sets unique address for inverter.
Index: [0] USS on RS485
Note: You can connect up to a further 30 inverters via the serial link (i.e. 31 inverters in total) and control them
with the USS serial bus protocol.
P2012[0...1] USS PZD length 0-8 2 U, T - - U16 3
Defines the number of 16-bit words in PZD part of USS telegram. In this area, process data (PZD) are
continually exchanged between the master and slaves. The PZD part of the USS telegram is used for the
main setpoint, and to control the inverter.
Notice: USS protocol consists of PZD and PKW which can be changed by the user via P2012 and P2013 respec-
tively.
PZD transmits a control word and setpoint or status word and actual values.
The number of PZD-words in a USS-telegram are determined by P2012, where the first two words are
either:
a) control word and main setpoint or
b) status word and actual value.
When P2012 is greater or equal to 4 the additional control word is transferred as the 4th PZD-word (de-
fault setting).

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2013[0...1] USS PKW length 0 - 127 127 U, T - - U16 3
Defines the number of 16-bit words in PKW part of USS telegram. The PKW area can be varied. Depend-
ing on the particular requirement, 3-word, 4-word or variable word lengths can be parameterized. The
PKW part of the USS telegram is used to read and write individual parameter values.
0 No words
3 3 words
4 4 words
127 Variable
Example: Data type
U16 (16 Bit) U32 (32 Bit) Float (32 Bit)
P2013 = 3 X Parameter access fault Parameter access fault
P2013 = 4 X X X
P2013 = 127 X X X
Notice: USS protocol consists of PZD and PKW which can be changed by the user via P2012 and P2013 respec-
tively. P2013 determines the number of PKW-words in a USS-telegram. Setting P2013 to 3 or 4 deter-
mines the length of the PKW words (3 = three words and 4 = four words). When P2013 set to 127
automatically adjusts the length of the PKW words are required.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

If a fixed PKW length is selected only one parameter value can be transferred.
In the case of indexed parameter, you must use the variable PKW length if you wish to have the values of
all indices transferred in a single telegram.
In selecting the fixed PKW length, it is important to ensure the value in question can be transferred using
this PKW length.
P2013 = 3, fixes PKW length, but does not allow access to many parameter values.
A parameter fault is generated when an out-of-range value is used, the value will not be accepted but the
inverter state will not be affected.
Useful for applications where parameters are not changed, but MM3s are also used.
Broadcast mode is not possible with this setting.
P2013 = 4, fixes PKW length.
Allows access to all parameters, but indexed parameters can only be read one index at a time.
Word order for single word values are different to setting 3 or 127, see example below.
P2013 = 127, most useful setting.
PKW reply length varies depending on the amount of information needed.
Can read fault information and all indices of a parameter with a single telegram with this setting.
Example:
Set P0700 to value 5 (P0700 = 2BC (hex))
P2013 = 3 P2013 = 4 P2013 = 127
Master → SINAMICS 22BC 0000 0006 22BC 0000 0000 0006 22BC 0000 0006 0000
SINAMICS → Master 12BC 0000 0006 12BC 0000 0000 0006 12BC 0000 0006
P2014[0...1] USS/MODBUS telegram 0 - 65535 2000 T - - U16 3
off time [ms]
Index 0 defines a time T_off after which a fault will be generated (F72) if no telegram is received via the
USS/MODBUS channel RS485.
Index 1 defines a time T_off after which a fault will be generated (F71) if no telegram is received via the
USS channel RS232 (reserved).
Notice: If time set to 0, no fault is generated (i.e. watchdog disabled).
Note: The telegram off time will function on RS485 regardless of the protocol set in P2023.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r2018[0...7] CO: PZD from - - - 4000H - U16 3
USS/MODBUS on RS485
Displays process data received via USS/MODBUS on RS485.
USS on RS485:

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

MODBUS on RS485:
Index: [0] Received word 0

[1] Received word 1
... ...
[7] Received word 7
Note: Restrictions:
• If the above serial interface controls the inverter (P0700 or P0719) then the 1st control word must be
transferred in the 1st PZD-word.
• If the setpoint source is selected via P1000 or P0719, then the main setpoint must be transferred in the
2nd PZD-word.
• When P2012 is greater than or equal to 4 the additional control word (2nd control word) must trans-
ferred in the 4th PZD-word, if the above serial interface controls the inverter (P0700 or P0719).

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2019[0...7] CI: PZD to - 52[0] T 4000H - U32/I 3
USS/MODBUS on 16
RS485
Displays process data transmitted via USS/MODBUS on RS485.
USS on RS485:

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

MODBUS on RS485:
Index: [0] Transmitted word 0

[1] Transmitted word 1
... ...
[7] Transmitted word 7
Note: If r0052 not indexed, display does not show an index (".0").

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2021 Modbus address 1 - 247 1 T - - U16 2
Sets unique address for inverter.
P2022 Modbus reply timeout 0 - 10000 1000 U, T - - U16 3
[ms]
The time in which the inverter is allowed to respond to the Modbus master. If the forming of a response
needs more time than specified in this parameter, the processing is done, but no response is sent.
P2023 RS485 protocol selection 0 - 3 1 T - - U16 1
Select the protocol which runs on the RS485 link.
0 None
1 USS
2 Modbus
3 Script terminal
Notice: After changing P2023, powercycle the inverter. During the powercycle, wait until LED has gone off or the
display has gone blank (may take a few seconds) before re-applying power. If P2023 has been changed
via a PLC, make sure the change has been saved to EEPROM via P0971.
r2024[0...1] USS/MODBUS error-free - - - - - U16 3
telegrams
Displays number of error-free USS/MODBUS telegrams received.
Note: The state of the telegram information on RS485 is reported regardless of the protocol set in P2023.
r2025[0...1] USS/MODBUS rejected - - - - - U16 3
telegrams
Displays number of USS/MODBUS telegrams rejected.
Index: See r2024
Note: See r2024
r2026[0...1] USS/MODBUS character - - - - - U16 3
frame error
Displays number of USS/MODBUS character frame errors.
Index: See r2024
Note: See r2024
r2027[0...1] USS/MODBUS overrun - - - - - U16 3
error
Displays number of USS/MODBUS with overrun error.
Index: See r2024
Note: See r2024
r2028[0...1] USS/MODBUS parity - - - - - U16 3
error
Displays number of USS/MODBUS telegrams with parity error.
Index: See r2024
Note: See r2024

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r2029[0...1] USS start not identified - - - - - U16 3
Displays number of USS telegrams with unidentified start.
Index: See r2024
Note: Not used on MODBUS.
r2030[0...1] USS/MODBUS - - - - - U16 3
BCC/CRC error
Displays number of USS/MODBUS telegrams with BCC/CRC error.
Index: See r2024
Note: See r2024
r2031[0...1] USS/MODBUS length - - - - - U16 3
error
Displays number of USS/MODBUS telegrams with incorrect length.
Index: See r2024
Note: See r2024
P2034 MODBUS parity on 0-2 2 U, T - - U16 2
RS485
Parity of MODBUS telegrams on RS485.
0 No parity
1 Odd parity
2 Even parity
Note: Also see P2010 for baudrate and P2035 for stop bit settings. You must set P2034 to 0 if P2035=2.
P2035 MODBUS stop bits on 1-2 1 U, T - - U16 2
RS485
Number of stop bits in MODBUS telegrams on RS485.
1 1 stop bit
2 2 stop bits
Note: Also see P2010 for baudrate and P2034 for parity settings. You must set P2035 to 2 if P2034=0.
r2036.0...15 BO: CtrlWrd1 from - - - - - U16 3
USS/MODBUS on
RS485
Displays control word 1 from USS/MODBUS on RS485 (i.e. word 1 within USS/MODBUS = PZD1). See
r0054 for the bit field description.
r2037.0...15 BO: CtrlWrd2 from USS - - - - - U16 3
on RS485 (USS)
Displays control word 2 from USS on RS485 (i.e. word 4 within USS = PZD4). See r0055 for the bit field
description.
Note: To enable the external fault (r2037 bit 13) facility via USS, the following parameters must be set:
• P2012 = 4
• P2106 = 1

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r2053[0...7] I/O Extension Module - 0 - - - U16 3
identification
Displays identification data of the I/O Extension Module.
Index: [0] I/O Extension Module ID number
[1] I/O Extension Module firmware version number (major)
[2] I/O Extension Module firmware version number (minor)
[3] I/O Extension Module firmware version number (hot fix)
[4] I/O Extension Module firmware version number (internal)
[5] Not used
[6] Not used
[7] Company ID (Siemens = 42)
r2067.0...12 CO/BO: Digital input - - - - - U16 3
values status
Displays status of digital inputs.
11 Digital input AI1 Yes No
12 Digital input AI2 Yes No
Note: This is used for BICO connection without software intervention.
The digital input 5 and 6 are provided by the optional I/O Extension Module.
P2100[0...2] Alarm number selection 0 - 65535 0 T - - U16 3
Selects up to 3 faults or warnings for non-default reactions.
Example: If, for example, an OFF3 is to be carried out instead of an OFF2 for a fault, the fault number has to be
entered in P2100 and the desired reaction selected in P2101 (in this case (OFF3) P2101 = 3).
Index: [0] Fault Number 1
[1] Fault Number 2
[2] Fault Number 3
Note: All fault codes have a default reaction to OFF2.
Some fault codes caused by hardware trips (e.g. overcurrent) cannot be changed from the default reac-
tions.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
P2101[0...2] Stop reaction value 0-4 0 T - - U16 3
Sets inverter stop reaction values for faults selected by P2100 (alarm number selection). This indexed
parameter specifies the special reaction to the faults/warnings defined in P2100 indices 0 to 2.
0 No reaction, no display
1 OFF1 stop reaction
4 No reaction, warning only
Index: [0] Stop reaction value 1
[1] Stop reaction value 2
[2] Stop reaction value 3
Note: Settings 1 - 3 are only available for fault codes.
Setting 4 is only available for warnings.
Index 0 (P2101) refers to fault/warning in index 0 (P2100).
P2103[0...2] BI: 1. Faults acknowl- 0 - 4294967295 722.2 T - CDS U32 3
edgement
Defines first source of fault acknowledgement.
P2104[0...2] BI: 2. Faults acknowl- 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 3
edgement
Selects second source of fault acknowledgement.
Setting: See P2103
P2106[0...2] BI: External fault 0 - 4294967295 1 T - CDS U32 3
Selects source of external faults.
Setting: See P2103
r2110[0...3] CO: Warning number - - - - - U16 2
Displays warning information.
A maximum of 2 active warnings (indices 0 and 1) and 2 historical warnings (indices 2 and 3) may be
viewed.
Index: [0] Recent Warnings --, warning 1
[1] Recent Warnings --, warning 2
[2] Recent Warnings -1, warning 3
[3] Recent Warnings -1, warning 4
Notice: Indices 0 and 1 are not stored.
Note: The LED indicates the warning status in this case. The keypad will flash while a warning is active.
P2111 Total number of warnings 0-4 0 T - - U16 3
Displays number of warning (up to 4) since last reset. Set to 0 to reset the warning history.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
P2113[0...2] Disable inverter warnings 0-1 0 T - - U16 3
Switches off reporting of inverter warnings. Can be used in conjunction with P0503 as an adjunct to keep-
running operation.
1 Inverter warnings disabled
0 Inverter warnings enabled
Note: See also P0503
r2114[0...1] Run time counter - - - - - U16 3
Displays run time counter.
It is the total time the inverter has been powered up. When power is switched off, the value is saved, and
then restored on powerup. The run time counter will be calculate as followed:
Multiply the value in r2114[0] by 65536 and then add it to the value in r2114[1]. The resultant answer will
be in seconds. This means that r2114[0] is not days. Total powerup time = 65536 * r2114[0] + r2114[1]
seconds.
Example: If r2114[0] = 1 and r2114[1] = 20864
We get 1 * 65536 + 20864 = 86400 seconds which equals 1 day.
Index: [0] System Time, Seconds, Upper Word
[1] System Time, Seconds, Lower Word
P2115[0...2] Real time clock 0 - 65535 257 T - - U16 4
Displays real time.
All inverters require an on-board clock function with which fault conditions may be time-stamped and
logged. However, they have no battery backed Real Time Clock (RTC). Inverters may support a software
driven RTC which requires synchronization with the RTC supplied via a serial interface.
The time is stored in a word array parameter P2115. The time will be set by USS Protocol standard "word
array parameter write" telegrams. Once the last word is received in index 2, the software will start running
the timer itself using internal running 1 millisecond tic. Hence becoming like RTC.
If power-cycle takes place, then the real time must be sent again to the inverter.
Time is maintained in a word array parameter and encoded as follows - the same format will be used in
fault report logs.
Index High Byte (MSB) Low Byte (LSB)
0 Seconds (0 - 59) Minutes (0 - 59)
1 Hours (0 - 23) Days (1 - 31)
2 Month (1 - 12) Years (00 - 250)
The values are in binary form.
Index: [0] Real Time, Seconds + Minutes
[1] Real Time, Hours + Days
[2] Real Time, Month + Year
P2120 Indication counter 0 - 65535 0 U, T - - U16 4
Indicates total number of fault/warning events. This parameter is incremented whenever a fault/warning
event occurs.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
P2150[0...2] Hysteresis frequency 0.00 - 10.00 3.00 U, T - DDS Float 3
f_hys [Hz]
Defines hysteresis level applied for comparing frequency and speed to threshold.
Dependency: See P1175.
Note: If P1175 is set, P2150 is also used to control the Dual Ramp function.
P2151[0...2] CI: Speed setpoint for 0 - 4294967295 1170[0] U, T - DDS U32 3
messages
Selects the source of setpoint frequency, actual frequency is compared with this frequency to detect fre-
quency deviation (see monitoring bit r2197.7).
P2155[0...2] Threshold frequency f_1 0.00 - 550.00 30.00 U, T - DDS Float 3
[Hz]
Sets a threshold for comparing actual speed or frequency to threshold values f_1. This threshold controls
status bits 4 and 5 in status word 2 (r0053).
P2156[0...2] Delay time of threshold 0 - 10000 10 U, T - DDS U16 3
freq f_1 [ms]
Sets delay time prior to threshold frequency f_1 comparison (P2155).
[Hz]
Threshold_2 for comparing speed or frequency to thresholds.
freq f_2 [ms]
When comparing speed or frequency to threshold f_2 (P2157) this is the time delay before status bits are
cleared.
[Hz]
Threshold_3 for comparing speed or frequency to thresholds.
freq f_3 [ms]
When comparing speed or frequency to threshold f_3 (P2159) this is the time delay before status bits are
set.
P2162[0...2] Hysteresis freq. for over- 0.00 - 25.00 3.00 U, T - DDS Float 3
speed [Hz]
Hysteresis speed (frequency) for overspeed detection. For V/f control modes the hysteresis acts below the
maximum frequency.
P2164[0...2] Hysteresis frequency 0.00 - 10.00 3.00 U, T - DDS Float 3
deviation [Hz]
Hysteresis frequency for detecting permitted deviation (from setpoint) or frequency or speed. This fre-
quency controls bit 8 in status word 1 (r0052).
P2166[0...2] Delay time ramp up com- 0 - 10000 10 U, T - DDS U16 3
pleted [ms]
Delay time for signal that indicates completion of ramp-up.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
P2167[0...2] Switch-off frequency f_off 0.00 - 10.00 1.00 U, T - DDS Float 3
[Hz]
Defines the threshold of the monitoring function |f_act| > P2167 (f_off). P2167 influences following func-
tions:
• If the actual frequency falls below this threshold and the time delay has expired, bit 1 in status word 2
(r0053) is reset.
• If an OFF1 or OFF3 was applied and bit 1 is reset the inverter will disable the pulse (OFF2).
P2168[0...2] Delay time T_off [ms] 0 - 10000 0 U, T - DDS U16 3
Defines time for which the inverter may operate below switch-off frequency (P2167) before switch off
occurs.
Dependency: Active if holding brake (P1215) not parameterized.
P2170[0...2] Threshold current 0.00 - 400.0 100.0 U, T - DDS Float 3
I_thresh [%]
Defines threshold current relative to P0305 (rated motor current) to be used in comparisons of I_act and
I_Thresh. This threshold controls bit 3 in status word 3 (r0053).
P2171[0...2] Delay time current [ms] 0 - 10000 10 U, T - DDS U16 3
Defines delay time prior to activation of current comparison.
P2172[0...2] Threshold DC-link voltage 0 - 2000 800 U, T - DDS U16 3
[V]
Defines DC link voltage to be compared to actual voltage. This voltage controls bits 7 and 8 in status word
3 (r0053).
P2173[0...2] Delay time DC-link volt- 0 - 10000 10 U, T - DDS U16 3
age [ms]
Defines delay time prior to activation of threshold comparison.
P2177[0...2] Delay time for motor is 0 - 10000 10 U, T - DDS U16 3
blocked [ms]
Delay time for identifying that the motor is blocked.
P2179 Current limit for no load 0.00 - 10.0 3.0 U, T - - Float 3
identified [%]
Threshold current for A922 (no load applied to inverter) relative to P0305 (rated motor current).
Notice: If a motor setpoint cannot be entered and the current limit (P2179) is not exceeded, warning A922 (no
load applied) is issued when delay time (P2180) expires.
Note: It may be that the motor is not connected or a phase could be missing.
P2180 Delay time for no-load 0 - 10000 2000 U, T - - U16 3
detection [ms]
Delay time for detecting a missing output load.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
P2181[0...2] Load monitoring mode 0-6 0 T - DDS U16 3
Sets load monitoring mode.
This function allows monitoring of mechanical failure of the inverter train, e.g. a broken inverter belt. It can
also detect conditions which cause an overload, such as a jam. P2182 -P2190 are set to the following
values when this parameter is changed from 0.
P2182 = P1080 (Fmin)
P2183 = P1082 (Fmax) * 0.8
P2184 = P1082 (Fmax)
P2185 = r0333 (rated motor torque) * 1.1
P2186 = 0
P2188 = 0
P2190 = r0333 (rated motor torque)/2
This is achieved by comparing the actual frequency/torque curve with a programmed envelope (see
P2182 - P2190). If the curve falls outside the envelope, a warning A952 or trip F452 is generated.
0 Load monitoring disabled
1 Warning: Low torque/frequency
2 Warning: High torque/frequency
3 Warning: High/low torque/frequency
4 Trip: Low torque/frequency
5 Trip: High torque/frequency
6 Trip: High/low torque/frequency
P2182[0...2] Load monitoring threshold 0.00 - 550.00 5.00 U, T - DDS Float 3
frequency 1 [Hz]
Sets the lower frequency threshold f_1 for defining the area where the load monitoring is effective. The
frequency torque envelope is defined by 9 parameters - 3 are frequency parameters (P2182 - P2184), and
the other 6 define the low and high torque limits (P2185 - P2190) for each frequency.
Dependency: See P2181 for calculated default value.
Note: Below the threshold in P2182 and above the threshold in P2184, the load monitoring mode is not active.
In this case the values for normal operation with the torque limits given in P1521 and P1520 are valid.
frequency 2 [Hz]
Sets the frequency threshold f_2 for defining the envelope in which the torque values are valid. See
P2182.
frequency 3 [Hz]
Sets the upper frequency threshold f_3 for defining the area where the load monitoring is effective. See
P2182.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
P2185[0...2] Upper torque threshold 1 0.0 - 99999.0 Value in U, T - DDS Float 3
[Nm] r0333
Upper limit threshold value 1 for comparing actual torque.
See P2181 for calculated default value.
Note: The factory setting depends on rating data of Power Module and Motor.
P2186[0...2] Lower torque threshold 1 0.0 - 99999.0 0.0 U, T - DDS Float 3
[Nm]
Lower limit threshold value 1 for comparing actual torque.
[Nm] r0333
Note: See P2185
[Nm]
[Nm] r0333
Note: See P2185
[Nm]
P2192[0...2] Load monitoring delay 0 - 65 10 U, T - DDS U16 3
time [s]
P2192 defines a delay before warning/trip becomes active.
- It is used to eliminate events caused by transient conditions.
- It is used for both methods of fault detection.
r2197.0...12 CO/BO: Monitoring word - - - - - U16 3
1
Monitoring word 1 which indicates the state of monitor functions. Each bit represents one monitor function.
00 |f_act| <= P1080 (f_min) Yes No
01 |f_act| <= P2155 (f_1) Yes No
02 |f_act| > P2155 (f_1) Yes No
03 f_act >= zero Yes No

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
04 f_act >= setp. (f_set) Yes No
05 |f_act| <= P2167 (f_off) Yes No
06 |f_act| >= P1082 (f_max) Yes No
07 f_act == setp. (f_set) Yes No
08 Act. current |r0027| >= P2170 Yes No
09 Act. unfilt. Vdc < P2172 Yes No
10 Act. unfilt. Vdc > P2172 Yes No
11 Output load is not present Yes No
12 |f_act| > P1082 with delay Yes No
r2198.0...12 CO/BO: Monitoring word - - - - - U16 3
2
Monitoring word 2 which indicates the state of monitor functions. Each bit represents one monitor function.
00 |f_act| <= P2157 (f_2) Yes No
01 |f_act| > P2157 (f_2) Yes No
02 |f_act| <= P2159 (f_3) Yes No
03 |f_act| > P2159 (f_3) Yes No
04 Unused Yes No
05 f_set > 0 Yes No
06 Motor blocked Yes No
07 Motor pulled out Yes No
08 I_act |r0068| < P2170 Yes No
09 |m_act| > P2174 & setpoint reached Yes No
10 |m_act| > P2174 Yes No
11 Load monitoring signals an alarm Yes No
12 Load monitoring signals a fault Yes No
P2200[0...2] BI: Enable PID controller 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - CDS U32 2
Allows user to enable/disable the PID controller. Setting to 1 enables the PID closed-loop controller.
Dependency: Setting 1 automatically disables normal ramp times set in P1120 and P1121 and the normal frequency
setpoints.
Following an OFF1 or OFF3 command, however, the inverter frequency will ramp down to zero using the
ramp time set in P1121 (P1135 for OFF3).
Notice: The minimum and maximum motor frequencies (P1080 and P1082) as well as the skip frequencies
(P1091 to P1094) remain active on the inverter output.
However, enabling skip frequencies with PID control can produce instabilities.
Note: The PID setpoint source is selected using P2253.
The PID setpoint and the PID feedback signal are interpreted as [%] values (not [Hz]).
The output of the PID controller is displayed as [%] and then normalized into [Hz] through P2000 (refer-
ence frequency) when PID is enabled.
The reverse command is not active when PID is active.
Attention: P2200 and P2803 are locked parameter against each other. PID and FFB of the same data set
cannot be active at same time.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
P2201[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint 1 [%] -200.00 - 200.00 10.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
Defines fixed PID setpoint 1. There are 2 types of fixed frequencies:
1. Direct selection (P2216 = 1):
– In this mode of operation 1 Fixed Frequency selector (P2220 to P2223) selects 1 fixed frequency.
– If several inputs are active together, the selected frequencies are summed. E.g.: PID-FF1 + PID-
FF2 + PID-FF3 + PID-FF4.
2. Binary coded selection (P2216 = 2):
– Up to 16 different fixed frequency values can be selected using this method.
Dependency: P2200 = 1 required in user access level 2 to enable setpoint source.
Note: You may mix different types of frequencies; however, remember that they will be summed if selected
together.
P2201 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.
Defines fixed PID setpoint 2.
Note: See P2201
Note: See P2201
Note: See P2201
Note: See P2201
Note: See P2201
Note: See P2201
Note: See P2201

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
Note: See P2201
Note: See P2201
Note: See P2201
Note: See P2201
Note: See P2201
Note: See P2201
Note: See P2201
P2216[0...2] Fixed PID setpoint mode 1-2 1 T - DDS U16 2
Fixed frequencies for PID setpoint can be selected in two different modes. P2216 defines the mode.
1 Direct selection
2 Binary selection
P2220[0...2] BI: Fixed PID setpoint 0 - 4294967295 722.3 T - CDS U32 3
select bit 0
Defines command source of fixed PID setpoint selection bit 0.
select bit 1
select bit 2

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
select bit 3
r2224 CO: Actual fixed PID - - - - - Float 2
setpoint [%]
Displays total output of PID fixed setpoint selection.
r2225.0 BO: PID fixed frequency - - - - - U16 3
status
Displays the status of PID fixed frequencies.
00 Status of FF Yes No
P2231[0...2] PID-MOP mode 0-3 0 U, T - DDS U16 2
PID-MOP mode specification
00 Setpoint store active Yes No
01 No On-state for MOP necessary Yes No
Note: Defines the operation mode of the motorized potentiometer. See P2240.
P2232 Inhibit reverse direction of 0 - 1 1 T - - U16 2
PID-MOP
Inhibits reverse setpoint selection of the PID-MOP.
0 Reverse direction is allowed
1 Reverse direction inhibited
Note: Setting 0 enables a change of motor direction using the motor potentiometer setpoint (increase/decrease
frequency).
P2235[0...2] BI: Enable PID-MOP (UP- 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 3
cmd)
Defines source of UP command.
Dependency: To change setpoint:
- Configure a digital input as source
- Use UP/DOWN key on operator panel.
Notice: If this command is enabled by short pulses of less than 1 second, the frequency is changed in steps of
0.2 % (P0310). When the signal is enabled longer than 1 second the ramp generator accelerates with the
rate of P2247.
P2236[0...2] BI: Enable PID-MOP 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 3
(DOWN-cmd)
Defines source of DOWN command.
Notice: If this command is enabled by short pulses of less than 1 second, the frequency is changed in steps of
0.2 % (P0310). When the signal is enabled longer than 1 second the ramp generator decelerates with the
rate of P2248.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
P2240[0...2] Setpoint of PID-MOP [%] -200.00 - 200.00 10.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
Setpoint of the motor potentiometer. Allows user to set a digital PID setpoint in [%].
Note: P2240 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex.
The start value gets active (for the MOP output) only at the start of the MOP. P2231 influences the start
value behavior as follows:
• P2231 = 0:
P2240 gets immediately active in the OFF-state and when changed in the ON-state, it gets active after
the next OFF and ON cycle.
• P2231 = 1:
The last MOP output before stop is stored as starting value, since storing is selected, so a change of
P2240 while in ON-state has no effect. In OFF-state P2240 can be changed.
• P2231 = 2:
The MOP is active every time, so the change of P2240 affects after the next power-cycle or a change
of P2231 to 0.
• P2231 = 3:
The last MOP output before power down is stored as starting value, since the MOP is active inde-
pendent from the ON-command, a change of P2240 has only effect in the case of a change of P2231.
P2241[0...2] BI: PID-MOP select set- 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 3
point auto/manu
Sets the signal source to change over from manual to automatic mode. If using the motorized potentiome-
ter in the manual mode the setpoint is changed using two signals for up and down, e.g. P2235 and P2236.
If using the automatic mode the setpoint must be interconnected via the connector input (P2242).
0: manually
1: automatically
Notice: Refer to: P2235, P1036, P2242
P2242[0...2] CI: PID-MOP auto set- 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 3
point
Sets the signal source for the setpoint of the motorized potentiometer if automatic mode P2241 is select-
ed.
P2243[0...2] BI: PID-MOP accept 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 3
rampgenerator setpoint
Sets the signal source for the setting command to accept the setting value for the motorized potentiome-
ter. The value becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command.
P2244[0...2] CI: PID-MOP rampgener- 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 3
ator setpoint
Sets the signal source for the setpoint value for the MOP. The value becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of
the setting command.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
r2245 CO: PID-MOP input fre- - - - - - Float 3
quency of the RFG [%]
Displays the motorized potentiometer setpoint before it passed the PID-MOP RFG.
P2247[0...2] PID-MOP ramp-up time of 0.00 - 1000.0 10.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
the RFG [s]
Sets the ramp-up time for the internal PID-MOP ramp-function generator. The setpoint is changed from
zero up to limit defined in P1082 within this time.
P2248[0...2] PID-MOP ramp-down 0.00 - 1000.0 10.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
time of the RFG [s]
Sets the ramp-down time for the internal PID-MOP ramp-function generator. The setpoint is changed from
limit defined in P1082 down to zero within this time.
r2250 CO: Output setpoint of - - - PERCE - Float 2
PID-MOP [%] NT
Displays output setpoint of motor potentiometer.
P2251 PID mode 0-1 0 T - - U16 3
Enables function of PID controller.
0 PID as setpoint
1 PID as trim
Dependency: Active when PID loop is enabled (see P2200).
P2253[0...2] CI: PID setpoint 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T 4000H CDS U32 2
Defines setpoint source for PID setpoint input. This parameter allows the user to select the source of the
PID setpoint. Normally, a digital setpoint is selected either using a fixed PID setpoint or an active setpoint.
P2254[0...2] CI: PID trim source 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T 4000H CDS U32 3
Selects trim source for PID setpoint. This signal is multiplied by the trim gain and added to the PID set-
point.
Setting: 755 Analog input 1
2224 Fixed PI setpoint (see P2201 to P2207)
2250 Active PI setpoint (see P2240)
P2255 PID setpoint gain factor 0.00 - 100.00 100.00 U, T - - Float 3
Gain factor for PID setpoint. The PID setpoint input is multiplied by this gain factor to produce a suitable
ratio between setpoint and trim.
P2256 PID trim gain factor 0.00 - 100.00 100.00 U, T - - Float 3
Gain factor for PID trim. This gain factor scales the trim signal, which is added to the main PID setpoint.
P2257 Ramp-up time for PID 0.00 - 650.00 1.00 U, T - - Float 2
setpoint [s]
Sets the ramp-up time for the PID setpoint.
Dependency: P2200 = 1 (PID control is enabled) disables normal ramp-up time (P1120). PID ramp time is effective only
on PID setpoint and active only when PID setpoint is changed or when RUN command is given (when PID
setpoint uses this ramp to reach its value from 0%).
Notice: Setting the ramp-up time too short may cause the inverter to trip, on overcurrent for example.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list
P2258 Ramp-down time for PID 0.00 - 650.00 1.00 U, T - - Float 2
setpoint [s]
Sets ramp-down time for PID setpoint.
Dependency: P2200 = 1 (PID control is enabled) disables normal ramp-down time (P1121). PID setpoint ramp effective
only on PID setpoint changes. P1121 (ramp-down time) and P1135 (OFF3 ramp-down time) define the
ramp times used after OFF1 and OFF3 respectively.
Notice: Setting the ramp-down time too short can cause the inverter to trip on overvoltage F2/overcurrent F1.
r2260 CO: PID setpoint after - - - - - Float 2
PID-RFG [%]
Displays total active PID setpoint after PID-RFG.
P2261 PID setpoint filter time 0.00 - 60.00 0.00 U, T - - Float 3
constant [s]
Sets a time constant for smoothing the PID setpoint.
Note: P2261 = 0 = no smoothing.
r2262 CO: Filtered PID setpoint - - - - - Float 3
after RFG [%]
Displays filtered PID setpoint after PID-RFG. r2262 is the result of the value in r2260, filtered with PT1-
Filter and the time constant given in P2261.
P2263 PID controller type 0-1 0 T - - U16 3
Sets the PID controller type.
0 D component on feedback signal
1 D component on error signal
P2264[0...2] CI: PID feedback 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T 4000H CDS U32 2
Selects the source of the PID feedback signal.
Setting: See P2254
Note: When analog input is selected, offset and gain can be implemented using P0756 to P0760 (analog input
scaling).
P2265 PID feedback filter time 0.00 - 60.00 0.00 U, T - - Float 2
constant [s]
Defines time constant for PID feedback filter.
r2266 CO: PID filtered feedback - - - - - Float 2
[%]
Displays PID feedback signal.
P2267 Maximum value for PID -200.00 - 200.00 100.00 U, T - - Float 3
feedback [%]
Sets the upper limit for the value of the feedback signal.
Notice: When PID is enabled (P2200 = 1) and the signal rises above this value, the inverter will trip with F222.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2268 Minimum value for PID -200.00 - 200.00 0.00 U, T - - Float 3
feedback [%]
Sets lower limit for value of feedback signal.
Notice: When PID is enabled (P2200 = 1) and the signal drops below this value, the inverter will trip with F221.
P2269 Gain applied to PID 0.00 - 500.00 100.00 U, T - - Float 3
feedback
Allows the user to scale the PID feedback as a percentage value. A gain of 100.0 % means that feedback
signal has not changed from its default value.
P2270 PID feedback function 0-3 0 U, T - - U16 3
selector
Applies mathematical functions to the PID feedback signal, allowing multiplication of the result by P2269.
0 Disabled
1 Square root (root(x))
2 Square (x*x)
3 Cube (x*x*x)
P2271 PID transducer type 0-1 0 U, T - - U16 2
Allows the user to select the transducer type for the PID feedback signal.
0 Disabled
1 Inversion of PID feedback signal
Notice: It is essential that you select the correct transducer type. If you are unsure whether 0 or 1 is applicable,
you can determine the correct type as follows:
1. Disable the PID function (P2200 = 0).
2. Increase the motor frequency while measuring the feedback signal.
3. If the feedback signal increases with an increase in motor frequency, the PID transducer type should be 0.
4. If the feedback signal decreases with an increase in motor frequency the PID transducer type should
be set to 1.
r2272 CO: PID scaled feed- - - - - - Float 2
back [%]
Displays PID scaled feedback signal.
r2273 CO: PID error [%] - - - - - Float 2
Displays PID error (difference) signal between setpoint and feedback signals.
P2274 PID derivative time [s] 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 U, T - - Float 2
Sets PID derivative time.
P2274 = 0: The derivative term does not have any effect (it applies a gain of 1).
P2280 PID proportional gain 0.000 - 65.000 3.000 U, T - - Float 2
Allows user to set proportional gain for PID controller. The PID controller is implemented using the stand-
ard model. For best results, enable both P and I terms.
Dependency: P2280 = 0 (P term of PID = 0): The I term acts on the square of the error signal.
P2285 = 0 (I term of PID = 0): PID controller acts as a P or PD controller respectively.
Note: If the system is prone to sudden step changes in the feedback signal, P term should normally be set to a
small value (0.5) with a faster I term for optimum performance.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2285 PID integral time [s] 0.000 - 60.000 0.000 U, T - - Float 2
Sets integral time constant for PID controller.
Note: See P2280
P2291 PID output upper limit -200.00 - 200.00 100.00 U, T - - Float 2
[%]
Sets upper limit for PID controller output
Dependency: If f_max (P1082) is greater than P2000 (reference frequency), either P2000 or P2291 (PID output upper
limit) must be changed to achieve f_max.
Note: P2291 = 100 % corresponds to 4000 hex (as defined by P2000 (reference frequency)).
P2292 PID output lower limit [%] -200.00 - 200.00 0.00 U, T - - Float 2
Sets lower limit for the PID controller output.
Dependency: A negative value allows bipolar operation of PID controller.
P2293 Ramp-up/-down time of 0.00 - 100.00 1.00 U, T - - Float 3
PID limit [s]
Sets maximum ramp rate on output of PID.
When PI is enabled, the output limits are ramped up from 0 to the limits set in P2291 (PID output upper
limit) and P2292 (PID output lower limit). Limits prevent large step changes appearing on the output of the
PID when the inverter is started. Once the limits have been reached, the PID controller output is instanta-
neous. These ramp times are used whenever a RUN command is issued.
Note: If an OFF1 or OFF 3 are issued, the inverter output frequency ramps down as set in P1121 (ramp-down
time) or P1135 (OFF3 ramp-down time).
r2294 CO: Actual PID output - - - - - Float 2
[%]
Displays PID output.
P2295 Gain applied to PID -100.00 - 100.00 100.00 U, T - - Float 3
output
Allows the user to scale the PID output as a percentage value. A gain of 100.0 % means that output signal
has not changed from its default value.
Note: The ramp rate applied by the PID controller is clamped to a rate of 0.1s/100% to protect the inverter.
r2349 CO/BO: PID status word - 0 - - - U16 3
Displays PID status word.
00 PID disabled Yes No
01 PID limit reached Yes No

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2350 PID autotune enable 0-4 0 U, T - - U16 2
Enables autotune function of PID controller.
0 PID autotuning disabled
1 PID autotuning via Ziegler Nichols (ZN) standard
2 PID autotuning as 1 plus some overshoot (O/S)
3 PID autotuning as 2 little or no overshoot (O/S)
4 PID autotuning PI only, quarter damped response
Dependency: Active when PID loop is enabled (see P2200).
Note: • P2350 = 1
This is the standard Ziegler Nichols (ZN) tuning which should be a quarter damped response to a step.
• P2350 = 2
This tuning will give some overshoot (O/S) but should be faster than option 1.
• P2350 = 3
This tuning should give little or no overshoot but will not be as fast as option 2.
• P2350 = 4
This tuning only changes values of P and I and should be a quarter damped response.
The option to be selected depends on the application but broadly speaking option 1 will give a good re-
sponse, whereas if a faster response is desired option 2 should be selected.
If no overshoot is desired then option 3 is the choice. For cases where no D term is wanted then option 4
can be selected.
The tuning procedure is the same for all options. It is just the calculation of P and D values that is differ-
ent.
After autotune this parameter is set to zero (autotune completed).
P2354 PID tuning timeout 60 - 65000 240 U, T - - U16 3
length [s]
This parameter determines the time that the autotuning code will wait before aborting a tuning run if no
oscillation has been obtained.
P2355 PID tuning offset [%] 0.00 - 20.00 5.00 U, T - - Float 3
Sets applied offset and deviation for PID autotuning.
Note: This can be varied depending on plant conditions e.g. a very long system time constant might require a
larger value.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2360[0...2] Enable cavitation protection 0-2 0 U, T - DDS U16 2
Cavitation protection enabled.
Will generate a fault/warning when cavitation conditions are deemed to be present.
0 Disable
1 Fault
2 Warn
P2361[0...2] Cavitation threshold [%] 0.00 - 200.00 40.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
Feedback threshold over which a fault/warning is triggered, as a percentage (%).
P2362[0...2] Cavitation protection time 0 - 65000 30 U, T - DDS U16 2
[s]
The time for which cavitation conditions have to be present before a fault/warning is triggered.
P2365[0...2] Hibernation enable/disable 0-2 0 U, T - DDS U16 2
Select or disable the hibernation functionality.
0 Disabled
1 Frequency hibernation (The inverter uses the frequency setpoint as the
wakeup trigger. You can use P2366 and P2367 to configure this function.)
2 PID hibernation (The inverter uses the PID error as the wakeup trigger. You
can use P2390, P2391, and P2392 to configure this function.)

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2366[0...2] Delay before stopping 0 - 254 5 U, T - DDS U16 3
motor [s]
With hibernation enabled. If the frequency demand drops below the threshold there is a delay of P2366
seconds before the inverter is stopped.
P2367[0...2] Delay before starting 0 - 254 2 U, T - DDS U16 3
motor [s]
With hibernation enabled. If pulses have been disabled by the unit going into hibernation, and the fre-
quency demand has increased to above the hibernation threshold, there will be a delay of P2367 seconds
before the inverter restarts.
P2370[0...2] Motor staging stop mode 0 - 1 0 T - DDS U16 3
Selects stop mode for external motors when motor staging is in use.
0 Normal stop
1 Sequence stop
P2371[0...2] Motor staging configura- 0 - 3 0 T - DDS U16 3
tion
Selects configuration of external motors (M1, M2) used for motor staging feature.
0 Motor staging disabled
1 M1 = 1 x MV, M2 = Not fitted
2 M1 = 1 x MV, M2 = 1 x MV
3 M1 = 1 x MV, M2 = 2 x MV
Caution: For this kind of motor application it is mandatory to disable negative frequency setpoint!
Note: Motor staging allows the control of up to 2 additional staged pumps or fans, based on a PID control sys-
tem.
The complete system consists of one pump controlled by the inverter with up to 2 further pumps/fans
controlled from contactors or motor starters.
The contactors or motor starter are controlled by outputs from the inverter.
The diagram below shows a typical pumping system.
A similar system could be set up using fans and air ducts, instead of pumps and pipes.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

By default the motor states are controlled from digital outputs.
In the text below, the following terminology will be used:
MV - Variable speed (Inverter controlled motor)
M1 - Motor switched with digital output 1
M2 - Motor switched with digital output 2
Staging: The process of starting one of the fixed speed motors.
De-staging: The process of stopping one of the fixed speed motors.
When the inverter is running at maximum frequency, and the PID feedback indicates that a higher speed
is required, the inverter switches on (stages) one of the digital output controlled motors M1 and M2.
At the same time, to keep the controlled variable as constant as possible, the inverter must ramp down to
minimum frequency.
Therefore, during the staging process, PID control must be suspended (see P2378 and diagram below)
When the inverter is running at minimum frequency, and the PID feedback indicates that a lower speed is
required, the inverter switches off (de-stages) one of the digital output controlled motors M1 and M2.
In this case, the inverter must ramp from minimum frequency to maximum frequency outside of PID con-
trol (see P2378 and diagram below).
P2372[0...2] Motor staging cycling 0-1 0 T - DDS U16 3

Enables motor cycling for the motor staging feature.
When enabled, the motor selected for staging/destaging is based on the hours run counter P2380. When
staging, the motor with the least hours is switched on. When destaging, the motor with most hours is
switched off.
If staged motors are different sizes the choice of motor is first based on required motor size, and then if
there is still a choice, on hours run.
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
P2373[0...2] Motor staging hysteresis 0.0 - 200.0 20.0 U, T PERCE DDS Float 3
[%] NT
P2373 as a percentage of PID setpoint that PID error r2273 must be exceeded before staging delay
starts.
Note: The value of this parameter must always be smaller than delay override lockout timer P2377.
P2374[0...2] Motor staging delay [s] 0 - 650 30 U, T - DDS U16 3
Time that PID error r2273 must exceed motor staging hysteresis P2373 before staging occurs.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2375[0...2] Motor destaging delay [s] 0 - 650 30 U, T - DDS U16 3
Time that PID error r2273 must exceed motor staging hysteresis P2373 before destaging occurs.
P2376[0...2] Motor staging delay 0.0 - 200.0 25.0 U, T PERCE DDS Float 3
override [%] NT
P2376 as a percentage of PID setpoint. When the PID error r2273 exceeds this value, a motor is
staged/destaged irrespective of the delay timers.
Note: The value of this parameter must always be larger than staging hysteresis P2373.
P2377[0...2] Motor staging lockout 0 - 650 30 U, T - DDS U16 3
timer [s]
Time for which delay override is prevented after a motor has been staged or destaged.
This prevents a second staging event immediately after a first, being caused by the transient conditions
after the first staging event.
P2378[0...2] CO: Motor staging fre- 0.0 - 120.0 50.0 U, T PERCE DDS Float 3
quency f_st [%] NT
The frequency as a percentage of maximum frequency. During a (de) staging event, as the inverter ramps
from maximum to minimum frequency (or vice versa) this is the frequency at which the digital output is
switched.
This is illustrated by the following diagrams.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r2379.0...1 CO/BO: Motor staging - - - - - U16 3

status word
Output word from the motor staging feature that allows external connections to be made.
00 Start motor 1 Yes No
01 Start motor 2 Yes No
P2380[0...2] Motor staging hours run 0.0 - 429496720.0 0.0 U, T - - Float 3
[h]
Displays hours run for external motors. To reset the running hours, set the value to zero, any other value
is ignored.
Example: P2380 = 0.1 ==> 6 min
60 min = 1 h
Index: [0] Motor 1 hrs run
[1] Motor 2 hrs run
[2] Not used

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2390 PID hibernation setpoint -200.00 - 200.00 0 U, T - - Float 3
[%]
When the value of P2365 is set to 2 and the inverter under PID control drops below the PID hibernation
setpoint, the PID hibernation timer P2391 is started. When the PID hibernation timer has expired, the
inverter is ramped down to stop and enters the PID hibernation mode.
Notice: PID hibernation is an added feature to enhance PID functionality, and switches off the motor when the
inverter is running at low setpoint. Note that this is an independent function from staging, although it can
be used together with staging.
Note: If PID hibernation setpoint is 0, the PID hibernation function is disabled. The PID hibernation setpoint
should be greater than the minimum frequency (P1080). Reverse operation is not allowed with the PID
hibernation mode.
P2391 PID hibernation timer [s] 0 - 254 0 T - - U16 3
When the PID hibernation timer P2391 has expired, the inverter is ramped down to stop and enters the
PID hibernation mode.
P2392 PID hibernation restart -200.00 - 200.00 0 T - - Float 3
setpoint [%]
While in PID hibernation mode, the PID controller continues to generate the error r2273. Once this reach-
es the restart point P2392, the inverter immediately ramps to the setpoint calculated by the PID controller.
r2399 CO/BO: PID hibernation - 0 - - - U16 3
status word
Displays PID hibernation status word.
Bit 00 Not used Yes No
Bit 01 PID hibernation enabled (PID hibernation is enabled and Yes No
the inverter is not in PID hibernation.)
Bit 02 Hibernation active (PID hibernation is enabled and the Yes No
inverter is in PID hibernation.)
P2800 Enable FFBs 0-1 0 U, T - - U16 3
Free function blocks (FFB) are enabled in two steps:
1. P2800 enables all free function blocks (P2800 = 1).
2. P2801 and P2802 respectively, enable each free function block individually. Additionally fast free func-
tion blocks can be enabled via P2803 = 1.
0 Disable
1 Enable
Dependency: All active function blocks will be calculated in every 128 ms, fast free function blocks in every 8 ms.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2801[0...16] Activate FFBs 0-6 0 U, T - - U16 3
P2801 and P2802 respectively, enable each free function block individually (P2801[x] > 0 or P2802[x] >
0). In addition, P2801 and P2802 determine the chronological order of each function block by setting the
level in which the free function block will work.
The following table shows that the priority decreases from right to left and from top to bottom.
0 Not Active
1 Level 1
2 Level 2
... ...
6 Level 6
Example: P2801[3] = 2, P2801[4] = 2, P2802[3] = 3, P2802[4] = 2
FFBs will be calculated in following order: P2802[3], P2801[3] , P2801[4], P2802[4]
Index: [0] Enable AND 1
[1] Enable AND 2
[2] Enable AND 3
[3] Enable OR 1
[4] Enable OR 2
[5] Enable OR 3
[6] Enable XOR 1
[7] Enable XOR 2
[8] Enable XOR 3
[9] Enable NOT 1
[10] Enable NOT 2
[11] Enable NOT 3
[12] Enable D-FF 1
[13] Enable D-FF 2
[14] Enable RS-FF 1
[15] Enable RS-FF 2
[16] Enable RS-FF 3

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

Dependency: Set P2800 to 1 to enable function blocks.
All active function blocks will be calculated in every 128 ms, if set to level 1 to 3. Fast free function blocks
(level 4 to 6) will be calculated in every 8 ms.
P2802[0...13] Activate FFBs 0-3 0 U, T - - U16 3
Enables free function blocks (FFB) and determines the chronological order of each function block. See P2801.
0 Not Active
1 Level 1
2 Level 2
3 Level 3
Index: [0] Enable timer 1
[1] Enable timer 2
[2] Enable timer 3
[3] Enable timer 4
[4] Enable ADD 1
[5] Enable ADD 2
[6] Enable SUB 1
[7] Enable SUB 2
[8] Enable MUL 1
[9] Enable MUL 2
[10] Enable DIV 1
[11] Enable DIV 2
[12] Enable CMP 1
[13] Enable CMP 2
Dependency: Set P2800 to 1 to enable function blocks.
All active function blocks, enabled with P2802, will be calculated in every 128 ms.
P2803[0...2] Enable Fast FFBs 0-1 0 U, T - CDS U16 3
Fast free function blocks (FFB) are enabled in two steps:
1. P2803 enables the use of fast free function blocks (P2803 = 1).
2. P2801 enables each fast free function block individually and determines the chronological order
(P2801[x] = 4 to 6).
0 Disable
1 Enable
Dependency: All active fast function blocks will be calculated in every 8 ms.
Note: Attention: P2200 and P2803 are locked parameter against each other. PID and FFB of the same data set
cannot be active at same time.
P2810[0...1] BI: AND 1 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 3
P2810[0], P2810[1] define inputs of AND 1 element, output is r2811.
Index: [0] Binector input 0 (BI 0)

[1] Binector input 1 (BI 1)
Dependency: P2801[0] assigns the AND element to the processing sequence.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r2811.0 BO: AND 1 - - - - - U16 3
Output of AND 1 element. Displays and logic of bits defined in P2810[0], P2810[1].
00 Output of BO Yes No
P2812[0...1] BI: AND 2 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 3
P2812[0], 2812[1] define inputs of AND 2 element, output is r2813.
Index: See P2810
r2813.0 BO: AND 2 - - - - - U16 3
Output of AND 2 element. Displays and logic of bits defined in P2812[0], P2812[1]. See r2811 for the bit
field description.
P2814[0...1] BI: AND 3 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 3
P2814[0], P2814[1] define inputs of AND 3 element, output is r2815.
Index: See P2810
r2815.0 BO: AND 3 - - - - - U16 3
Output of AND 3 element. Displays and logic of bits defined in P2814[0], P2814[1]. See r2811 for the bit
field description.
P2816[0...1] BI: OR 1 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 3
P2816[0], P2816[1] define inputs of OR 1 element, output is r2817.
Index: See P2810

Dependency: P2801[3] assigns the OR element to the processing sequence.
r2817.0 BO: OR 1 - - - - - U16 3
Output of OR 1 element. Displays or logic of bits defined in P2816[0], P2816[1]. See r2811 for the bit field
description.
P2818[0...1] BI: OR 2 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 3
Index: See P2810

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r2819.0 BO: OR 2 - - - - - U16 3
description.
P2820[0...1] BI: OR 3 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 3
Index: See P2810
r2821.0 BO: OR 3 - - - - - U16 3
description.
P2822[0...1] BI: XOR 1 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 3
P2822[0], P2822[1] define inputs of XOR 1 element, output is r2823.
Index: See P2810

Dependency: P2801[6] assigns the XOR element to the processing sequence.
r2823.0 BO: XOR 1 - - - - - U16 3
Output of XOR 1 element. Displays exclusive-or logic of bits defined in P2822[0], P2822[1]. See r2811 for
the bit field description.
P2824[0...1] BI: XOR 2 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 3
Index: See P2810
r2825.0 BO: XOR 2 - - - - - U16 3
P2826[0...1] BI: XOR 3 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 3
Index: See P2810

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r2827.0 BO: XOR 3 - - - - - U16 3
P2828 BI: NOT 1 0- 0 U, T - - U32 3
4294967295
P2828 defines input of NOT 1 element, output is r2829.
Dependency: P2801[9] assigns the NOT element to the processing sequence.

r2829.0 BO: NOT 1 - - - - - U16 3
Output of NOT 1 element. Displays not logic of bit defined in P2828. See r2811 for the bit field descrip-
tion.
P2830 BI: NOT 2 0- 0 U, T - - U32 3
4294967295
r2831.0 BO: NOT 2 - - - - - U16 3
tion.
P2832 BI: NOT 3 0- 0 U, T - - U32 3
4294967295
r2833.0 BO: NOT 3 - - - - - U16 3
tion.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2834[0...3] BI: D-FF 1 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 3
P2834[0], P2834[1], P2834[2], P2834[3] define inputs of D-FlipFlop 1, outputs are r2835, r2836.
Index: [0] Binector input: Set

[1] Binector input: D input
[2] Binector input: Store pulse
[3] Binector input: Reset
Dependency: P2801[12] assigns the D-FlipFlop to the processing sequence.
r2835.0 BO: Q D-FF 1 - - - - - U16 3
Displays output of D-FlipFlop 1, inputs are defined in P2834[0], P2834[1], P2834[2], P2834[3]. See r2811
for the bit field description.
r2836.0 BO: NOT-Q D-FF 1 - - - - - U16 3
Displays Not-output of D-FlipFlop 1, inputs are defined in P2834[0], P2834[1], P2834[2], P2834[3]. See
P2837[0...3] BI: D-FF 2 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 3
P2837[0], P2837[1], P2837[2], P2837[3] define inputs of D-FlipFlop 2, outputs are r2838, r2839.
Index: See P2834
Dependency: P2801[13] assigns the D-FlipFlop to the processing sequence.
r2838.0 BO: Q D-FF 2 - - - - - U16 3
Displays output of D-FlipFlop 2, inputs are defined in P2837[0], P2837[1], P2837[2], P2837[3]. See r2811
for the bit field description.
r2839.0 BO: NOT-Q D-FF 2 - - - - - U16 3
Displays Not-output of D-FlipFlop 2, inputs are defined in P2837[0], P2837[1], P2837[2], P2837[3]. See

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2840[0...1] BI: RS-FF 1 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 3
P2840[0], P2840[1] define inputs of RS-FlipFlop 1, outputs are r2841, r2842.
Index: [0] Binector input: Set

[1] Binector input: Reset
Dependency: P2801[14] assigns the RS-FlipFlop to the processing sequence.
r2841.0 BO: Q RS-FF 1 - - - - - U16 3
Displays output of RS-FlipFlop 1, inputs are defined in P2840[0], P2840[1]. See r2811 for the bit field
description.
r2842.0 BO: NOT-Q RS-FF 1 - - - - - U16 3
Displays Not-output of RS-FlipFlop 1, inputs are defined in P2840[0], P2840[1]. See r2811 for the bit field
description.
P2843[0...1] BI: RS-FF 2 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 3
Index: See P2840
r2844.0 BO: Q RS-FF 2 - - - - - U16 3
description.
r2845.0 BO: NOT-Q RS-FF 2 - - - - - U16 3
description.
P2846[0...1] BI: RS-FF 3 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 3
Index: See P2840
r2847.0 BO: Q RS-FF 3 - - - - - U16 3
description.
r2848.0 BO: NOT-Q RS-FF 3 - - - - - U16 3
description.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2849 BI: Timer 1 0- 0 U, T - - U32 3
4294967295
Define input signal of timer 1. P2849, P2850, P2851 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2852, r2853.
Dependency: P2802[0] assigns the timer to the processing sequence.

P2850 Delay time of timer 1 [s] 0.0 - 9999.9 0.0 U, T - - Float 3
Defines delay time of timer 1. P2849, P2850, P2851 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2852, r2853.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2851 Mode timer 1 0 - 13 0 U, T - - U16 3
Selects mode of timer 1. P2849, P2850, P2851 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2852, r2853.
0 ON delay (seconds)
1 OFF delay (seconds)
2 ON/OFF delay (seconds)
3 Pulse generator (seconds)
10 ON delay (minutes)
11 OFF delay (minutes)
12 ON/OFF delay (minutes)
13 Pulse generator (minutes)
r2852.0 BO: Timer 1 - - - - - U16 3
Displays output of timer 1. P2849, P2850, P2851 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2852, r2853.
See r2811 for the bit field description.
r2853.0 BO: Nout timer 1 - - - - - U16 3
Displays Not-output of timer 1. P2849, P2850, P2851 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2852,
r2853. See r2811 for the bit field description.
P2854 BI: Timer 2 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 3
P2856 Mode timer 2 0 - 13 0 U, T - - U16 3
Selects mode of timer 2. P2854, P2855, P2856 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2857, r2858.
See P2851 for value description.
r2857.0 BO: Timer 2 - - - - - U16 3
r2858.0 BO: Nout timer 2 - - - - - U16 3
Displays Not-output of timer 2 P2854, P2855, P2856 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2857, r2858.
P2859 BI: Timer 3 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 3

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2861 Mode timer 3 0 - 13 0 U, T - - U16 3
Selects mode of timer 3. P2859, P2860, P2861 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2862, r2863. See
P2851 for value description.
r2862.0 BO: Timer 3 - - - - - U16 3
r2863.0 BO: Nout timer 3 - - - - - U16 3
P2864 BI: Timer 4 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - - U32 3
Define input signal of timer 4. P2864, P2865, P2866 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are P2867, P2868.
P2866 Mode timer 4 0 - 13 0 U, T - - U16 3
Selects mode of timer 4. P2864, P2865, P2866 are the inputs of the timer, outputs are r2867, r2868. See
P2851 for value description.
r2867.0 BO: Timer 4 - - - - - U16 3
r2868.0 BO: Nout timer 4 - - - - - U16 3
P2869[0...1] CI: ADD 1 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T 4000H - U32 3
Define inputs of Adder 1, result is in r2870.
Index: [0] Connector input 0 (CI 0)

[1] Connector input 1 (CI 1)
Dependency: P2802[4] assigns the Adder to the processing sequence.
r2870 CO: ADD 1 - - - - - Float 3
Result of Adder 1.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2871[0...1] CI: ADD 2 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T 4000H - U32 3
Define inputs of Adder 2, result is in r2872.
Index: See P2869
Dependency: P2802[5] assigns the Adder to the processing sequence.
r2872 CO: ADD 2 - - - - - Float 3
Result of Adder 2.
P2873[0...1] CI: SUB 1 0- 0 U, T 4000H - U32 3
4294967295
Define inputs of Subtractor 1, result is in r2874.
Index: See P2869

Dependency: P2802[6] assigns the Subtractor to the processing sequence.
r2874 CO: SUB 1 - - - - - Float 3
Result of Subtractor 1.
P2875[0...1] CI: SUB 2 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T 4000H - U32 3
Define inputs of Subtractor 2, result is in r2876.
Index: See P2869
Dependency: P2802[7] assigns the Subtractor to the processing sequence.
r2876 CO: SUB 2 - - - - - Float 3
Result of Subtractor 2.
P2877[0...1] CI: MUL 1 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T 4000H - U32 3
Define inputs of Multiplier 1, result is in r2878.
Index: See P2869

Dependency: P2802[8] assigns the Multiplier to the processing sequence.
r2878 CO: MUL 1 - - - - - Float 3
Result of Multiplier 1.
P2879[0...1] CI: MUL 2 0- 0 U, T 4000H - U32 3
4294967295
Define inputs of Multiplier 2, result is in r2880.
Index: See P2869
Dependency: P2802[9] assigns the Multiplier to the processing sequence.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r2880 CO: MUL 2 - - - - - Float 3
Result of Multiplier 2.
P2881[0...1] CI: DIV 1 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T 4000H - U32 3
Define inputs of Divider 1, result is in r2882.
Index: See P2869

Dependency: P2802[10] assigns the Divider to the processing sequence.
r2882 CO: DIV 1 - - - - - Float 3
Result of Divider 1.
P2883[0...1] CI: DIV 2 0- 0 U, T 4000H - U32 3
4294967295
Define inputs of Divider 2, result is in r2884.
Index: See P2869
Dependency: P2802[11] assigns the Divider to the processing sequence.
r2884 CO: DIV 2 - - - - - Float 3
Result of Divider 2.
P2885[0...1] CI: CMP 1 0- 0 U, T 4000H - U32 3
4294967295
Defines inputs of Comparator 1, output is r2886.
Index: See P2869

Dependency: P2802[12] assigns the Comparator to the processing sequence.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r2886.0 BO: CMP 1 - - - - - Float 3
Displays result bit of Comparator 1. See r2811 for the bit field description.
P2887[0...1] CI: CMP 2 0- 0 U, T 4000H - U32 3
4294967295
Defines inputs of Comparator 2, output is r2888.
Index: See P2869
Dependency: P2802[13] assigns the Comparator to the processing sequence.
r2888.0 BO: CMP 2 - - - - - U16 3
Displays result bit of Comparator 2. See r2811 for the bit field description.
P2889 CO: Fixed setpoint 1 in -200.00 - 0.00 U, T - - Float 3
[%] 200.00
Fixed percent setting 1.
P2890 CO: Fixed setpoint 2 in -200.00 - 0.00 U, T - - Float 3

[%] 200.00
Fixed percent setting 2.
P2940 BI: Release wobble 0- 0.0 T - - U32 2
function 4294967295
Defines the source to release the wobble function.
P2945 Wobble signal frequen- 0.001 - 1.000 T - - Float 2
cy [Hz] 10.000
Sets the frequency of the wobble signal.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P2946 Wobble signal ampli- 0.000 - 0.200 0.000 T - - Float 2
tude [%]
Sets the value for the amplitude of the wobble-signal as a proportion of the present ramp function genera-
tor (RFG) output. The value of P2946 is multiplied by the output value of the RFG then added to RFG out-
put.
For example, if the RFG output is 10 Hz, and P2946 has a value of 0.100, the wobble signal amplitude will
be 0.100 * 10 = 1 Hz. This means that the RFG output will therefore wobble between 9 Hz and 11 Hz.
P2947 Wobble signal decre- 0.000 - 1.000 0.000 T - - Float 2
ment step
Sets the value for decrement step at the end of the positive signal period. The amplitude of the step is
dependant upon the signal amplitude as follows:
Amplitude of signal decrement step = P2947 * P2946
P2948 Wobble signal incre- 0.000 - 1.000 0.000 T - - Float 2
ment step
Sets the value for the increment step at the end of the negative signal period. The amplitude of the incre-
ment step is dependant upon the signal amplitude as follows:
Amplitude of signal increment step = P2948 * P2946
P2949 Wobble signal pulse 0 - 100 50 T - - U16 2
width [%]
Sets the relative widths of the rising and falling pulses. The value in P2949 sets the proportion of the wob-
ble period (determined by P2945) allocated to the rising pulse, the remainder of the time is allocation to the
falling pulse.
A value of 60% in P2949 means that 60% of the wobble period the wobble output will be rising. For the
remaining 40% of the wobble period the wobble output will be falling.
r2955 CO: Wobble signal - - - - - Float 2
output [%]
Displays the output of the wobble function.
r3113.0...15 CO/BO: Fault bit array - - - - - U16 1
Gives information about actual fault.
00 Inverter error Yes No
01 Power line failure Yes No
02 Intermediate circuit power voltage Yes No
03 Error power electronics Yes No
04 Inverter overtemperature Yes No
05 Earth leakage Yes No
06 Motor overload Yes No
07 Bus fault Yes No
09 Reserved Yes No
10 Fault internal communication Yes No
11 Motor current limit Yes No
12 Supply failure Yes No
13 Reserved Yes No
14 Reserved Yes No
15 Other error Yes No

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

r3237[0...1] CO: Calculated rms DC - 0 - - - Float 4
ripple voltage [V]
Displays calculated rms dc-link ripple voltage.
Index: [0] Ripple Volts
[1] Unfiltered Volts
P3350[0...2] Super torque modes 0-3 0 T - - U16 2
Selects the super torque function. Three different super torque modes are available:
• Super Torque - applies a pulse of torque for a given time to help start the motor
• Hammer Start - applies a sequence of torque pulses to help start the motor
• Blockage Clearing - performs a reverse-forward operation to clear a pump blockage
Super Torque Operation:

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

Hammer Start Operation:
Blockage Clearing Operation:

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

0 Super torque modes disabled
1 Super torque enabled
2 Hammer start enabled
3 Blockage clearing enabled
Note: When the value of P3350 is changed, the value of P3353 is changed as follows:
• P3350 = 2: P3353 = 0.0s
• P3350 ≠ 2: P3353 = default
The ramp time of 0s gives an additional 'kicking' effect when hammer start is in use.
This setting can be overridden by the operator.
If blockage clearing mode is enabled (P3350 = 3), make sure that reverse direction is not inhibited, i.e.
P1032 = P1110 = 0.
P3351[0...2] BI: Super torque enable 0 - 4294967295 0 T - CDS U32 2
Defines source of the super torque enable when P3352 = 2.
Dependency: Applies only when P3352 = 2.
P3352[0...2] Super torque startup 0-2 1 T - - U16 2
mode
Defines when the super torque function becomes active.
0 Enabled on first run after power-up
1 Enabled on every run
2 Enabled by digital input
Index: See P3350
Dependency: If P3352 = 2, enable source is defined by P3351
P3353[0...2] Super torque ramp time 0.0 - 650.0 5.0 T - - Float 2
[s]
Defines the ramp time to be used for all super torque functions. Overrides the P1120/P1060 when inverter
is ramping to super torque/hammer start frequency (P3354) or the blockage clearing frequency (P3361).
Index: See P3350
Dependency: The value of this parameter is changed by the setting of P3350.
See the description of P3350.
P3354[0...2] Super torque frequency 0.0 - 550.0 5.0 T - - Float 2
[Hz]
Defines the frequency at which the additional boost is applied for super torque and hammer start modes.
Index: See P3350
P3355[0...2] Super torque boost 0.0 - 200.0 150.0 T PERCEN - Float 2
level [%] T
The magnitude of the Super Torque boost is calculated as follows:
V_ST = P0305 * Rsadj * (P3355/100)
Note:

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

Index: See P3350
Dependency: Up to 200% of rated motor current (P0305) or limit of inverter.
Note: The Super Torque boost is calculated in the same way as Continuous Boost (P1310). As the stator re-
sistance is used, the calculated voltage is only accurate at 0 Hz. Thereafter, it will vary in the same way as
Continuous Boost.
Setting in P0640 (motor overload factor [%]) limits the boost.
P3356[0...2] Super torque boost time 0.0 - 20.0 5.0 T - - Float 2
[s]
Sets the time for which the additional boost will be applied, when the output frequency is held at P3354 Hz.
Index: See P3350
P3357[0...2] Hammer start boost 0.0 - 200.0 150.0 T PERCEN - Float 2
level [%] T
The magnitude of the Hammer Start boost is calculated as follows:
V_HS = P0305 * Rsadj * (P3357/100)
Note:
Index: See P3350
Dependency: Up to 200% of rated motor current (P0305) or limit of inverter.
Note: The Hammer Start boost is calculated in the same way as Continuous Boost (P1310). As the stator re-
sistance is used, the calculated voltage is only accurate at 0Hz. Thereafter, it will vary in the same way as
Continuous Boost.
Setting in P0640 (motor overload factor [%]) limits the boost.
P3358[0...2] Number of hammer cycles 1 - 10 5 C, T - - U16 2
The number of times the hammer start boost level (P3357) is applied.
Index: See P3350
P3359[0...2] Hammer on time [ms] 0 - 1000 300 T - - U16 2
Time for which the additional boost is applied for each repetition.
Index: See P3350
Dependency: The time must be at least 3 x motor magnetization time (P0346).
P3360[0...2] Hammer off Time [ms] 0 - 1000 100 T - - U16 2
Time for which the additional boost is removed for each repetition.
Index: See P3350
Note: During this time, the boost level drops to the level defined by P1310 (continuous boost).
P3361[0...2] Blockage clearing fre- 0.0 - 550.0 5.0 T - - Float 2
quency [Hz]
Defines the frequency at which the inverter runs in the opposite direction to the setpoint during the block-
age clearing reverse sequence.
Index: See P3350
P3362[0...2] Blockage clearing re- 0.0 - 20.0 5.0 T - - Float 2
verse time [s]
Sets the time for which the inverter runs in the opposite direction to the setpoint during the reverse se-
quence.
Index: See P3350

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P3363[0...2] Enable rapid ramp 0-1 0 T - - U16 2
Selects whether the inverter ramps to, or starts directly from, the blockage clearing frequency (P3361).
0 Disable rapid ramp for blockage clearing
1 Enable rapid ramp for blockage clearing
Index: See P3350
Note: If P3363 = 1, the output jumps to the reverse frequency - this introduces a "kicking" effect which helps to
clear the blockage.
P3364[0...2] Number of blockage 1 - 10 1 T - - U16 2
clearing cycles
The number of times the blockage clearing reversing cycle is repeated.
Index: See P3350
r3365 CO/BO: Status word: - - - - - U16 2
super torque
Shows the operational status of the Super Torque function, while active.
00 Super Torque Active Yes No
01 Super Torque Ramping Yes No
02 Super Torque Boost On Yes No
03 Super Torque Boost Off Yes No
04 Blockage Clearing Reverse On Yes No
05 Blockage Clearing Reverse Off Yes No
P3852[0...2] BI: Enable frost protec- 0 - 4294967295 0 U, T - CDS U32 2
tion
Defines command source of protection enable command. If binary input is equal to one, then protection will
be initiated. If inverter is stopped and protection signal becomes active, protection measure is applied as
follows:
• If P3853 ≠ 0, frost protection is applied by applying the given frequency to the motor
• If P3853 = 0, and P3854 ≠ 0, condensation protection is applied by applying the given current to the
motor
Note: The protection function may be overridden under the following circumstances:
• If inverter is running and protection signal becomes active, signal is ignored
• If inverter is turning motor due to active protection signal and a RUN command is received, RUN com-
mand overrides frost signal
P3853[0...2] Frost protection fre- 0.00 - 550.00 5.00 U, T - DDS Float 2
quency [Hz]
The frequency applied to the motor when frost protection is active.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P3854[0...2] Condensation protec- 0 - 250 100 U, T - DDS U16 2
tion current [%]
The DC current (as a percentage of nominal current) which is applied to the motor when condensation
protection is active.
P3900 End of quick commis- 0-3 0 C(1) - - U16 1
sioning
Performs calculations necessary for optimized motor operation. After completion of calculation, P3900 and
P0010 (parameter groups for commissioning) are automatically reset to their original value 0.
0 No quick commissioning
1 End quick commissioning with factory reset
2 End quick commissioning
3 End quick commissioning only for motor data
Note: P3900 = 1:
When setting 1 is selected, only the parameter settings carried out via the commissioning menu "Quick
commissioning" are retained; all other parameter changes, including the I/O settings, are lost. Motor calcu-
lations are also performed.
P3900 = 2:
When setting 2 is selected, only those parameters, which depend on the parameters in the commissioning
menu "Quick commissioning" (P0010 = 1) are calculated. The I/O settings are also reset to default and the
motor calculations performed.
P3900 = 3:
When setting 3 is selected, only the motor and controller calculations are performed. Exiting quick commis-
sioning with this setting saves time (for example, if only motor rating plate data have been changed).
Calculates a variety of motor parameters, overwriting previous values. These include P0344 (motor
weight), P0350 (stator resistance), P2000 (reference frequency), P2002 (reference current).
When transferring P3900, the inverter uses its processor to carry out internal calculations.
Communications - both via USS as well as via the Fieldbus - are interrupted for the time that it takes to
make these calculations. This can result in the following error messages at the connected SIMATIC S7
control (communications via Fieldbus):
• Parameter fault 30
• Inverter fault 70
• Inverter fault 75
r3930[0...4] Inverter data version - - - - - U16 3
Displays the A5E number and the inverter data versions.
Index: [0] A5E 1st 4 digits
[1] A5E 2nd 4 digits
[2] Logistic Version
[3] Fixed Data Version
[4] Calib Data Version

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P3950 Access of hidden pa- 0 - 255 0 U, T - - U16 4
rameters
Accesses special parameters for development (expert only) and factory functionality (calibration parame-
ter).
r3954[0...12] CM info and GUI ID - - - - - U16 4
Used to classify firmware (only for SIEMENS internal purposes).
Index: [0] CM label (increment/branch)
[1] CM label (counter)
[2] CM label
[3...10] GUI ID
[11] GUI ID major release
[12] GUI ID minor release
r3978 BICO counter - - - - - U32 4
Counts the number of changed BICO links.
P3981 Reset active fault 0-1 0 T - - U16 4
Resets active faults when changed from 0 to 1.
0 No fault reset
1 Reset fault
Note: See P0947 (last fault code)
Automatically reset to 0.
P3984 Client telegram off time 100 - 10000 1000 T - - U16 3
[ms]
Defines time after which a fault will be generated (F73) if no telegram is received from the client.
Dependency: Setting 0 = watchdog disabled
r3986[0...1] Number of parameters - - - - - U16 4
Number of parameters on the inverter.
Index: [0] Read only
[1] Read & write
r4000 - r4064 Reserved
P7844 Acceptance test, con- 0-2 0 T - - U16 3
firmation
After an automatic download from the SD card at startup, this parameter will be automatically set to 1. Also
a fault F395 will be set.
With setting to P7844 = 0 you quit F395 and confirm the parameter settings. Setting this parameter to 2 is
only possible if an automatic download has been performed at startup. In this case the download will be
undone and the previously stored parameters will be enabled.
0 Acceptance test/confirmation OK
1 Acceptance test/confirmation is pending
2 Undo clone
Note: If no automatic download from the SD card has been performed during startup the setting 2 is not possible.
If the clone file contains user defaults and the cloning at startup is rejected with P7844 = 2, parameters are
set to the user defaults in the clone file instead of the previously saved values.

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

P8458 Clone control 0-4 2 C, T - - U16 3
This parameter specifies whether a cloning at startup will be performed. The File clone00.bin will be used.
If no SD card is inserted there will be a normal startup.
0 No startup cloning
1 Clone at startup once
2 Clone at startup always
3 Clone at startup once, except the motor data
4 Clone at startup always, except the motor data
Note: Default value is 2. After first cloning the parameter is set to 0. If an SD card is inserted without a valid file
the inverter will set a fault F61/F63/F64 which can only be cleared by a power-cycle. The fault is signaled
by a flashing RUN LED (Commissioning). The SF LED is not activated. P8458 will not be changed by per-
forming a factory reset.
P8553 Menu type 0-1 0 U, T - - U16 1
Selects whether to have menus with no text or menus with some text on the BOP.
0 Menus with no text
1 Menus with some text

Parameter list
8.2 Parameter list

Faults and alarms 9
Note
If there are multiple active faults and alarms, the BOP first displays all faults one after
another. Once all faults are displayed, it displays all alarms in succession.
9.1 Faults
Immediately when a fault occurs the fault icon shows and the display transitions to the
faults screen. The faults screen displays the fault number proceeded by "F".
Acknowledging/clearing faults
● To navigate through the current list of faults, press or .
● To view the inverter status at fault, press (> 2 s); to return to the fault code display,
press (< 2 s).
● To clear/acknowledge the fault, press or acknowledge externally if the inverter has
been set up so; to ignore the fault, press .
After you acknowledge or ignore the fault, the screen returns to the previous display. The
fault icon remains active until the fault is cleared/acknowledged.
Note
Under the following circumstances, the faults screen displays again:
• If the fault has not been cleared and the button is pressed, the faults screen displays
again.
• If there is no key press for 60 seconds.
If a fault is active and there has been no key press for 60 seconds, the backlight (P0070)
flashes.

Faults and alarms
9.1 Faults
Viewing inverter status at fault
Fault code list
Fault Cause Remedy

F1 • Motor power (P0307) does not Check the following:
Overcurrent correspond to the inverter power • Motor power (P0307) must correspond to inverter power
(r0206). (r0206).
• Motor lead short circuit • Cable length limits must not be exceeded.
• Earth faults • Motor cable and motor must have no short-circuits or earth
r0949 = 0: Hardware reported faults.
r0949 = 1: Software reported • Motor parameters must match the motor in use.
r0949 = 22: Hardware reported • Value of stator resistance (P0350) must be correct.
• Motor must not be obstructed or overloaded.
• Increase ramp-up time (P1120)
• Reduce starting boost level (P1312)
F2 • Main supply voltage too high Check the following:
Overvoltage • Motor is in regenerative mode • Supply voltage (P0210) must lie within limits indicated on
r0949 = 0: Hardware reported rating plate.
r0949 = 1 or 2: Software reported • Ramp-down time (P1121) must match inertia of load.
• Required braking power must lie within specified limits.
• Vdc controller must be enabled (P1240) and parameter-
ized properly.
Note:
Regenerative mode can be caused by fast ramp downs or if
the motor is driven by an active load.
Higher inertia requires longer ramp times; otherwise, apply
braking resistor.
F3 • Main supply failed. Check supply voltage.

Undervoltage • Shock load outside specified
limits.
r0949 = 0: Hardware reported
r0949 = 1 or 2: Software reported

324
Operating Instructions, 06/2018, A5E34559884-010
Faults and alarms
9.1 Faults
Fault Cause Remedy

F4 • Inverter overloaded Check the following:
Inverter over- • Ventilation inadequate • Load or load cycle too high?
temperature
• Pulse frequency too high • Motor power (P0307) must match inverter power (r0206)
• Surrounding temperature too high • Pulse frequency must be set to default value
• Fan inoperative • Surrounding temperature too high?
• Fan must turn when inverter is running
F5 • Inverter overloaded. Check the following:
Inverter I2 t • Load cycle too demanding. • Load cycle must lie within specified limits.
• Motor power (P0307) exceeds • Motor power (P0307) must match inverter power (r0206)
inverter power capability (r0206). Note: F5 cannot be cleared until the inverter overload utiliza-
tion (r0036) is lower than the inverter I2t warning (P0294).
F6 • Load at start-up is too high Check the following:
Chip temperature • Load step is too high • Load or load step too high?
rise exceeds criti-
• Ramp-up rate is too fast • Increase ramp-up time (P1120).
cal levels
• Motor power (P0307) must match inverter power (r0206).
• Use setting P0290 = 0 or 2 for preventing F6.
F11 • Motor overloaded Check the following:
Motor overtemper- • Load or load step too high?
ature
• Motor nominal overtemperatures (P0626 - P0628) must be
correct
• Motor temperature warning level (P0604) must match
• This fault may occur if small mo- Check the following:

tors are used and run at a fre- • Motor current is not in excess of the motor nominal current
quency below 15 Hz, even as indicated by the motor rating plate
though the motor temperature is
• Physical temperature of the motor lies within limits
within limits.
If these two conditions are satisfied, then set parameter
P0335 = 1.
F12 Wire breakage of inverter tempera-
Inverter temperature (heat sink) sensor.
ture signal lost
F20 The calculated DC ripple level has Check the mains supply wiring.
DC ripple too high exceeded the safe threshold. This is
commonly caused by loss of one of
the mains input phases.
F23 The calculated output ripple level Check the output wiring.
Output current has exceeded the safe threshold.
This is commonly caused by loss of
ripple too high one of the output phases.
F35 Auto restart attempts exceed value
Maximum number of P1211.
of auto restart
attempts exceeded

Faults and alarms
9.1 Faults
Fault Cause Remedy

F41 Motor data identification failed. Check the following:
Motor data identifi- • r0949 = 0: No load applied • r0949 = 0: is the motor connected to the inverter?
cation failure
• r0949 = 1: Current limit level • r0949 = 1 - 49: are the motor data in P0304 - P0311 cor-
reached during identification. rect?
• r0949 = 2: Identified stator re- • Check what type of motor wiring is required (star, delta).
sistance less than 0.1% or great-
er than 100%.
• r0949 = 30: Current controller at
voltage limit
• r0949 = 40: Inconsistency of
identified dataset, at least one
identification failed
Percentage values based on the
impedance Zb =
Vmot,nom/sqrt(3)/Imot,nom
F51 Read or write failure while access to • Must be power-cycled to cancel this bug as some parame-
Parameter EEPROM. This can also be caused ters may not be read correct.
EEPROM fault by the EEPROM being full, too many
parameters have been changed. • Factory reset and new parameterization, if power-cycle
does not remove fault.
• Change some parameters back to default values if the
EEPROM is full, then power-cycle.
• Change inverter.
Note:
• r0949 = 1: EEPROM full
• r0949 = 1000 + block No: reading data block failed
• r0949 = 2000 + block No: reading data block timeout
• r0949 = 3000 + block No: reading data block CRC failed
• r0949 = 4000 + block No: writing data block failed
• r0949 = 5000 + block No: writing data block timeout
• r0949 = 6000 + block No: writing data block verify failed
• r0949 = 7000 + block No: reading data block at wrong time
• r0949 = 8000 + block No: writing data block at wrong time
• r0949 = 9000 + block No: factory reset did not work be-
cause restart or power failure

Faults and alarms
9.1 Faults
Fault Cause Remedy

F52 Read failure for inverter information Note:
Inverter software or invalid data. • r0949 = 1: Failed reading inverter identity
fault • r0949 = 2: Inverter identity wrong
• r0949 = 3: Failed reading inverter version
• r0949 = 4: Inverter version wrong
• r0949 = 5: Start of Part 1 inverter data wrong
• r0949 = 6: Inverter number of temperature sensor wrong
• r0949 = 7: Inverter number of application wrong
• r0949 = 8: Start of Part 3 inverter data wrong
• r0949 = 9: Reading inverter data string wrong
• r0949 = 10: Inverter CRC failed
• r0949 = 11: Inverter is blank
• r0949 = 15: Failed CRC of inverter block 0
• r0949 = 20: Inverter invalid
• r0949 = 30: Directory size wrong
• r0949 = 31: Directory ID wrong
• r0949 = 32: Invalid block
• r0949 = 33: File size wrong
• r0949 = 34: Data section size wrong
F52 (continued) • r0949 = 35: Block section size wrong
• r0949 = 36: RAM size exceeded
• r0949 = 37: Parameter size wrong
• r0949 = 38: Device header wrong
• r0949 = 39: Invalid file pointer
• r0949 = 40: Scaling block version wrong
• r0949 = 41: Calibration block version wrong
• r0949 = 50: Wrong serial number format
• r0949 = 51: Wrong serial number format start
• r0949 = 52: Wrong serial number format end
• r0949 = 53: Wrong serial number format month
• r0949 = 54: Wrong serial number format day
• r0949 = 1000 + addr: Inverter read data failed
• r0949 = 2000 + addr: Inverter write data failed
• r0949 = 3000 + addr: Inverter read data wrong time
• r0949 = 4000 + addr: Inverter write data wrong time
• r0949 = 5000 + addr: Inverter read data invalid
• r0949 = 6000 + addr: Inverter write data invalid
• Power-cycle inverter
• Contact service department or change inverter

Faults and alarms
9.1 Faults
Fault Cause Remedy

F60 Internal communications failure. Check inverter.
Asic timeout Fault appears sporadically:
Note:
• r0949 = 0: Hardware reported link fail
• r0949 = 1: Software reported link fail
• r0949 = 6: Feedback is not disabled for reading inverter
data
• r0949 = 7: During inverter download, message didn't
transmit to disable feedback
• Communication failure due to EMC problems
• Check - and if necessary - improve EMC
• Use EMC filter
F61 Parameter cloning failed. • r0949 = 0: Use an SD card with FAT16 or FAT32 format ,
SD card parameter • r0949 = 0: The SD card is not or fit an SD card to the inverter.
cloning failed connected or the card type is in- • r0949 = 1: Check the SD card (for example, is the card
correct or the card failed to initial- memory full?) - format the card again to FAT16 or FAT32.
ize for automatic cloning. • r0949 = 2: Put the correct named file in the correct directo-
• r0949 = 1: Inverter data cannot ry /USER/SINAMICS/DATA.
be written to the card. • r0949 = 3: Make sure file is accessible - recreate file if
• r0949 = 2: Parameter cloning file possible.
is unavailable. • r0949 = 4: File has been changed - recreate file.
• r0949 = 3: The SD card cannot
read the file.
• r0949 = 4: Reading data from the
clone file failed (e.g., reading
failed, data or checksum wrong).
F62 File exists but the contents are not Recopy and ensure operation completes.
Parameter cloning valid control word corruption.
contents invalid
F63 File exists but was not the correct Ensure clone from compatible inverter type.
Parameter cloning inverter type.
contents incompat-
ible
F64 No Clone00.bin file in the correct If an automatic clone is required:
Inverter attempted directory /USER/SINAMICS/DATA.
• Insert the SD card with correct file and power-cycle.
to do an automatic If no automatic clone is required:
clone during
startup • Remove the card if not needed and power-cycle.
• Reset P8458 = 0 and power-cycle.
Note:
Fault can only be cleared by a power-cycle.
F70 Communication is no longer estab- Reconnect the module and check whether it is operating cor-
I/O Extension lished with the I/O Extension Module. rectly. Acknowledge the fault. If the fault persists, replace the
Module communi- module.
cation fault

Faults and alarms
9.1 Faults
Fault Cause Remedy

F71 No setpoint values from USS during Check USS master
USS setpoint fault telegram off time
F72 No setpoint values from Check USS/MODBUS master
USS/MODBUS USS/MODBUS during telegram off
setpoint fault time
F80 • Broken wire
Signal lost on ana- • Signal out of limits
log input
F85 External fault triggered via command • Check P2106.
External fault input via control word 2, bit 13.
• Disable control word 2 bit 13 as command source.
• Disable terminal input for fault trigger.
F100 Software error Contact service department or change inverter.
Watchdog reset
F101 Software error or processor failure. Contact service department or change inverter.
Stack overflow
F200 Script of the internal inverter program Check the script and make necessary corrections.
Script error has stopped running due to script
errors except for forced exit.
F221 PID feedback below minimum value • Change value of P2268.
PID feedback be- P2268.
• Adjust feedback gain.
low minimum value
F222 PID feedback above maximum value • Change value of P2267.
PID feedback P2267.
• Adjust feedback gain.
above maximum
value
F350 During startup the inverter checks if Internal failures cannot be fixed.
Configuration vec- the configuration vector (SZL vector) r0949 = 13 - Make sure the right power module is fitted.
tor for the inverter has been programmed correctly and
Note:
failed if hardware matches the pro-
grammed vector. If not the inverter Fault needs power-cycle to be acknowledged.
will trip.
• r0949 = 1: Internal failure - no
hardware configuration vector
available.
• r0949 = 2: Internal failure - no
software configuration vector
available.
• r0949 = 11: Internal failure - in-
verter code not supported.
• r0949 = 12: Internal failure - soft-
ware vector not possible.
• r0949 = 13: Wrong power module
fitted.
• r0949 > 1000: Internal failure -
wrong I/O board fitted.

Faults and alarms
9.1 Faults
Fault Cause Remedy

F395 This fault occurs after a startup The current parameter set needs to be checked and con-
Acceptance clone. It can also be caused by a firmed by clearing the fault.
test/confirmation faulty read from the EEPROM, see
pending F51 for more details.
A startup clone could have changed
and might not match the application.
This parameter set needs to be
checked before the inverter can start
a motor.
• r0949 = 3/4: Inverter data change
• r0949 = 5: Startup clone via an
SD card has been performed
• r0949 = 10: Previous startup
clone was aborted
F410 Conditions exist for cavitation dam- If cavitation is not occurring, reduce the cavitation threshold
Cavitation protec- age. Cavitation damage is damage P2361, or increase the cavitation protection delay. Ensure
tion failure caused to a pump in pumping sys- sensor feedback is working.
tems when the fluid is not flowing
sufficiently. This can lead to heat
build up and subsequent damage to
the pump.
F452 Load conditions on motor indicate Check the following:
Load monitoring belt failure or mechanical fault.
• No breakage, seizure or obstruction of inverter train.
trip • r0949 = 0: trip low torque/speed • Apply lubrication if required.
• r0949 = 1: trip high torque/speed If using an external speed sensor, check the following param-
eters for correct function:
- P2192 (delay time for permitted deviation)
- P2182 (threshold frequency f1)
If using a specific torque/speed range, check parameters:
- P2182 (threshold frequency 1)
- P2185 (upper torque threshold 1)
- P2186 (lower torque threshold 1)
- P2192 (delay time for permitted deviation)

Faults and alarms
9.2 Alarms
9.2 Alarms
If an alarm is activated the alarm icon shows immediately and then the display shows the
alarm code proceeded by "A".
Note
Note that alarms cannot be acknowledged. They are cleared automatically once the warning
has been rectified.
Alarm code list
Alarm Cause Remedy

A501 • Motor power does not correspond to the See F1.
Current limit inverter power
• Motor leads are too long
• Earth faults
• Small motors (120 W) under FCC and Use V/f operation for very small motors
light load may cause a high current
A502 Overvoltage limit is reached. This warning If this warning is displayed permanently, check
Overvoltage limit can occur during ramp down, if the Vdc inverter input voltage.
controller is disabled (P1240 = 0).
A503 • Main supply failed. Check main supply voltage.
Undervoltage limit • Main supply and consequently DC-link
voltage (r0026) below specified limit.
A504 Warning level of inverter heat sink tempera- Note:
Inverter overtemperature, warning level of chip junction tempera- r0037[0]: Heat sink temperature
ture ture, or allowed change in temperature on
r0037[1]: Chip junction temperature (includes heat
chip junction is exceeded, resulting in pulse
sink)
frequency reduction and / or output fre-
quency reduction (depending on parameter- Check the following:
ization in P0290). • Surrounding temperature must lie within speci-
fied limits
• Load conditions and load steps must be appro-
priate
• Fan must turn when inverter is running
A505 Warning level exceeded, current will be Check that load cycle lies within specified limits.
Inverter I2 t reduced if parameterized (P0610 = 1).
A506 Overload warning. Difference between heat Check that load steps and shock loads lie within
IGBT junction temper- sink and IGBT junction temperature ex- specified limits.
ature rise warning ceeds warning limits.
A507 Inverter heat sink temperature signal loss. Contact service department or change inverter.
Inverter temperature Possible sensor fallen off.
signal lost

Faults and alarms
9.2 Alarms
Alarm Cause Remedy

A511 • Motor overloaded. Independently of the kind of temperature determina-
Motor overtemperature • tion check:
Load cycles or load steps too high.
I2 t • P0604 motor temperature warning threshold
• P0625 motor surrounding temperature
• Check if name plate data is correct. If not, per-
form quick commissioning. Accurate equivalent
circuit data can be found by performing motor
identification (P1900 = 2).
• Check if motor weight (P0344) is reasonable.
Change if necessary.
• With P0626, P0627, and P0628 the standard
overtemperature can be changed, If the motor is
not a SIEMENS standard motor.
A535 The braking energy is too large. Reduce the braking energy.
Braking resistor over- The braking resistor is not suited for the Use a braking resistor with a higher rating.
load application.
A541 Motor data identification (P1900) selected
Motor data identifica- or running.
tion active
A600 Internal time slice overrun Contact service department.
RTOS overrun warning
A910 Occurs Check the following:
Vdc_max controller de- • if main supply voltage (P0210) is per- • Input voltage must lie within range.
activated manently too high. • Load must be match.
• if motor is driven by an active load, • In certain cases apply braking resistor.
causing motor to go into regenerative
mode.
• at very high load inertias, when ramping
down.
If warning A910 occurs while the inverter is
in standby (output pulses disabled) and an
ON command is subsequently given, the
Vdc_max controller (A911) will not be acti-
vated unless warning A910 is rectified.
A911 The Vdc_max controller works to keep the Check the following:
Vdc_max controller DC-link voltage (r0026) below the level
• Supply voltage must lie within limits indicated on
active specified in r1242.
rating plate.
• Ramp-down time (P1121) must match inertia of
load.
Note:
Higher inertia requires longer ramp times; other-
wise, apply braking resistor.

Faults and alarms
9.2 Alarms
Alarm Cause Remedy

A912 The Vdc_min controller will be activated if
Vdc_min controller the DC-link voltage (r0026) falls below the
active level specified in r1246.
The kinetic energy of the motor is used to
buffer the DC-link voltage, thus causing
deceleration of the inverter! So short mains
failures do not necessarily lead to an un-
dervoltage trip.
Note that this warning may also occur on
fast ramp-ups.
A921 Analog output parameters (P0777 and Check the following:
Analog output parame- P0779) should not be set to identical val- • Parameter settings for output identical
ters not set properly ues, since this would produce illogical re-
sults. • Parameter settings for input identical
• Parameter settings for output do not correspond
to analog output type
Set P0777 and P0779 to different values.
A922 No Load is applied to the inverter. Check that motor is connected to inverter.
No load applied to As a result, some functions may not work
inverter as under normal load conditions.
A923 Both JOG right and JOG left Do not press JOG right and left simultaneously.
Both JOG left and (P1055/P1056) have been requested. This
JOG right are request- freezes the RFG output frequency at its
ed current value.
A930 Conditions exist for possible cavitation See F410.
Cavitation protection damage.
warn
A936 PID autotuning (P2350) selected or running Warning disappears when PID autotuning has fin-
PID autotuning active ished.
A952 Load conditions on motor indicate belt fail- See F452.
Load monitoring warning ure or mechanical fault.

Faults and alarms
9.2 Alarms

Technical specifications A
Line supply characteristics
Three phase AC 400 V inverters Single phase AC 230 V inverters

Voltage range 380 V AC to 480 V AC 1) 200 V AC to 240 V AC 1)
(tolerance: -15% to +10%) (tolerance: -15% to +10%)
47 Hz to 63 Hz 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Current derating at high input voltages: Current derating at high input voltages:
Note: For the current derating at 480 V at the

default 4 kHz switching frequency and 40 °C
surrounding air temperature, refer to the table
in Section "Components of the inverter system
(Page 17)".
Overvoltage category EN 60664-1 Category III EN 60664-1 Category III
Permissible supply TN, TT, IT: FSA to FSE (unfiltered); FSE (fil- TN, TT: FSAA to FSC (unfiltered)
configuration tered) 2) TN, TT with grounded neutral: FSAA to FSC
TN, TT with grounded neutral: FSA to FSE IT: FSAA to FSAC (unfiltered)
Supply environment Second environment (industrial power network) First environment (residential power network)
1) When the input voltage is below the rated value, current deratings are permissible and therefore the voltage-dependent
speed and/or torque may be reduced.
2) To operate FSE (filtered) on IT power supply, make sure you remove the screw for the EMC filter.

Technical specifications
Overload capability
Power rating (kW) Average output Overload current Maximum overload cycle
current
0.12 to 15 100% rated 150% rated for 60 150% rated for 60 seconds followed by 94.5% rated for
18.5 (HO)/22 (HO) seconds 240 seconds
22 (LO)/30 (LO) 110% rated for 60 110% rated for 60 seconds followed by more than 98%
seconds rated for 240 seconds
EMC requirements
Note
Install all inverters in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines and in accordance with
good EMC practices.
Use copper screened cable. For the maximum motor cable lengths, refer to Section
"Terminal description (Page 39)".
Do not exceed the default switching frequency.
Three phase AC 400 V inverters Single phase AC 230 V inverters

ESD EN 61800-3 EN 61800-3
Radiated immunity
Burst
Surge
Conducted immunity
Voltage distortion immunity
Conducted emissions Three phase AC 400 V filtered inverters: Single phase AC 230 V filtered inverters:
Radiated emissions EN 61800-3 Category C2/C3 EN 61800-3 Category C1/C2
Maximum power losses
Three phase AC 400 V inverters

Frame size FSA FSB FSC FSD FSE
Power (kW) 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 22 30
rating HO LO HO LO
(hp) 0.75 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 5 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 30 40
HO LO HO LO
Maximum power 25 28 33 43 54 68 82 100 145 180 276 338 387 475 457 626
loss (w) 1)
1) With I/O fully loaded

Single phase AC 230 V inverters

Frame size FSAA/FSAB FSAC FSB FSC
Power (kW) 0.12 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0
rating (hp) 0.17 0.33 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 1.5 2 3 4
Maximum power 14 22 29 39 48 57 87 72 95 138 177
loss (w) 1)
1) With I/O fully loaded
Note
Power losses are given for nominal supply voltage, default switching frequency, and rated
output current. Changing these factors may result in increased power losses.
Harmonic currents
In order that you may operate a 230 V V20 inverter in the first environment, Category C2,
you must observe the limit values for harmonic currents. V20 inverters are professional
equipment for use in trades, professions or industries and are not intended for sale to the
general public.
Note
Observing the limit values for harmonic currents
With respect to the compliance with limits for harmonic currents, the EMC product standard
EN 61800-3 for V20 230 V inverters refers to compliance with standards EN 61000-3-2 and
EN 61000-3-12.
● V20 230 V inverters with the rated output power ≤1 kW and rated input current ≤ 16 A:
It cannot be guaranteed that the limit values are complied with EN 61000-3-2. The
installation person/company or company operating the professionally used device must
obtain authorization from the grid operator to connect the device regarding the harmonic
currents. For more information about typical harmonic currents of V20 230 V inverters,
see the following table.
● V20 230 V inverters with the rated output power > 1 kW and rated input current ≤ 16 A:
These devices are not subject to any limit values, and as a consequence can be
connected to the public low-voltage grid without any prior consultation.
● V20 230 V inverters with the rated input current > 16 A and ≤ 75 A:
It cannot be guaranteed that the limit values are complied with EN 61000-3-12. The
installation person/company or company operating the professionally used device must
obtain authorization from the grid operator to connect the device regarding the harmonic
currents. For more information about typical harmonic currents of V20 230 V inverters,
see the following table.

Typical harmonic currents of V20 230 V inverters
Single phase AC 230 Typical harmonic current (% of rated input current) at UK 4%

V inverters 3rd 5th 7th 9th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th 29th
Frame size AA/AB 42 40 37 33 29 24 15 11 4 2 1
Frame size AC 53 42 31 23 16 11 2 3 2 1 1
Frame size B 49 44 37 29 21 13 2 1 2 2 0
Frame size C 54 44 31 17 6 2 7 6 2 0 0
Output current deratings at different PWM frequencies and surrounding air temperatures

Frame Power rat- Current rating [A] at PWM frequency
size ing [kW] PWM frequency range: 2 kHz to 16 kHz (default: 4 kHz)
2 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz
40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C
A 0.37 1.3 1.0 0.7 1.3 1.0 0.7 1.1 0.8 0.5 0.9 0.7 0.5
A 0.55 1.7 1.3 0.9 1.7 1.3 0.9 1.4 1.0 0.7 1.2 0.9 0.6
A 0.75 2.2 1.8 1.1 2.2 1.8 1.1 1.9 1.3 0.9 1.5 1.1 0.8
A 1.1 3.1 2.6 1.6 3.1 2.6 1.6 2.6 1.9 1.3 2.2 1.6 1.1
A 1.5 4.1 3.4 2.1 4.1 3.4 2.1 3.5 2.5 1.7 2.9 2.1 1.4
A 2.2 5.6 4.6 2.8 5.6 4.6 2.8 4.8 3.4 2.4 3.9 2.8 2.0
B 3.0 7.3 6.3 3.7 7.3 6.3 3.7 6.2 4.4 3.1 5.1 3.7 2.6
B 4.0 8.8 8.2 4.4 8.8 8.2 4.4 7.5 5.3 3.7 6.2 4.4 3.1
C 5.5 12.5 10.8 6.3 12.5 10.8 6.3 10.6 7.5 5.3 8.8 6.3 4.4
D 7.5 16.5 14.5 8.3 16.5 14.5 8.3 14.0 9.9 6.9 11.6 8.3 5.8
D 11 25.0 21.0 12.5 25.0 21.0 12.5 21.3 15.0 10.5 17.5 12.5 8.8
D 15 31.0 28.0 15.5 31.0 28.0 15.5 26.4 18.6 13.0 21.7 15.5 10.9
E 18.5 (HO) 38.0 34.5 19.0 38.0 34.5 19.0 32.3 22.8 16.0 26.6 19.0 13.3
E 22 (LO) 45.0 40.5 22.5 45.0 40.5 22.5 38.3 27.0 18.9 31.5 22.5 15.8
E 22 (HO) 45.0 40.5 22.5 45.0 40.5 22.5 38.3 27.0 18.9 31.5 22.5 15.8
E 30 (LO) 60.0 53.0 30.0 60.0 53.0 30.0 51.0 36.0 25.2 42.0 30.0 21.0


40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C
A 0.37 0.8 0.5 0.4 0.7 0.5 0.3 0.6 0.4 0.3 0.5 0.4 0.3
A 0.55 1.0 0.7 0.5 0.9 0.6 0.4 0.8 0.5 0.4 0.7 0.5 0.3
A 0.75 1.3 0.9 0.7 1.1 0.8 0.6 1.0 0.7 0.5 0.9 0.6 0.4
A 1.1 1.9 1.3 0.9 1.6 1.1 0.8 1.4 1.0 0.7 1.2 0.9 0.6
A 1.5 2.5 1.7 1.2 2.1 1.4 1.0 1.8 1.3 0.9 1.6 1.1 0.8
A 2.2 3.4 2.4 1.7 2.8 2.0 1.4 2.5 1.7 1.2 2.2 1.6 1.1
B 3.0 4.4 3.1 2.2 3.7 2.6 1.8 3.3 2.3 1.6 2.9 2.0 1.5
B 4.0 5.3 3.7 2.6 4.4 3.1 2.2 4.0 2.7 1.9 3.5 2.5 1.8
C 5.5 7.5 5.3 3.8 6.3 4.4 3.1 5.6 3.9 2.8 5.0 3.5 2.5
D 7.5 9.9 6.9 5.0 8.3 5.8 4.1 7.4 5.1 3.6 6.6 4.6 3.3
D 11 15.0 10.5 7.5 12.5 8.8 6.3 11.3 7.8 5.5 10.0 7.0 5.0
D 15 18.6 13.0 9.3 15.5 10.9 7.8 14.0 9.6 6.8 12.4 8.7 6.2
E 18.5 (HO) 22.8 16.0 11.4 19.0 13.3 9.5 17.1 11.8 8.4 15.2 10.6 7.6
E 22 (LO) 27.0 18.9 13.5 22.5 15.8 11.3 20.3 14.0 9.9 18.0 12.6 9.0
E 22 (HO) 27.0 18.9 13.5 22.5 15.8 11.3 20.3 14.0 9.9 18.0 12.6 9.0
E 30 (LO) 36.0 25.2 18.0 30.0 21.0 15.0 27.0 18.6 13.2 24.0 16.8 12.0

40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C
AA/AB 0.12 0.9 0.6 0.5 0.9 0.6 0.5 0.9 0.6 0.5 0.9 0.7 0.5
AA/AB 0.25 1.7 1.2 0.9 1.7 1.2 0.9 1.7 1.2 0.9 1.7 1.4 0.9
AA/AB 0.37 2.3 1.6 1.2 2.3 1.6 1.2 2.3 1.6 1.2 2.3 1.8 1.2
AA/AB 0.55 3.2 2.2 1.6 3.2 2.2 1.6 3.2 2.2 1.6 3.2 2.3 1.6
AA/AB 0.75 4.2 2.9 2.1 4.2 2.9 2.1 4.2 2.9 2.1 4.2 3.2 2.1
AC 1.1 6.0 4.2 3.0 6.0 4.2 3.0 6.0 4.2 3.0 6.0 4.2 3.0
AC 1.5 7.8 5.5 3.9 7.8 5.5 3.9 7.8 5.5 3.9 7.8 5.5 3.9
B 1.1 6.0 4.2 3.0 6.0 4.2 3.0 6.0 4.2 3.0 6.0 4.2 3.0
B 1.5 7.8 5.5 3.9 7.8 5.5 3.9 7.8 5.5 3.9 7.8 5.5 3.9
C 2.2 11 7.7 5.5 11 7.7 5.5 11 7.7 5.5 11 7.7 5.5
C 3.0 13.6 9.5 6.8 13.6 9.5 6.8 13.6 9.5 6.8 13.6 9.5 6.8


40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C
AA/AB 0.12 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.8 0.5 0.4 0.7 0.5 0.3 0.6 0.5 0.3
AA/AB 0.25 1.6 1.1 0.8 1.4 1.0 0.7 1.3 0.9 0.6 1.2 0.9 0.6
AA/AB 0.37 2.1 1.5 1.1 2.0 1.4 1.0 1.7 1.2 0.9 1.6 1.2 0.8
AA/AB 0.55 2.9 2.0 1.5 2.7 1.9 1.3 2.4 1.7 1.2 2.2 1.6 1.1
AA/AB 0.75 3.9 2.7 1.9 3.6 2.5 1.8 3.2 2.2 1.6 2.9 2.1 1.5
AC 1.1 5.5 3.8 2.8 5.1 3.6 2.5 4.5 3.1 2.2 4.2 3.0 2.1
AC 1.5 7.2 5.0 3.6 6.6 4.7 3.3 5.9 4.1 2.9 5.5 3.9 2.7
B 1.1 5.5 3.8 2.8 5.1 3.6 2.5 4.5 3.1 2.2 4.2 3.0 2.1
B 1.5 7.2 5.0 3.6 6.6 4.7 3.3 5.9 4.1 2.9 5.5 3.9 2.7
C 2.2 10.1 7.0 5.1 9.4 6.6 4.6 8.3 5.7 4.1 7.7 5.5 3.9
C 3.0 12.5 8.7 6.3 11.6 8.2 5.7 10.2 7.1 5.0 9.5 6.8 4.8
Motor control
Control methods Linear V/F, quadratic V/F, multi-point V/F, V/F with FCC
Output frequency Default range: 0 Hz to 550 Hz
range Resolution: 0.01 Hz
Maximum over- Rated power 0.12 kW to 15 kW 150 % rated for 60 seconds followed by 94.5 % rated for 240 seconds
load cycle Rated power 18.5 kW (HO)/22
kW (HO)
Rated power 22 kW (LO)/30 110% rated for 60 seconds followed by more than 98% rated for 240
kW (LO) seconds
Mechanical specifications
Frame size FSAA FSAB FSAC FSA FSB FSC FSD 1) FSE
with fan without fan
Outline W 68/2.7 68/2.7 90.8 90/3.5 90/3.5 140/5.5 184/7.24 240/9.4 245/9.6
dimen- H 142/5.6 142/5.6 160.9 166/6.5 150/5.9 160/6.3 182/7.17 206.5/8.1 264.5/10.
sions 4
(mm/inch)
D 107.8/4. 127.8/5 147 145.5/5.7 145.5 (114.5 164.5/6.5 169/6.7 172.5/6.8 209/8.2
2 2))/5.7(4.5 2))
Mounting • Cabinet panel mounting

methods
• Push-through mounting (FSB ... FSE)
1) Available for three phase AC 400 V inverters only.

2) Depth of Flat Plate inverter (400 V 0.75 kW variant only).

Frame size Net weight (kg) Gross weight (kg)

unfiltered filtered unfiltered filtered
FSA with fan 1.0 1.1 1.4 1.4
without fan 0.9 1.0 (0.9 1)) 1.3 1.4 (1.3 1))
FSB 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3
FSC 2.4 2.6 3.1 3.3
FSD 7.5 kW 3.7 4.0 4.3 4.6
11 kW 3.7 4.1 4.5 4.8
15 kW 3.9 4.3 4.6 4.9
FSE 18.5 kW 6.2 6.8 6.9 7.5
22 kW 6.4 7.0 7.1 7.7
FSAA 0.6 0.7 1.0 1.1
FSAB 0.8 0.9 1.2 1.3
FSAC 1.2 1.4 1.3 1.5
FSB 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.1
FSC 2.5 2.8 3.0 3.2
1) Weight of Flat Plate inverter (400 V 0.75 kW variant only).
Environmental conditions
Surrounding air temperature - 10 °C to 40 °C: without derating

40 °C to 60 °C: with derating (UL/cUL-compliant: 40 °C to 50 °C, with derating)
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 70 °C
Protection class IP 20
Maximum humidity level 95% (non-condensing)
Shock and vibration Long-term storage in the transport packaging according to EN 60721-3-1 Class 1M2
Transport in the transport packaging according to EN 60721-3-2 Class 2M3
Vibration during operation according to EN 60721-3-3 Class 3M2

Installation altitude Up to 4000 m above sea level:

• For the installation altitude lower than or equal to 2000 m above sea level, it is permis-
sible to connect a V20 inverter to any of the mains supply systems that are specified
for it.
• For the installation altitude higher than 2000 m and lower than or equal to 4000 m
above sea level, you must connect a V20 inverter to any of the specified mains supply
systems either via an isolating transformer or with a grounded neutral point.
1000 m to 4000 m: output current derating
2000 m to 4000 m: input voltage derating
Environmental classes Pollution degree: 2

Solid particles: class 3S2
Chemical gases: class 3C2 (SO2, H2S)
Climate class: 3K3
Minimum mounting clearance Top: 100 mm
Bottom: 100 mm (85 mm for fan-cooled frame size A)
Side: 0 mm

Standards
European Low Voltage Directive

The SINAMICS V20 product series and SINAMICS V20 Smart Access comply with the requirements
of the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC as amended by Directive 98/68/EEC. The units are certified
for compliance with the following standards:
EN 61800-5-1 — Semiconductor inverters – General requirements and line commutated inverters
European EMC Directive
When installed according to the recommendations described in this manual, the SINAMICS V20 and
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access fulfill all requirements of the EMC Directive as defined by the EMC
Product Standard for Power Drive Systems EN 61800-3.
European RED Directive
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the following requirements of Radio Equipment Directive
(RED) 2014/53/EU:
• Article 3(1)(a) Health and Safety (EN 60950-1, EN 62479)
• Article 3(1)(b) EMC (EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-17)
• Article 3(2) Spectrum (EN 300 328)
The CE Declaration of Conformity is held on file available to the competent authorities at the following
address:
Siemens AG
Digital Factory
Motion Control
Frauenauracher Straße 80
DE-91056 Erlangen
Germany
The SINAMICS V20 product series has been examined and certified by Underwriters Laboratories
(UL) to standards UL508C/UL61800-5-1 and CSA C22.2 NO-14-10.
The SINAMICS V20 product series complies with the appropriate RCM standard.
The SINAMICS V20 product series complies with the appropriate EAC standard.

The SINAMICS V20 product series complies with the requirements of the Korean Certification (KC
mark).
The SINAMICS V20 series (FSAA and FSAB excluded) has been defined as Class A equipment and
is intended for industrial applications and has not been considered for home use. The SINAMICS V20
FSAA and FSAB products have been defined as Class B equipment and are intended for both indus-
trial applications and home use.
EMC limit values in South Korea
The EMC limit values to be complied with for South Korea correspond to the limit values of the EMC
product standard for variable-speed electric drives EN 61800-3, Category C2 or limit value class A,
Group 1 according to EN55011. By applying suitable supplementary measures, the limit values ac-
cording to Category C2 or according to limit value class A, Group 1are maintained. Further, additional
measures may be required, for instance, using an additional radio interference suppression filter
(EMC filter). The measures for EMC-compliant design of the system are described in detail in this
manual.
Please note that the final statement on compliance with the standard is given by the respective label
attached to the individual unit.
ISO 9001 Siemens AG uses a quality management system that meets the requirements of ISO 9001.
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the appropriate FCC standard.
Changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by SIEMENS may void
the FCC authorization to operate this device. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WPC SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the appropriate WPC standard.
SRRC SINAMICS V20 Smart Access complies with the appropriate SRRC standard.
Certificates can be downloaded from the internet under the following link:
Website for certificates
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/60668840/134200)

Options and spare parts B
Note
Repair and replacement of equipment
Any defective parts or components must be replaced using parts contained in the relevant
lists of spare parts or options.
Disconnect the power supply before opening the equipment for access.
B.1 Options
For more information about recommended cable cross-sections and screw tightening
torques, see the table "Recommended cable cross-sections and screw tightening torques" in
Section "Terminal description (Page 39)".
Note
In order to gain access to the expansion port to fit the Parameter Loader or Bop Interface
Module, remove the detachable transparent cover gently using just finger pressure. It is
recommended to keep the cover in a safe place and refit it when the expansion port is not in
use.
B.1.1 Parameter Loader

Article number: 6SL3255-0VE00-0UA1

B.1 Options
Outline dimensions (mm)
Functionality
The Parameter Loader provides the ability to upload/download parameter sets between the
inverter and an SD card. It is only a commissioning tool and has to be removed during
normal operation.
Note
To clone saved parameter settings from one inverter to another, a Parameter Loader is
required. For more information about clone steps, see the data transferring steps described
in this section.
During parameter cloning, make sure you either connect the PE terminal to earth or observe
ESD protective measures.
SD card socket
The Parameter Loader contains an SD card socket which is connected directly to the
expansion port on the inverter.
Battery power supply

In addition to the memory card interface, the Parameter Loader can hold two batteries
(consumer grade, non-rechargeable carbon-zinc or alkaline AA size batteries only) which
allow the inverter to be powered directly from this option module to perform data transfer
when the mains power is unavailable.
WARNING
Risk of fire and explosion due to charging or short-circuiting of batteries
Battery charging or direct connection of plus (+) and minus (-) poles can cause leakage,
heat generation, fire and even explosion.
• Do not charge the non-rechargeable batteries.
• Do not store and/or carry batteries with metallic products such as necklaces.

B.1 Options
WARNING
Risk of fire and explosion due to improper disposal of batteries
Direct contact with metallic products and/or other batteries can cause battery damage,
liquid leakage, heat generation, fire and even explosion. Disposal of batteries in fire is
extremely dangerous with a risk of explosion and violent flaring.
Do not discard batteries into trash cans. Place them in the designated public
recycling area for waste batteries.
CAUTION
Risk of environmental pollution
Casual disposal of batteries into water, trash cans, etc. can cause environmental pollution.
Collect and recycle the waste batteries in compliance with relevant environmental laws and
regulations.
Micro USB interface

As an alternative way to power the inverter to perform data transfer when the mains power is
unavailable, you can use a Micro USB cable to connect an external 5 V DC power supply to
the Micro USB interface on the Parameter Loader. If the inverter can be supplied from the
mains power, it is not necessary to power the Parameter Loader either from the batteries or
via a Micro USB cable.
Fitting the Parameter Loader to the inverter

B.1 Options
Note
When the inverters you desire to install include FSAA and/or FSAB inverters and you want to
install FSAA and/or FSAB inverters side by side, to make sure that there is sufficient space
to fit the parameter loader to the FSAA/FSAB inverter, install all available FSAA inverters to
the farthest right, followed by all available FSAB inverters and then all other frame sizes.
There are no additional mounting sequence requirements for inverters other than FSAA and
FSAB.
Recommended SD card
Article number: 6SL3054-4AG00-2AA0
Using memory cards from other manufacturers

SD card requirement:
● Supported file format: FAT16 and FAT 32
● Maximum card capacity: 32 GB
● Minimum card space for parameter transfer: 8 KB
Note
You use memory cards from other manufacturers at your own risk. Depending on the
card manufacturer, not all functions are supported (for example, download).
Methods to power on the inverter

Use one of the following methods to power on the inverter for downloading/uploading
parameters:
● Power on from the mains supply.
● Power on from the built-in battery power supply. Press the power button on the
Parameter Loader and the inverter is powered on.
● Power on from an external DC 5 V power supply that is connected to the Parameter
Loader. Press the power button on the Parameter Loader and the inverter is powered on.
Transferring data from inverter to SD card

1. Fit the option module to the inverter.
2. Power on the inverter.
3. Insert the card into the option module.
4. Set P0003 (user access level) = 3.
5. Set P0010 (commissioning parameter) = 30.

B.1 Options
6. Set P0804 (select clone file). This step is necessary only when the card contains the data
files that you do not desire to be overwritten.
P0804 = 0 (default): file name is clone00.bin
P0804 = 1: file name is clone01.bin
...
P0804 = 99: file name is clone99.bin
7. Set P0802 (transfer data from inverter to card) = 2.
The inverter displays "8 8 8 8 8" during transfer and the LED is lit up orange and flashes at 1
Hz. After a successful transfer, both P0010 and P0802 are automatically reset to 0. If any
faults occur during the transfer, see Chapter "Faults and alarms (Page 323)" for possible
reasons and remedies.
Transferring data from SD card to inverter

There are two ways to perform a data transfer.
Method 1:
(Precondition: Inverter is to be powered up after inserting the card)
1. Fit the option module to the inverter.
2. Insert the card into the option module. Make sure the card contains the file "clone00.bin".
3. Power on the inverter.
Data transfer starts automatically. Then the fault code F395 displays which means
"Cloning has occurred. Do you want to keep the clone edits?".
4. To save the clone edits, press and the fault code is cleared. When the clone file is
written to EEPROM, the LED is lit up orange and flashes at 1Hz.
If you do not wish to keep the clone edits, remove the card or the option module and
restart the inverter. The inverter will power up with the fault code F395 (r0949 = 10)
indicating that the previous cloning was aborted. To clear the fault code, press .
Method 2:
(Precondition: Inverter is powered up before inserting the card)
1. Fit the option module to the powered inverter.
2. Insert the card into the option module.
3. Set P0003 (user access level) = 3.
4. Set P0010 (commissioning parameter) = 30.
5. Set P0804 (select clone file). This step is necessary only when the card does not contain
the file "clone00.bin". The inverter copies by default the file "clone00.bin" from the card.
6. Set P0803 (transfer data from card to inverter) = 2 or 3.
The inverter displays "8 8 8 8 8" during transfer and the LED is lit up orange and flashes at 1
Hz. After a successful transfer, both P0010 and P0803 are automatically reset to 0.
Note that fault code F395 only occurs with power-up cloning.

B.1 Options
B.1.2 External BOP and BOP Interface Module
External BOP
Article number: 6SL3255-0VA00-4BA1
The external BOP is used for remote control of the inverter operation. When mounted on a
suitable cabinet door, the external BOP can achieve a UL/cUL Type 1 enclosure rating. The
permissible operating temperature range for the external BOP is from -10 °C to 50 °C.
Components
● External BOP unit
● 4 x M3 screws
Rating plate
The rating plate for the external BOP is located on the back side of the BOP.
Panel layout
The SINAMICS V20 supports an external BOP for remote control of inverter operation. The
external BOP connects to the inverter through an optional BOP Interface Module.

B.1 Options
Button functions
Button Description
Stops the inverter
Button functions the same as the button on the built-in BOP.
Starts the inverter

Multi-function button
Pressing the button:

Turning clockwise:
Button functions the same as the button on the built-in BOP. Fast turning functions
the same as long press of the button on the built-in BOP.
Turning counter-clockwise:
Button functions the same as the button on the built-in BOP. Fast turning functions
the same as long press of the button on the built-in BOP.
Button functions the same as the + buttons on the built-in BOP.
Inverter status icons
These icons have the same meaning as the corresponding icons on the built-in BOP.
Commissioning icon. The inverter is in commissioning mode (P0010 = 1).
Screen display
The display of the external BOP is identical to the built-in BOP, except that the external BOP
has a commissioning icon which is used to indicate that the inverter is in commissioning
mode.
On inverter power-up, the inverter-connected external BOP first displays "BOP.20" (BOP for
the SINAMICS V20) and then the firmware version of the BOP. After that it detects and
displays the baudrate and the USS communication address of the inverter automatically.

B.1 Options
See the following table for settable baudrate and address values. To change the baudrate,
set P2010[0]. To change the USS communication address, set P2011[0].
Baudrate Communication address Display example

(bps)
9600 0 ... 31
19200 0 ... 31
38400 0 ... 31
57600 0 ... 31
76800 0 ... 31
93750 0 ... 31
115200 0 ... 31
In case of any communication errors, the screen displays "noCon" which means that no
communication connection has been detected. The inverter then automatically restarts
baudrate and address detection. In this case, check that the cable is correctly connected.
Mounting dimensions of the external BOP

The outline dimensions, drill pattern and cut-out dimensions of the external BOP are shown
below:
Unit: mm Fixings:
4 x M3 screws (length: 8 mm to 12 mm)
BOP Interface Module

Article number: 6SL3255-0VA00-2AA1
Functionality
This module can be used as an interface module for the external BOP, thus realizing the
remote control over the inverter by the external BOP.
The module contains a communication interface for connecting the external BOP to the
inverter and a plug connector for connection to the expansion port on the inverter. The

B.1 Options
permissible operating temperature range for the BOP Interface Module is from -10 °C to
50 °C.
Mounting (SINAMICS V20 + BOP Interface Module + external BOP)
Note
Connecting the BOP Interface Module to the external BOP is required only when you desire
to control the inverter operation remotely with the external BOP. The BOP Interface Module
needs to be screwed to the inverter with a tightening torque of 1.5 Nm (tolerance: ± 10%).
Note
Make sure that you connect the cable shield to the shield connection kit. For more
information about the shielding method, see Section "EMC-compliant installation (Page 45)".

B.1 Options

B.1 Options
B.1.3 Dynamic braking module

Article number: 6SL3201-2AD20-8VA0
Note
This module is applicable for frame sizes AA to C only.
Functionality
The dynamic braking module is typically used in applications in which dynamic motor
behavior is required at different speed or continuous direction changes, for example, for
conveyor drives or hoisting gear.
Dynamic braking converts the regenerative energy, which is released when the motor brakes,
into heat. Dynamic braking activity is limited by the duty cycle selected with the control knob.
Mounting orientation
The dynamic braking module must be installed in the orientation as shown in the following
diagram. That is, the open slots must always point directly upwards to ensure adequate
cooling.

B.1 Options
Drill pattern (mm)
Recommended cable cross-sections
Inverter frame size Rated output power Cable cross-sections for DC terminals (DC-, DC+)
230 V
FSAA/FSAB 0.12 … 0.75 kW 1.0 mm2
FSAC/FSB 1.1 … 1.5 kW 2.5 mm2
FSC 2.2 … 3.0 kW 4.0 mm2
400 V
FSA 0.37 … 0.75 kW 1.0 mm2
1.1 … 2.2 kW 1.5 mm2
FSB 3.0 … 4.0 kW 2.5 mm2
FSC 5.5 kW 4.0 mm2
Note: Do not use the cables with cross-sections less than 0.3 mm2 (for inverter frame size
AA/AB/A)/0.5 mm2 (for inverter frame sizes AC/B/C). Use a screw tightening torque of 1.0 Nm/8.9
lbf.in (tolerance: ±10%).
NOTICE
Destruction of device
It is extremely important to ensure that the polarity of the DC link connections between the
inverter and the dynamic braking module is correct. If the polarity of the DC terminals’
connections is reversed, it could result in the destruction of the inverter and the module.
Status LEDs
LED Color Description

POWER Yellow Module is powered up.
STATUS Red Module is in protection mode.
ACTIVE Green Module is releasing regenerative energy produced when the motor brakes into heat.

B.1 Options
Duty cycle selection
NOTICE
Damage to the braking resistor
Incorrect setting for the duty cycle/voltage could damage the attached braking resistor. Use
the control knob to select the rated duty cycle of the braking resistor.
Value labels on the module have the following meanings:
Label Meaning
230 V Duty cycle values labeled are for 230 V inverters
400 V Duty cycle values labeled are for 400 V inverters
5 5% duty cycle
10 10% duty cycle
20 20% duty cycle
50 50% duty cycle
100 100% duty cycle
One phase AC 230 V inverters Three phase AC 400 V inverters

Peak power rating 3.0 kW 5.5 kW
RMS current at peak power 8.0 A 7.0 A
Maximum continuous power rating 3.0 kW 4.0 kW
Maximum continuous current rating 8.0 A 5.2 A
Maximum continuous power rating 1.5 kW 2.75 kW
(side-by-side mounted)
(side-by-side mounted)
Surrounding air temperature - 10 °C to 50 °C: without derating - 10 °C to 40 °C: without derating
40 °C to 50 °C: with derating
at 50 ℃ surrounding air temperature
Outline dimensions (L x W x D) 150 x 90 x 88 (mm)
Mounting Cabinet panel mounting (4 x M4 screws)
Maximum duty cycle 100%
Protection functions Short-circuit protection, over-temperature protection
Maximum cable length • Braking module to inverter: 1 m
• Braking module to braking resistor: 10 m
UL file number E121068

B.1 Options
B.1.4 Braking resistor
WARNING
Operating conditions
Make sure that the resistor to be fitted to the SINAMICS V20 is adequately rated to handle
the required level of power dissipation.
All applicable installation, usage and safety regulations regarding high voltage installations
must be complied with.
If the inverter is already in use, disconnect the prime power and wait at least five minutes
for the capacitors to discharge before commencing installation.
This equipment must be earthed.
WARNING
Hot surface
Braking resistors get hot during operation. Do not touch the braking resistor during
operation.
Using an incorrect braking resistor can cause severe damage to the associated inverter
and may result in fire.
A thermal cut-out circuit (see diagram below) must be incorporated to protect the
equipment from overheating.
NOTICE
Device damage caused by improper minimum resistance values
A braking resistor with a resistance lower than the following minimum resistance values can
damage the attached inverter or braking module:
• 400 V inverter frame sizes A to C: 56 Ω
• 400 V inverter frame size D/E: 27 Ω
• 230 V inverter frame sizes AA to C: 39 Ω
Functionality
An external braking resistor can be used to "dump" the regenerative energy produced by the
motor, thus giving greatly improved braking and deceleration capabilities.
A braking resistor which is required for dynamic braking can be used with all frame sizes of
inverters. Frame size D is designed with an internal braking chopper, allowing you to connect
the braking resistor directly to the inverter; however, for frame sizes A to C, an additional
dynamic braking module is required for connecting the braking resistor to the inverter.

B.1 Options
Ordering data
Frame size Inverter Resistor article number Continuous Peak power (5% duty Resistance ± DC voltage
power power cycle) 10% rating
rating
FSA 0.37 kW 6SL3201-0BE14-3AA0 75 W 1.5 kW 370 Ω 840 V +10%
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW 6SL3201-0BE21-0AA0 200 W 4.0 kW 140 Ω 840 V +10%
FSB 3 kW
4 kW
FSC 5.5 kW 6SL3201-0BE21-8AA0 375 W 7.5 kW 75 Ω 840 V +10%
FSD 7.5 kW
11 kW 6SL3201-0BE23-8AA0 925 W 18.5 kW 30 Ω 840 V +10%
15 kW
FSE 18.5 kW 6SE6400-4BD21-2DA0 1200 W 24 kW 27 Ω 900 V
22 kW
FSAA/FSAB 0.12 kW 6SE6400-4BC05-0AA0 50 W 1.0 kW 180 Ω 450 V
0.25 kW
0.37 kW
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
FSAC/FSB 1.1 kW 6SE6400-4BC11-2BA0 120 W 2.4 kW 68 Ω 450 V
1.5 kW
FSC 2.2 kW
3 kW 6SE6400-4BC12-5CA0 250 W 4.5 kW 39 Ω 450 V
* All the above resistors are rated for a maximum duty cycle of 5%.
Technical data
Surrounding operating temperature: -10° C to +50° C

Storage/transport temperature: -40° C to +70° C
Degree of protection: IP20
Humidity: 0% to 95% (non-condensing)
cURus file number: E221095 (Gino)
E219022 (Block)

B.1 Options
Installation
For three phase AC 400 V inverters FSA to FSD

The resistors can be installed in a vertical or horizontal position and secured to a heat
resistant surface. The required minimum clearance distances are shown below:
For single phase AC 230 V inverters and three phase AC 400 V inverter FSE
The resistors must be installed in a vertical position and secured to a heat resistant surface.
At least 100 mm must be left above, below and to the side of the resistor to allow an
unimpeded airflow.

B.1 Options
Mounting dimensions
Resistor article number Dimensions (mm) Weight

L L1 L2 L3 D D1 D2 W W1 (kg)
6SL3201-0BE14-3AA0 295 266 - - 100 - - 105 72 1.48
6SL3201-0BE21-0AA0 345 316 - - 100 - - 105 72 1.80
6SL3201-0BE21-8AA0 345 316 - - 100 - - 175 142 2.73
6SL3201-0BE23-8AA0 490 460 - - 140 - - 250 217 6.20
6SE6400-4BD21-2DA0 515 350 205 195 175 242 210 270 315 7.4
6SE6400-...
4BC05-0AA0 230 217 - - 43.5 - - 72 56 1.0
4BC11-2BA0 239 226 - - 43.5 - - 149 133 1.6
4BC12-5CA0 285 200 145 170 150 217 185 185 230 3.8
Connection
The mains supply to the inverter can be provided through a contactor which disconnects the
supply if the resistor overheats. Protection is provided by a thermal cut-out switch (supplied
with each resistor). The cut-out switch can be wired in-series with the coil supply for the main
contactor (see diagram below). The thermal switch contacts close again when the resistor
temperature falls; after which the inverter starts automatically (P1210 = 1). A fault message
is generated with this parameter setting.

B.1 Options
Commissioning
The braking resistors are designed to operate on a 5% duty cycle. For inverter frame size D,
set P1237 = 1 to enable the braking resistor function. For other frame sizes, use the dynamic
braking module to select the 5% duty cycle.
Note
Additional PE terminal
Some resistors have an additional PE connection available on the resistor housing.
B.1.5 Line reactor
WARNING
Heat during operation
The line reactors get hot during operation. Do not touch. Provide adequate clearance and
ventilation.
When operating the larger line reactors in an environment with a surrounding air
temperature in excess of 40° C, the wiring of the terminal connections must be
accomplished using 75° C copper wire only.
WARNING
Risk of equipment damage and electric shocks
Some of the line reactors in the table below have pin crimps for the connection to the
inverter's mains terminals.
Use of these pin crimps can cause damage to the equipment and even electric shocks.
For safety reasons, replace the pin crimps using UL/cUL-certified fork crimps or stranded
cables.
CAUTION
Protection rating
The line reactors have a protection rating of IP20 in accordance with EN 60529 and are
designed to be mounted inside a cabinet.

B.1 Options
Functionality
The line reactors are used to smooth voltage peaks or to bridge commutating dips. They also
can reduce the effects of harmonics on the inverter and the line supply.
The larger line reactors for the 230 V variants of inverters have side mounting brackets to
allow side-by-side mounting (see diagram below).
Ordering data
Frame size Inverter power rating Line reactor

Article number Voltage Current
FSA 0.37 kW 6SL3203-0CE13-2AA0 380 V to 480 V 4.0 A
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
1.1 kW
1.5 kW 6SL3203-0CE21-0AA0 380 V to 480 V 11.3 A
2.2 kW
FSB 3 kW
4 kW
FSC 5.5 kW 6SL3203-0CE21-8AA0 380 V to 480 V 22.3 A
FSD 7.5 kW
11 kW 6SL3203-0CE23-8AA0 380 V to 480 V 47.0 A
15 kW
FSE 18.5 kW 6SL3203-0CJ24-5AA0 200 V to 480 V 53.6 A
22 kW 6SL3203-0CD25-3AA0 380 V to 600 V 86.9 A
FSAA/FSAB 0.12 kW 6SE6400-3CC00-4AB3 200 V to 240 V 3.4 A
0.25 kW
0.37 kW 6SE6400-3CC01-0AB3 200 V to 240 V 8.1 A
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
FSAC/FSB 1.1 kW 6SE6400-3CC02-6BB3 200 V to 240 V 22.8 A
1.5 kW
FSC 2.2 kW
3 kW 6SE6400-3CC03-5CB3 200 V to 240 V 29.5 A

B.1 Options
Connecting the line reactor to the inverter

The following illustration takes the line reactors for the 230 V variants of inverters as an
example.

B.1 Options
Mounting dimensions
Article number Dimensions (mm) Weight Fixing screw Cable cross

6SL3203-... A B C D E F (kg) Size Tightening torque section (mm2)
(Nm)
0CE13-2AA0 120 125 71 - 55 100 1.10 M4 (4) 3.0 2.5
0CE21-0AA0 140 125 71 - 55 100 2.10 M4 (4) 3.0 2.5
0CE21-8AA0 145 125 81 91 65 100 2.95 M5 (4) 5.0 6.0
0CE23-8AA0 220 190 91 - 68 170 7.80 M5 (4) 5.0 16.0

B.1 Options
For three phase AC 400 V inverter FSE
Article number Electrical characteristics Overall dimensions Fixing dimensions (mm) Fixing Weight
6SL3203-... (mm) screw (kg)
Voltage (V) Current (A) A B C D E F G H
0CJ24-5AA0 380 to 480 47 455 275 84 235 235 421 419 325 4 x M8 13
0CD25-3AA0 63 (13 Nm)
For single phase AC 230 V inverters

B.1 Options

6SE6400-... (kg) section (mm2)
A B C D E F Size Tightening Min. Max.
torque (Nm)
3CC00-4AB3 200 75.5 50 56 56 187 0.5 M4 (2) 1.1 1.0 2.5
3CC01-0AB3 200 75.5 50 56 56 187 0.5 M4 (2)
3CC02-6BB3 213 (233*) 150 50 138 120 200 1.2 M4 (4) 1.5 1.5 6.0
3CC03-5CB3 245 (280*) 185 50 (50/80*) 174 156 230 1.0 M5 (4) 2.25 2.5 10
* Height with side-mounting bracket
B.1.6 Output reactor
CAUTION
Pulse frequency restriction
The output reactor works only at 4kHz switching frequency. Before the output reactor is
used, parameters P1800 and P0290 must be modified as follows: P1800 = 4 and P0290 =
0 or 1.

B.1 Options
Functionality
The output reactors reduce the voltage stress on the motor windings. At the same time, the
capacitive charging/discharging currents, which place an additional load on the inverter
output when long motor cables are used, are reduced.
For safety reasons, it is recommended to use a shielded cable (maximum length: 200 m) to
connect the output reactor.
Ordering data
Frame size Inverter power rating Output reactor

FSA 0.37 kW 6SL3202-0AE16-1CA0 380 V to 480 V 6.1 A
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW 6SL3202-0AE18-8CA0 380 V to 480 V 9.0 A
FSB 3 kW
4 kW 6SL3202-0AE21-8CA0 380 V to 480 V 18.5 A
FSC 5.5 kW
FSD 7.5 kW 6SL3202-0AE23-8CA0 380 V to 480 V 39.0 A
11 kW
15 kW
FSE 18.5 kW 6SE6400-3TC03-8DD0 200 V to 480 V 45.0 A
22 kW 6SE6400-3TC05-4DD0 200 V to 480 V 68.0 A
FSAA/FSAB 0.12 kW 6SE6400-3TC00-4AD3 200 V to 240 V 4.0 A
0.25 kW
0.37 kW
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
1.1 kW 6SE6400-3TC01-0BD3 200 V to 480 V 10.4 A
FSAC/FSB 1.5 kW
FSC 2.2 kW
3 kW 6SE6400-3TC03-2CD3 200 V to 480 V 26.0 A

B.1 Options
Connecting the output reactor to the inverter

The following illustration takes the output reactors for the 230 V variants of inverters as an
example.

B.1 Options
Mounting dimensions

6SL3202-... A B C D E F (kg) Size Tightening section (mm2)
torque (Nm)
0AE16-1CA0 175 178 72.5 166 56.5 207 3.4 M4 (4) 3.0 4.0
0AE18-8CA0 180 178 72.5 166 56.5 207 3.9 M4 (4) 3.0 4.0
0AE21-8CA0 215 243 100 225 80.5 247 10.1 M5 (4) 5.0 10.0
0AE23-8CA0 235 243 114.7 225 84.7 257 11.2 M5 (4) 5.0 16.0

B.1 Options
For three phase AC 400 V inverter FSE
Article num- Electrical charateristics Con- Overall dimensions Fixing dimen- Fixing Weight
ber necting (mm) sions (mm) screw (kg)
6SE6400- Voltage (V) Current (A) Torque (Nm) bolt H W D n1 n2
3TC05-4DD0 200 to 480 54 3.5 to 4.0 M5 210 225 150 70 176 M6 10.7
3TC03-8DD0 380 to 480 38 3.5 to 4.0 M5 210 225 179 94 176 M6 16.1
For single phase AC 230 V inverters
Article number Dimensions (mm) Weight Fixing screw Cable cross section
6SE6400-... (kg) (mm2)
A B C D E Size Tightening Min. Max.
torque (Nm)
3TC00-4AD3 200 75.5 50 56 187 1.3 M4 (4) 1.1 1.0 2.5
3TC01-0BD3 213 150 80 120 200 4.1 M4 (4) 1.5 1.5 6.0
3TC03-2CD3 245 185 80 156 232 6.6 M4 (4) 2.25 2.5 10

B.1 Options
B.1.7 External line filter Class B
WARNING
Risk of equipment damage and electric shocks
Some of the line filters in the table below have pin crimps for the connection to the
inverter's PE and mains terminals.
Use of these pin crimps can cause damage to the equipment and even electric shocks.
For safety reasons, replace the pin crimps using appropriately sized UL/cUL-certified fork or
ring crimps for PE terminal connection, and using UL/cUL-certified fork crimps or stranded
cables for mains terminal connection.
Note
The line filter with an article number of 6SE6400-2FL02-6BB0 in the following table has two
DC terminals (DC+, DC-) that are not used and should not be connected. The cables of
these terminals need to be cut back and suitably insulated (for example, with heat shrink
shroud).
Functionality
In order to achieve EN61800-3 Category C1/C2 (level equivalent to EN55011, Class B/A1)
Radiated and Conducted Emission, the external line filters shown below are required for the
SINAMICS V20 inverters (400 V filtered and unfiltered variants, as well as 230 V unfiltered
variants). In this case, only a screened output cable can be used, and the maximum cable
length is 25 m for the 400 V variants or 5 m for the 230 V variants.

B.1 Options
Ordering data
Frame size Inverter power rating Line filter class B

FSA 0.37 kW 6SL3203-0BE17-7BA0 380 V to 480 V 11.4 A
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
FSB 3 kW 6SL3203-0BE21-8BA0 380 V to 480 V 23.5 A
4 kW
FSC 5.5 kW
FSD 7.5 kW 6SL3203-0BE23-8BA0 380 V to 480 V 49.4 A
11 kW
15 kW
FSE 18.5 kW 6SL3203-0BE27-5BA0 380 V to 480 V 72 A
22 kW
FSAA/FSAB 0.12 kW 6SL3203-0BB21-8VA0 200 V to 240 V 20 A
0.25 kW
0.37 kW
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
FSAC 1.1 kW
1.5 kW
FSB 1.1 kW 6SE6400-2FL02-6BB0 200 V to 240 V 26 A
1.5 kW
FSC 2.2 kW
3 kW Siemens recommends you to use the line filter of Type "EPCOS B84113H000
G136" or equivalent.

B.1 Options
Installation
For the EMC-compliant installation of the external line filters, refer to Section "EMC-
compliant installation (Page 45)".
Connecting the line filter to FSAA ... FSA

The figure below is an example that shows how to connect the line fiter to the inverter.

B.1 Options
Connecting the line filter to FSB ... FSE

The figure below is an example that shows how to connect the line fiter to the inverter.

B.1 Options
Mounting dimensions

(kg) section (mm2)
A B C D E Size Tightening Min. Max.
torque (Nm)
6SL3203-0BE17-7BA0 202 73 65 36.5 186 1.75 M4 (4) 0.6 to 0.8 1.0 2.5
6SL3203-0BE21-8BA0 297 100 85 80 281 4.0 M4 (4) 1.5 to 1.8 1.5 6.0
6SL3203-0BE23-8BA0 359 140 95 120 343 7.3 M4 (4) 2.0 to 2.3 6.0 16.0
6SL3203-0BE27-5BA0 400 100 140 75 385 7.6 M6 (4) 3.0 16.0 50.0
6SL3203-0BB21-8VA0 168 59 53 - 143 0.9 M4 (2) 1.5 2.5 4
6SE6400-2FL02-6BB0 213 149 50.5 120 200 1.0 M5 (4) 1.5 1.5 6.0

B.1 Options
B.1.8 Shield connection kits
Functionality
The shield connection kit is supplied as an option for each frame size. It allows easy and
efficient connection of the necessary shield to achieve EMC-compliant installation of the
inverter (see Section "EMC-compliant installation (Page 45)" for details).
Components
Inverter variant Shield connection kit

Illustration Components
FSAA/FSAB Article number: 6SL3266-1AR00-0VA0 ① Shielding plate
② 3 × cable shield clamps
③ 4 × M4 screws (tightening torque: 1.8
Nm ± 10%)
FSAC Article number: 6SL3266-1AU00-0VA0 ① Shielding plate

Nm ± 10%)
FSA Article number: 6SL3266-1AA00-0VA0 ① Shielding plate

Nm ± 10%)

B.1 Options
Inverter variant Shield connection kit

Illustration Components
FSB Article number: 6SL3266-1AB00-0VA0 ① Shielding plate
② 2 × clips1)
③ 3 × cable shield clamps
④ 7 × M4 screws (tightening torque: 1.8
Nm ± 10%)
FSC Article number: 6SL3266-1AC00-0VA0 ① Shielding plate

② 2 × clips1)
Nm ± 10%) 2)
FSD/FSE Article number: 6SL3266-1AD00-0VA0 (FSD) ① Shielding plate

Article number: 6SL3266-1AE00-0VA0 (FSE)
② 2 × clips1)
Nm ± 10%) 2)
1) The clips are required only when fixing the shielding plate to the cabinet panel-mounted inverter.
2) For "push-through" applications, you must use two M5 screws and nuts (tightening torque: 2.5 Nm ± 10%) rather than
two M4 screws (" " in the illustration) to fix the shielding plate to the inverter.

B.1 Options
Fixing the shield connection kit to the inverter
If the inverter applies cabinet-panel mounting mode:

Fixing to FSAA/FSAB ① Loosen the PE screw and slide the shielding plate
from below, then retighten the screw to 1.8 Nm (toler-
ance: ± 10%).
② Fold the cable shield clamp to suit the cable diameter
during inverter installation.

B.1 Options
Fixing to FSA/FSAC ① Loosen the PE screw and slide the shielding plate
from below, then retighten the screw to 1.8 Nm (toler-
ance: ± 10%).
② Clamp the heatsink between the shielding plate and
the cabinet panel and tighten the screws and nuts to 1.8
Nm (tolerance: ± 10%).
③ Fold the cable shield clamp to suit the cable diameter
Fixing to FSB/FSC/FSD/FSE ① Clamp the heatsink between the clip and the shielding
plate, and tighten the screw to 1.8 Nm (tolerance: ± 10%).

B.1 Options
If the inverter applies push-through mounting mode:

Fixing to FSB/FSC/FSD/FSE Note that the clips are not required in this case.
① Clamp the heatsink between the shielding plate and
the cabinet panel, and use two mating nuts instead of the
clips to tighten the screws (M4 screws if frame size B or
M5 screws if frame size C or D) from the back of the cab-
inet panel. Screw tightening toque: M4 = 1.8 Nm ± 10%;
M5 = 2.5 Nm ± 10%
B.1.9 Memory card
Functionality
A memory card can be used on the Parameter Loader and allows you to upload/download
parameter sets to/from the inverter. For detailed use of the memory card, refer to Appendix
"Parameter Loader (Page 345)".
Article number
Recommended SD card: 6SL3054-4AG00-2AA0
B.1.10 RS485 termination resistor

An RS485 termination resistor is used to terminate the bus for the RS485 communication
between the SINAMICS V20 and SIEMENS PLCs. For detailed use of the termination
resistor, refer to Section "Communicating with the PLC (Page 169)".
Article number: 6SL3255-0VC00-0HA0

B.1 Options
B.1.11 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
Note
The SINAMICS V20 inverter has been designed to be protected by fuses; however, as the
inverter can cause a DC current in the protective earthing conductor, if a Residual Current
Circuit Breaker (RCCB) is to be used upstream in the supply, observe the following:
• SINAMICS V20 single phase AC 230 V inverters (filtered) FSAC can be operated only on
a type A 100 mA or type B(k) 300 mA RCCB.
• All SINAMICS V20 three phase AC 400 V inverters (filtered or unfiltered) can be operated
on a type B(k) 300 mA RCCB.
• SINAMICS V20 three phase AC 400 V inverters (unfiltered) FSA to FSD and FSA
(filtered) can be operated on a type B(k) 30 mA RCCB.
• When multiple inverters are in use, one inverter must be operated on one RCCB of the
corresponding type; otherwise, overcurrent trips will occur.
1)To use a type A RCCB, the regulations in this FAQ must be followed: Siemens Web site
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49232264)
Ordering data
Frame size Inverter power Recommended RCCB article number 1)

rating RCCB Type A 30 RCCB Type RCCB Type A(k) RCCB Type B(k) RCCB Type B(k)
mA A 100 mA 30 mA 2) 30 mA 3) 300 mA
FSA 0.37 kW to 2.2 - - - 5SM3342-4 5SM3642-4
kW
FSB 3 kW to 4 kW
FSC 5.5 kW
FSD 7.5 kW - - - 5SM3344-4 5SM3644-4
11 kW - - - 5SM3346-4 5SM3646-4
15 kW
FSE 18.5 kW - - - - 5SM3646-4
22 kW - - - - 5SM3647-4
FSAA/FSA 0.12 kW to 5SM3311-6 - 5SM3312-6KL01 5SM3321-4 5SM3621-4
B 0.75 kW
FSAC 1.1 kW 5SM3312-6 5SM3412-6 5SM3322-4 5SM3622-4
1.5 kW 5SM3314-6 5SM3414-6 5SM3314-6KL01 5SM3324-4 5SM3624-4
FSB 1.1 kW 5SM3312-6 - 5SM3312-6KL01 5SM3322-4 5SM3622-4
1.5 kW 5SM3314-6 5SM3314-6KL01 5SM3324-4 5SM3624-4
FSC 2.2 kW
3 kW 5SM3316-6 5SM3316-6KL01 5SM3326-4 5SM3626-4
1) You can select commercially available 5SM3 series RCCBs (as given in the table) or equivalent.
2) Letter "k" in the RCCB type names indicates RCCB types with time delay.
3) SINAMICS V20 three phase AC 400 V inverters (filtered) FSB to FSD cannot be operated on a type B(k) 30 mA RCCB.

B.1 Options
B.1.12 DIN rail mounting kits (only for FSAA ... FSB)
Article numbers:
● 6SL3261-1BA00-0AA0 (for frame size AA/AB/AC/A)
● 6SL3261-1BB00-0AA0 (for frame size B)
B.1.13 Migration mounting kit for FSAA ... FSAC

Article numbers:
● 6SL3266-1ER00-0VA0 (for frame size AA/AB)
● 6SL3266-1EB00-0VA0 (for frame size AC)
Functionality
As frame size FSAA/FSAB has smaller outline dimensions, this migration mounting kit is
supplied for easy installation of frame size AA/AB inverters to the G110 control cabinet or
DIN rail. If the holes on your control cabinet were drilled to match frame size A, you can drill
additional holes according to the outline dimensions of FSAA/FSAB, or use this option for
installation.
Frame size FSAC can be directly installed to an FSA DIN rail mounting kit. You can also use
the migration mounting kit for FSAC to install the FSAC to an FSB DIN rail mounting kit. If
the holes on your control cabinet were drilled to match frame size B, you can drill additional
holes according to the outline dimensions of FSAC, or use this option for an FSAC inverter.

B.1 Options
For FSAA/FSAB For FSAC
4 × M4 screws
2 × M4 screws
Maximum tightening torque: 2.0 Nm; screw length: 6 mm ... 10 mm
Fixing the migration mounting kit to the inverter

● Cabinet-panel mounting mode:

B.1 Options
● DIN rail mounting mode:

B.1 Options
B.1.14 SINAMICS V20 Smart Access

Article number: 6SL3255-0VA00-5AA0
Functionality
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access is a Web server module with integrated Wi-Fi connectivity. It
allows Web-based access to the inverter from a connected device (conventional PC with
wireless network adapter installed, tablet or smart phone) to realize inverter operations
including quick commissioning, inverter parameterization, JOG, monitoring, diagnostics,
backup and restore, etc. This module is only for commissioning and thus cannot be used
with the inverter permanently. For more information, see Chapter "Commissioning using
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access (Page 135)".
Button description
The reset button on SINAMICS V20 Smart Access enables you to perform the following
functions:
● Basic upgrading (Page 164)
● Wi-Fi configuration resetting
For more information, see the description later in this section.

B.1 Options
Firmware version ≥ V01.02.05

Rated voltage 24 V DC
Wireless technology and working frequency Wi-Fi 2400 MHz to 2483.5 MHz
Maximum radio frequency power 17.5 dBm (EIRP*)
Wireless modulation type 802.11 b/g
Modulation technology • 802.11b: CCK, DSSS
• 802.11g: OFDM
Antenna gain 1.9 dBi
Extreme temperature range -10 °C to 60 °C
* EIRP means effective isotropic radiated power.
Note
The wireless communication distance (without barrier) can reach a maximum of 140 m;
however, this value can vary with the environmental conditions.
Fitting SINAMICS V20 Smart Access to the inverter
For more safety instructions during the fitting process, see Section "Fitting SINAMICS V20
Smart Access to the inverter (Page 137)".

B.1 Options
Resetting Wi-Fi configuration

When the inverter is in power-on state, pressing the reset button on the module resets the
Wi-Fi configuration to defaults:
● Wi-Fi SSID: V20 smart acess_xxxxxx ("xxxxxx" stands for the last six characters of the
MAC address of SINAMICS V20 Smart Access)
● Wi-Fi password: 12345678
● Frequency channel: 1
Note
Check and make sure the status LED lights up solid green/solid yellow or flashes green
before pressing the reset button to reset the Wi-Fi configuration. After you press the reset
button, make sure you keep the button pressed until the status LED flashes yellow. Only
then can the Wi-Fi configuration be reset successfully with the reset button.
Status LED
LED color Meaning

Solid red One client is connected to the module and USS communication be-
tween the module and the inverter fails.
Solid green The module is running and one client is connected to it.
Solid yellow The module is running and no client is connected to it.
Flashing Flashing at 1 Hz No client is connected to the module and USS communication be-
red tween the module and the inverter fails. *
Flashing at 0.5 Hz The module is starting.
Flashing green The module is running and one WebSocket channel is connected to it.
Flashing yellow Reminder of restarting the module.
Flashing red and yellow The Web application, firmware, or service package is upgrading.
alternatively
* In case of USS communication failure between the module and the inverter, you must
power off the module by sliding its power switch to "OFF" first, keep the reset button pressed
and power on the module by sliding its power switch to "ON", and then update the firmware
version of the module. For more information about firmware update, see Section "Upgrading
Web application and SINAMICS V20 Smart Access firmware versions (Page 164)".

B.1 Options
B.1.15 I/O Extension Module

Article number: 6SL3256-0VE00-6AA0
Functionality
The SINAMICS V20 I/O Extension Module supports the SINAMICS V20 400 V variants with
firmware version 3.94 and later versions. It expands the number of V20 I/O terminals,
enabling more inverter control functions. You can use the expansion port on the SINAMICS
V20 inverter to connect the module. This module provides an expansion port to connect the
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access or the BOP Interface Module.
Status LED
LED color Description

Solid yellow The module is powered on and is initializing.
Solid green The module works properly and the communication between the module and
the inverter is successfully established.
Flashing red at 2 Hz The communication between the module and the inverter fails.
Connecting the device

B.2 Spare parts - replacement fans
NOTICE
Equipment malfunctions due to improper installing or removing
Installing or removing the SINAMICS V20 I/O Extension Module when the V20 inverter is in
power-on state can cause malfunctions of the SINAMICS V20 I/O Extension Module.
• Make sure that the V20 inverter is powered off before installing or removing the
SINAMICS V20 I/O Extension Module.
Note
Remove the I/O Extension Module before fitting the Parameter Loader to upload and
download V20 parameters.
Wiring diagram and terminal description

For more information about the wiring diagram and terminal description, see Sections
"Typical system connections (Page 34)" and "Terminal description (Page 39)".
B.1.16 User documentation
Operating Instructions (Chinese version)

Article number: 6SL3298-0AV02-0FP0
Article numbers
● 6SL3200-0UF06-0AA0 (for frame size AC)
● 6SL3200-0UF01-0AA0 (for frame size A)
● 6SL3200-0UF02-0AA0 (for frame size B)
● 6SL3200-0UF03-0AA0 (for frame size C)
● 6SL3200-0UF04-0AA0 (for frame size D)
● 6SL3200-0UF05-0AA0 (for frame size E)

Replacing fans
Proceed through the steps as illustrated below to remove the fan from the inverter. To re-
assemble the fan, proceed in reverse order. When re-assembling the fan, make sure that the
arrow symbol ("A" in the illustration) on the fan points to the inverter rather than the fan
housing, the position for the fan cable exit point ("B") as well as the mounting orientation and
position of the cable connector ("C") are sufficient for connecting the fan cable to the inverter.
Replacing the fan from FSAC

Replacing the fan from FSA

Replacing the fan(s) from FSB, FSC or FSD

Replacing the fans from FSE

General license conditions C
For Resellers: In order to avoid infringements of the license conditions by the reseller or the
buyer these instructions and license conditions and accompanying CD – if applicable - have
to be forwarded to the buyers.
1) Siemens License Conditions

General License Conditions for Software Products for Automation and Drives
(2011-08-01)
1 Supply of Software to Licensee and Granting of Rights to use the Software
1.1 These General License Conditions shall exclusively apply to the delivery of Software for
Automation and Drives to the Licensee. General terms and conditions of the Licensee shall
apply only where expressly accepted in writing by us. The scope of delivery of the Software
shall be determined by the congruent mutual written declarations of both parties. We shall
grant the Licensee rights to use the software specified in the Confirmation of Order or, if the
Licensee does not receive a Confirmation of Order, the software specified in the Certificate
of License or that specified in the Software Product Sheet, if the Licensee is instead
submitted a Software Product Sheet (hereinafter referred to as "SW"). The Certificate of
License and the Software Product Sheet shall be collectively referred to as "CoL" hereinafter.
The Licensee shall be submitted the CoL when the SW is supplied or in conjunction with the
delivery bill. The way in which the SW is supplied is also derived directly from the
Confirmation of Order or from the SW purchase order number contained in the Confirmation
of Order, in conjunction with the associated order data of our catalog valid at the time of the
Confirmation of Order (hereinafter collectively referred to as "Order Data"), or from the CoL.
If the Licensee does not receive a data medium, it shall be authorized to copy the SW
already available to it to the extent necessary to exercise the rights to use the SW granted to
it. The aforesaid shall apply, mutatis mutandis, to electronic supply of the software
(downloading). Where reference is made to the Order Data or the CoL in these General
License Conditions, the reference to the CoL is of significance if the Licensee has not
received a Confirmation of Order. In any case, the data contained in the Order Data is also
contained in the CoL.
1.2 The Documentation relating to the SW (hereinafter referred to as "Documentation") shall
be purchased separately, unless either the Order Data or CoL contains a stipulation stating
that it belongs to the scope of delivery. If the Licensee is authorized to copy the SW in
accordance with Clause 1.1, this shall also apply to the Documentation provided that it is
included in the scope of delivery.
1.3 In the event that we submit a License Key to the Licensee, which unlocks the SW
(hereinafter referred to as "License Key"), this License Key must also be installed.
1.4 The rights granted to the Licensee with respect to the SW are based on the License
Type (see Section 2) and the Software Type (see Section 3). The license and Software
Types are detailed in the Order Data or CoL. If the SW is supplied electronically or if copying
rights are granted for it, the rights and duties specified in these General License Conditions
shall apply to the legitimately generated copies.

General license conditions
1.5 If the Licensee is legitimately in possession of a previous SW version/release

(hereinafter referred to as "Previous Version"), the Licensee shall be authorized to exercise
the rights to use the SW granted to it either with respect to the SW or - if this is intended from
a technical point of view - to the Previous Version, at its own discretion (downgrading). If the
SW is an Upgrade or PowerPack in accordance with Section 4, Section 4 shall apply
additionally.
1.6 If Previous Versions are listed in the Readme file of the SW under the category “parallel
use”, the Licensee has the right to exercise, alternatively to the user rights granted to him for
the SW, the user rights for the listed Previous Versions in one (1) Instance. If the “Type of
use” named in the Order Data or the CoL is: “Installation” or “User”, the Licensee is entitled
to the previously described right additionally to and at the same time as the Previous
Versions listed in one Instance. An “Instance” in the context of these General License
Conditions is either an instance in a physical operating system environment or an instance in
a virtual operating system environment. The transferability of the user rights onto Previous
Versions is only permissible in conjunction with the user rights for the SW in accordance with
Clause 5.3.
1.7 In case the Licensee obtains only the data media but no license as per the Order Data or
the CoL, any use of the SW by the Licensee is subject to the acquisition of a license
according to Section 2. Up to the acquisition of the license, the Licensee is not entitled to
supply the SW to third parties.
1.8 In case the SW contains Open Source Software or any similar software of a third party
(hereinafter referred to as "OSS") the OSS is listed in the Readme_OSS-file of the SW. The
Licensee is entitled to use the OSS in accordance with the respective license conditions of
the OSS. The license conditions are provided on the same data carrier as the SW. The
license conditions of the respective OSS shall prevail over these General License Conditions
with respect to the OSS. If the license conditions of the OSS require the distribution of the
source code of such OSS we shall provide such source code on request against payment of
the shipping and handling charges.
1.9 The SW may be or contain licensed software other than OSS, i.e. software which has not
been developed by us itself but which has been licensed to us by a third party (hereinafter
referred to as the "Licensor"), e.g. Microsoft Licensing Inc. If the Licensee receives the terms
and conditions stipulated by the relevant Licensor together with the SW in the Readme_OSS
file in this case, such terms and conditions shall apply with respect to the Licensor's liability
vis-à-vis the Licensee. Our own liability vis-à-vis the Licensee shall be governed in any case
by these General License Conditions.
2 License Type
Depending on the License Type, the Licensee shall be granted the following rights to the SW:
2.1 Single License (One Off License, Copy License) The term "One Off License" or "Copy
License" which may be used in the Software Product Sheet corresponds to the term "Single
License". The following regulation shall apply to the full scope of the One Off License / Copy
License. The Licensee shall be granted the non-exclusive right, transferable in accordance
with Clause 5.3 and valid for an unlimited period of time, to install the SW in one (1) Instance
and to utilize the SW thus installed in the manner specified in the Order Data or CoL (see
"Type of Use").
2.2 Floating License The Licensee shall be granted the non-exclusive right, transferable in
accordance with Clause 5.3 and valid for an unlimited period of time, to install the SW on any
desired number of the Licensee's hardware devices. The number of objects (for example,

users or devices) permitted to utilize the SW at the same time can be derived from the Order
Data or CoL (see "Type of Use).
2.3 Rental License The Licensee shall be granted the non-exclusive right, transferable in
accordance with Clause 5.3 and limited in time as stipulated in the Order Data or CoL (see
"Type of Use"), to install and use the SW in one (1) Instance. If the period of use is specified
in hours, the usage decisive for the calculation of the time limit commences with the software
start-up and finishes with its shut-down. If the period of usage is specified in days, weeks or
months, the specified period, which commences in conjunction with the first SW start-up,
shall apply independently of the actual time of usage. If the period of use is specified with a
date, the right of use ends on this date – regardless of the actual period of use.
2.4 Rental Floating License The Licensee shall be granted the non-exclusive right,
transferable in accordance with Clause 5.3 and limited in time as stipulated in the Order Data
or the CoL (s. “Type of use”), to install the SW on any desired number of the Licensee's
hardware devices. The number of objects (for example, users or devices) permitted to utilize
the SW at the same time can be derived from the Order Data or CoL (see "Type of Use) as
well. If the period of use is specified in hours, the usage decisive for the calculation of the
time limit commences with the software start-up and finishes with its shut-down. If the period
of usage is specified in days, weeks or months, the specified period, which commences in
conjunction with the first SW start-up, shall apply independently of the actual time of usage.
If the period of use is specified with a date, the right of use ends on this date – regardless of
the actual period of use.
2.5 Demo License The Licensee shall be granted the non-exclusive right, transferable in
accordance with Clause 5.3 and limited in time as stipulated in the Order Data or the CoL (s.
“Type of use”), to install the SW in one (1) Instance and to use it for validation purposes. If
the period of usage is specified in days, weeks or months, the specified period, which
commences in conjunction with the first SW start-up, shall apply independently of the actual
time of usage. If the period of use is specified with a date, the right of use ends on this date –
regardless of the actual period of use.
2.6 Demo Floating License The Licensee shall be granted the non-exclusive right,
transferable in accordance with Clause 5.3 and limited in time as stipulated in the Order Data
or the CoL (s. “Type of use”), to install the SW on any desired number of the Licensee's
hardware devices. The number of objects (for example, users or devices) permitted to utilize
the SW at the same time can be derived from the Order Data or CoL (see "Type of Use) as
well. If the period of usage is specified in days, weeks or months, the specified period, which
commences in conjunction with the first SW start-up, shall apply independently of the actual
time of usage. If the period of use is specified with a date, the right of use ends on this date –
regardless of the actual period of use.
2.7 Trial License The Licensee shall be granted the non-exclusive and non-transferable right
to install the SW in one (1) Instance and to use it for validation purposes in the manner
specified in the Order Data or CoL (see "Type of Use"). The period of usage is limited to 14
days and commences with the SW start-up, unless a different period of usage is specified in
the Order Data or CoL.
3 Software Type
If the Software Type is not specified in the Order Data or CoL, the rights specified in Clause
3.2 (Runtime Software) shall apply to the SW.
3.1 Engineering Software (hereinafter referred to as "E-SW") In the event that the Licensee
uses E-SW to generate its own programs or data containing parts of the E-SW, the Licensee
shall have the right, without having to pay any license fee, to copy and to use these parts of

the E-SW as a part of its own programs or data, or to supply them to third parties for use. In
the event that such parts are supplied to third parties for use, these parties shall be bound in
writing to comply with stipulations corresponding to those in Clauses 5.1 and 5.2 with respect
to the above parts of the E-SW.
3.2 Runtime Software (hereinafter referred to as "R-SW") If the Licensee incorporates R-SW
or any parts thereof into its own programs or data, it shall purchase a license with respect to
the R-SW each time it installs or copies - depending on what is done first - its own programs
or data containing RSW or parts thereof, in accordance with the relevant intended Type of
Use and on the basis of the Siemens catalog valid at that time. In the event that the Licensee
supplies the specified programs or data to third parties for their use, these parties shall be
bound in writing to adhere to stipulations corresponding to those in Section 5, with respect to
the R-SW parts contained therein. The aforesaid shall not affect the Licensee's obligation to
purchase a license for the R-SW if the RSW original is copied. If the R-SW contains tools for
parameterization/configuration and extended rights have been granted in this regard, this will
be detailed in the readme file of the R-SW.
4 Upgrade and PowerPack
If it is apparent from the Order Data or CoL, e.g. by the addition "Upgrade" or “PowerPack”
after the SW product name, that the SW is an upgrade for another software item (hereinafter
referred to as "Source License"), the rights originally granted to the Licensee to use the
Source License end in conjunction with the upgrade measure. The rights of use in
accordance with Clause 1.6 remain unaffected by this. However, the Licensee is entitled to
undo the upgrading (downgrading) - if this is intended from a technical point of view - and to
exercise the rights to use the SW granted to it with respect to the Source Version in
accordance with Clause 1.5.
5 Further Rights and Duties of the Licensee
5.1 Unless a stipulation to the contrary relating to a specific number of copies is contained on
the data medium or in the readme file of the SW, the Licensee may generate an appropriate
number of copies of every item of SW which it is authorized to use in accordance with these
General License Conditions, where such copies shall be used exclusively for data backup
purposes. Furthermore the Licensee may only copy the SW if and insofar as it has been
granted copying rights by us in writing.
5.2 The Licensee shall not be entitled to modify, decompile or reverse engineer the SW. Nor
may it extract any individual parts unless this is permitted by mandatory copyright law.
Furthermore, the Licensee shall not be entitled to remove any alphanumeric identifiers,
trademarks or copyright notices from the SW or the data medium and, insofar as it is entitled
to make copies of the SW, shall copy them without alteration. The aforementioned regulation
shall apply accordingly to the Documentation supplied in accordance with Section 1.
5.3 The Licensee shall be entitled to completely transfer the right to use the SW granted to it
to a third party, provided that it concludes a written agreement with the third party in
conformance with all of the conditions contained in this Section 5 and on the proviso that it
does not retain any copies of the SW. If the Licensee has received a License Key for the SW,
this key shall be supplied to the third party together with the SW. Furthermore, the third party
shall be submitted the CoL together with these General License Conditions. The Licensee
shall submit the CoL received for the SW to us at any time, if requested.
5.4 If the SW is a PowerPack or an Upgrade, the Licensee shall keep the CoL of the Source
License and submit it to us at any time, if requested, together with the CoL for the SW. In the
event that the Licensee transfers its right to use the PowerPack SW or Upgrade SW in

accordance with Clause 5.3, it shall also submit the CoL of the Source License to the third
party.
5.5 If the Licensee receives a data medium which, in addition to the SW, contains further
software products which are released for use, then it shall have the right to use these
released software products exclusively for validation purposes, for a limited period of time
and free of charge. The period of use shall be limited to 14 days, commencing with the first
start-up of the relevant software program unless a different period is specified e.g. in the
readme file of the relevant software product. These software products supplied exclusively
for validation purposes shall be governed, mutatis mutandis, by the stipulations contained in
these General License Conditions. The Licensee shall not be authorized to pass on these
software products separately, i.e. without the SW, to a third party.
The conditions of the purchase contract apply if not otherwise stipulated hereafter for the
Open Source Software.
2) License Conditions and Disclaimers for Open Source Software and other Licensed Software
In the product "SINAMICS V20", Copyright Siemens AG, 2015 (hereinafter "Product"), the
following Open Source Software is used either unchanged or in a form that we have modified,
and additionally the other License Software noted below:
Liability for Open Source Software

Open Source Software is provided free of charge. We are liable for the Product including
Open Source Software contained in accordance with the license conditions applicable to the
Product. Any liability for use of Open Source Software beyond the program flow intended for
the Product is explicitly excluded. Furthermore, any liability for defects resulting from
modifications to the Open Source Software by you or third parties is excluded.
We do not provide any technical support for the Product if it has been modified.
Availability of Source Code

Certain license conditions of third-party software components used in this product may
require Siemens to provide you with the source code and additional information for such
components. In most cases, Siemens provides this information on or with the device. In case
Siemens is technically unable to do so, you may request a copy of this information against
payment of shipping and handling charges. Please send your request to the address
provided at the end of this section.
Siemens AG
Digital Factory
Customer Services DF&PD
DF CS SD CCC TS
Gleiwitzer Str. 555
90475 Nuernberg, Deutschland
Internet: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request
Tel.: +49 911 895 7222
Email: [email protected]

Please note the following license conditions and copyright notices applicable to Open
Source Software and other License Software:
Component Open Source Software ("OSS") Copyright Information / File

[Yes/No]
FatFS R0.08a YES LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION FOR
COMPONENT FATFS R0.08A
FatFS R0.10c 1) YES LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION FOR
COMPONENT FATFS R0.10c
Jquery.touchSwipe.js 1.6.15 2) YES LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION FOR
COMPONENT jquery.touchSwipe.js 1.6.15
TI CC3200 HTTPServer 1.2.0 3) YES LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION FOR
COMPONENT TI CC3200 HTTPServer 1.2.0
GNU GCC libgcc 4.8.3 YES LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION FOR
COMPONENT GNU GCC LIBGCC 4.8.3
Lua 5.2.1 YES LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION FOR
COMPONENT LUA 5.2.1
STM32F4xx Standard Peripherals NO LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT INFORMATION FOR
Library V1.3.0 COMPONENT STM32F4XX STANDARD
PERIPHERALS LIBRARY V1.3.0
1), 2), 3) Apply to SINAMICS V20 Smart Access only
LICENSE CONDITIONS AND COPYRIGHT NOTICES

For detailed information about license conditions and copyright notices of the individual
software mentioned in the above table, visit Siemens Service and Support Web site at
https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13208.

Index
A P0840[0...2], 225
P0842[0...2], 226
Advanced functions
P0843[0...2], 226
Automatic restart, 117
P0844[0...2], 226
Blockage clearing, 111
P0845[0...2], 226
Cavitation protection, 126
P0848[0...2], 226
Condensation protection, 119
P0849[0...2], 226
Dual ramp function, 128
P0852[0...2], 227
Economy mode, 113
P0881[0...2], 227
Flying start, 116
P0882[0...2], 227
Free functions blocks (FFBs), 115
P0883[0...2], 227
Frost protection, 118
P1020[0...2], 236
Hammer start, 109
P1021[0...2], 236
High/low overload (HO/LO) mode, 132
P1022[0...2], 236
Motor staging, 123
P1023[0...2], 237
Sleep mode, 120
P1035[0...2], 237
Super torque, 108
P1036[0...2], 237
UL508C/UL61800-5-1-compliant motor overheat
P1041[0...2], 238
protection, 114
P1043[0...2], 238
User default parameter set, 127
P1055[0...2], 239
Wobble function, 122
P1056[0...2], 239
Alarm code list, 331
P1074[0...2], 240
Article numbers of inverters, 17
P1110[0...2], 242
P1113[0...2], 243
P1124[0...2], 244
B
P1140[0...2], 245
Basic functions P1141[0...2], 245
Boost functions, 89 P1142[0...2], 245
Braking functions, 93 P1175[0...2], 245
Imax controller, 104 P1218[0...2], 250
JOG function, 88 P1230[0...2], 250
Load torque monitoring, 106 P2103[0...2], 278
OFF functions, 85 P2104[0...2], 278
PID controller, 91 P2106[0...2], 278
Ramp time, 102 P2200[0...2], 284
Vdc controller, 105 P2220[0...2], 286
BI P2221[0...2], 286
P0731[0...2], 218 P2222[0...2], 286
P0732[0...2], 218 P2223[0...2], 287
P0733[0...2], 218 P2235[0...2], 287
P0734[0...2], 218 P2236[0...2], 287
P0806, 224 P2241[0...2], 288
P0810, 225 P2243[0...2], 288
P0811, 225 P2810[0...1], 301
P0820, 225 P2812[0...1], 302
P0821, 225 P2814[0...1], 302

Index
P2816[0...1], 302 r2858.0, 308

P2818[0...1], 302 r2862.0, 309
P2820[0...1], 303 r2863.0, 309
P2822[0...1], 303 r2867.0, 309
P2824[0...1], 303 r2868.0, 309
P2826[0...1], 303 r2886.0, 312
P2828, 304 r2888.0, 312
P2830, 304 Built-in BOP
P2832, 304 button functions, 52
P2834[0...3], 305 operating modes Hand/Jog/Auto, 52
P2837[0...3], 305 screen displays, 58
P2840[0...1], 306 status icons, 53
P2843[0...1], 306 status LEDs, 59
P2846[0...1], 306
P2849, 307
P2854, 308 C
P2859, 308
CDS
P2864, 309
P0700[0...2], 212
P2940, 312
P0701[0...2], 213
P3351[0...2], 316
P0702[0...2], 214
P3852[0...2], 318
P0703[0...2], 214
BO
P0704[0...2], 214
r0807.0, 224
P0705[0...2], 214
r1025.0, 237
P0706[0...2], 214
r2036.0...15, 276
P0712[0...2], 214
r2037.0...15, 276
P0713[0...2], 214
r2225.0, 287
P0719[0...2], 215
r2811.0, 302
P0727[0...2], 216
r2813.0, 302
P0731[0...2], 218
r2815.0, 302
P0732[0...2], 218
r2817.0, 302
P0733[0...2], 218
r2819.0, 303
P0734[0...2], 218
r2821.0, 303
P0840[0...2], 225
r2823.0, 303
P0842[0...2], 226
r2825.0, 303
P0843[0...2], 226
r2827.0, 304
P0844[0...2], 226
r2829.0, 304
P0845[0...2], 226
r2831.0, 304
P0848[0...2], 226
r2833.0, 304
P0849[0...2], 226
r2835.0, 305
P0852[0...2], 227
r2836.0, 305
P0881[0...2], 227
r2838.0, 305
P0882[0...2], 227
r2839.0, 305
P0883[0...2], 227
r2841.0, 306
P0886[0...2], 227
r2842.0, 306
P1000[0...2], 233
r2844.0, 306
P1020[0...2], 236
r2845.0, 306
P1021[0...2], 236
r2847.0, 306
P1022[0...2], 236
r2848.0, 306
P1023[0...2], 237
r2852.0, 308
P1035[0...2], 237
r2853.0, 308
P1036[0...2], 237
r2857.0, 308
P1041[0...2], 238

Index
P1042[0...2], 238 P2242[0...2], 288

P1043[0...2], 238 P2244[0...2], 288
P1044[0...2], 238 P2253[0...2], 289
P1055[0...2], 239 P2254[0...2], 289
P1056[0...2], 239 P2264[0...2], 290
P1070[0...2], 240 P2869[0...1], 309
P1071[0...2], 240 P2871[0...1], 310
P1074[0...2], 240 P2873[0...1], 310
P1075[0...2], 240 P2875[0...1], 310
P1076[0...2], 240 P2877[0...1], 310
P1110[0...2], 242 P2879[0...1], 310
P1113[0...2], 243 P2881[0...1], 311
P1124[0...2], 244 P2883[0...1], 311
P1140[0...2], 245 P2885[0...1], 311
P1141[0...2], 245 P2887[0...1], 312
P1142[0...2], 245 Clone saved parameter settings, 346
P1175[0...2], 245 CO
P1218[0...2], 250 P2378, 297
P1230[0...2], 250 P2889, 312
P1330[0...2], 258 P2890, 312
P2103[0...2], 278 r0020, 191
P2104[0...2], 278 r0021, 191
P2106[0...2], 278 r0024, 191
P2200[0...2], 284 r0025, 191
P2220[0...2], 286 r0026[0], 191
P2221[0...2], 286 r0027, 191
P2222[0...2], 286 r0028, 191
P2223[0...2], 287 r0031, 191
P2235[0...2], 287 r0032, 191
P2236[0...2], 287 r0035[0...2], 192
P2241[0...2], 288 r0036, 192
P2242[0...2], 288 r0037[0...1], 192
P2243[0...2], 288 r0038, 192
P2244[0...2], 288 r0039, 192
P2253[0...2], 289 r0051[0...1], 193
P2254[0...2], 289 r0066, 196
P2264[0...2], 290 r0067, 196
P2803[0...2], 301 r0068, 196
P3351[0...2], 316 r0069[0...5], 196
P3852[0...2], 318 r0070, 196
CI r0071, 196
P0095[0...9], 197 r0072, 196
P0771[0], 222 r0074, 196
P1042[0...2], 238 r0078, 197
P1044[0...2], 238 r0080, 197
P1070[0...2], 240 r0084, 197
P1071[0...2], 240 r0085, 197
P1075[0...2], 240 r0086, 197
P1076[0...2], 240 r0087, 197
P1330[0...2], 258 r0395, 209
P2019[0...7], 273 r0512, 210
P2151[0...2], 280 r0623[0...2], 211

Index
r0630[0...2], 212 r0054.0...15, 194

r0631[0...2], 212 r0055.0...15, 195
r0632[0...2], 212 r0056.0...15, 195
r0633[0...2], 212 r0722.0...12, 215
r0755[0...1], 220 r0747.0...1, 219
r0947[0...63], 228 r0751.0...9, 219
r0949[0...63], 229 r0785.0, 223
r0954[0...2], 229 r0955[0...2], 230
r0956[0...2], 230 r1199.7...12, 246
r0957[0...2], 230 r2067.0...12, 277
r0958[0...2], 230 r2197.0...12, 283
r1024, 237 r2198.0...12, 284
r1045, 239 r2349, 292
r1050, 239 r2379.0...2, 298
r1078, 240 r2399, 299
r1079, 240 r3113.0...15, 313
r1114, 243 r3365, 318
r1119, 243 Communication
r1170, 245 MODBUS communication, 173
r1242, 253 USS communication, 169
r1246[0...2], 253 Connecting
r1315, 257 EMC-compliant cabinet design, 48
r1337, 259 EMC-compliant installation, 45
r1343, 261 terminal layout, 39
r1344, 261 typical system connections, 34
r1801[0...1], 262 wiring diagram, 37
r2018[0...7], 271
r2110[0...3], 278
r2224, 287 D
r2245, 289
DDS
r2250, 289
P0291[0...2], 202
r2260, 290
P0301[0...2], 203
r2262, 290
P0304[0...2], 203
r2266, 290
P0305[0...2], 204
r2272, 291
P0307[0...2], 204
r2273, 291
P0308[0...2], 204
r2294, 292
P0309[0...2], 205
r2870, 309
P0310[0...2], 205
r2872, 310
P0311[0...2], 205
r2874, 310
P0314[0...2], 205
r2876, 310
P0320[0...2], 205
r2878, 310
P0335[0...2], 206
r2880, 311
P0340[0...2], 206
r2882, 311
P0341[0...2], 207
r2884, 311
P0342[0...2], 207
r2955, 313
P0344[0...2], 207
r3237.0...1, 314
P0346[0...2], 207
CO/BO, 190
P0347[0...2], 208
r0019.0...14, 190
P0350[0...2], 208
r0050, 193
P0352[0...2], 208
r0052.0...15, 193
P0354[0...2], 208
r0053.0...15, 194
P0356[0...2], 208

Index
P0358[0...2], 208 P1232[0...2], 250

P0360[0...2], 208 P1233[0...2], 250
P0604[0...2], 210 P1234[0...2], 251
P0610[0...2], 211 P1236[0...2], 251
P0622[0...2], 211 P1240[0...2], 252
P0625[0...2], 211 P1243[0...2], 253
P0626[0...2], 212 P1245[0...2], 253
P0627[0...2], 212 P1247[0...2], 253
P0628[0...2], 212 P1250[0...2], 253
P0640[0...2], 212 P1251[0...2], 253
P1001[0...2], 234 P1252[0...2], 253
P1002[0...2], 235 P1253[0...2], 253
P1003[0...2], 235 P1256[0...2], 254
P1004[0...2], 235 P1257[0...2], 254
P1005[0...2], 235 P1300[0...2], 254
P1006[0...2], 235 P1310[0...2], 256
P1007[0...2], 235 P1311[0...2], 257
P1008[0...2], 235 P1312[0...2], 257
P1009[0...2], 235 P1316[0...2], 257
P1010[0...2], 236 P1320[0...2], 258
P1011[0...2], 236 P1321[0...2], 258
P1012[0...2], 236 P1322[0...2], 258
P1013[0...2], 236 P1323[0...2], 258
P1014[0...2], 236 P1324[0...2], 258
P1015[0...2], 236 P1325[0...2], 258
P1016[0...2], 236 P1333[0...2], 258
P1031[0...2], 237 P1334[0...2], 259
P1040[0...2], 238 P1335[0...2], 259
P1047[0...2], 239 P1336[0...2], 259
P1048[0...2], 239 P1338[0...2], 260
P1058[0...2], 239 P1340[0...2], 260
P1060[0...2], 239 P1341[0...2], 260
P1061[0...2], 240 P1345[0...2], 261
P1080[0...2], 241 P1346[0...2], 261
P1082[0...2], 241 P1350[0...2], 261
P1091[0...2], 242 P1780[0...2], 262
P1092[0...2], 242 P1800[0...2], 262
P1093[0...2], 242 P1803[0...2], 262
P1094[0...2], 242 P1810, 263
P1101[0...2], 242 P1820[0...2, 263
P1120[0...2], 243 P1909[0...2], 263
P1121[0...2], 243 P2000[0...2], 265
P1130[0...2], 244 P2001[0...2], 266
P1131[0...2], 244 P2002[0...2], 266
P1132[0...2], 244 P2003[0...2], 267
P1133[0...2], 244 P2004[0...2], 267
P1134[0...2], 244 P2150[0...2], 280
P1135[0...2], 245 P2151[0...2], 280
P1138[0...2], 245 P2155[0...2], 280
P1139[0...2], 245 P2156[0...2], 280
P1202[0...2], 247 P2157[0...2], 280
P1227[0...2], 250 P2158[0...2], 280

Index
P2159[0...2], 280 P2373[0...2], 296

P2160[0...2], 280 P2374[0...2], 296
P2162[0...2], 280 P2375[0...2], 297
P2164[0...2], 280 P2376[0...2], 297
P2166[0...2], 280 P2377[0...2], 297
P2167[0...2], 281 P2378[0...2], 297
P2168[0...2], 281 P3853[0...2], 318
P2170[0...2], 281 P3854[0...2], 319
P2171[0...2], 281 r0035[0...2], 192
P2172[0...2], 281 r0313[0...2], 205
P2173[0...2], 281 r0330[0...2], 205
P2177[0...2], 281 r0331[0...2], 205
P2181[0...2], 282 r0332[0...2], 206
P2182[0...2], 282 r0333[0...2], 206
P2183[0...2], 282 r0345[0...2], 207
P2184[0...2], 282 r0370[0...2], 209
P2185[0...2], 283 r0372[0...2], 209
P2186[0...2], 283 r0373[0...2], 209
P2187[0...2], 283 r0374[0...2], 209
P2188[0...2], 283 r0376[0...2], 209
P2189[0...2], 283 r0377[0...2], 209
P2190[0...2], 283 r0382[0...2], 209
P2192[0...2], 283 r0384[0...2], 209
P2201[0...2], 285 r0386[0...2], 209
P2202[0...2], 285 r0623[0...2], 211
P2203[0...2], 285 r0630[0...2], 212
P2204[0...2], 285 r0631[0...2], 212
P2205[0...2], 285 r0632[0...2], 212
P2206[0...2], 285 r0633[0...2], 212
P2207[0...2], 285 r1246[0...2], 253
P2208[0...2], 285
P2209[0...2], 286
P2210[0...2], 286 F
P2211[0...2], 286
Fault code list, 324
P2212[0...2], 286
P2213[0...2], 286
P2214[0...2], 286
G
P2215[0...2], 286
P2216[0...2], 286 General license conditions, 395
P2231[0...2], 287
P2240[0...2], 288
P2247[0...2], 289 I
P2248[0...2], 289
Inverter functions, 83
P2360[0...2], 294
Inverter menu structure
P2361[0...2], 294
50/60 Hz selection menu, 60
P2362[0...2], 294
Display menu, 55
P2365[0...2], 294
Main menu, 53
P2366[0...2], 295
Parameter menu, 53, 80
P2367[0...2], 295
Setup menu, 63
P2370[0...2], 295
Setup menu: application macros sub-menu,
P2371[0...2], 295
Setup menu: common parameters sub-menu,
P2372[0...2], 296

Index
Setup menu: connection macros sub-menu, Parameter types, 56

Setup menu: motor data sub-menu, scaling, 187
Inverter status at fault, 324 Product maintenance, 4
L Q
List of modified parameters, 84 Quick commissioning
through the parameter menu, 79
through the setup menu, 62
M
Macros
R
application macros, 76
connection macros, 65 Replacement fans, 390
Mounting
cabinet panel mounting, 22
push-through mounting, 27 T
Mounting orientation and clearance, 21
Technical support, 4
Text menu
for common parameters, 78
O
for motor parameters, 64
Options
BOP Interface Module, 352
braking resistor, 358 U
DIN rail mounting kit, 383
Use of third-party products, 4
dynamic braking module, 355
User documentation components, 3
external BOP, 350
external line filter, 372
I/O Extension Module, 389
line reactor, 363
memory card, 381
migration mounting kit, 383
output choke, 368
Parameter Loader, 346
residual current circuit breaker (RCCB), 382
RS485 termination resistor, 381
shield connection kit, 377
SINAMICS V20 Smart Access, 386
user documentation, 390
P
Parameter resets, 133
Parameters
access levels, 186
BICO parameters, 184
C, C(1), C(30),U, T, 187
data set, 183
Digit-by-digit editing, 57
Normal editing of parameters, 56


Siemens Sinamics V20 Manual 06 2018

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Siemens Sinamics V20 Manual 06 2018

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Siemens Sinamics V20 Manual 06 2018

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

___________________

Siemens AG A5E34559884-010 Copyright © Siemens AG 2014 - 2018.

Purpose of this manual

SINAMICS V20 user documentation components

Document Content Available languages

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

Use of third-party products

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

5.5.1 Quick commissioning through the setup menu ...................................................................... 62

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

6.5 Viewing inverter information .................................................................................................141

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

B.1.14 SINAMICS V20 Smart Access ............................................................................................. 386

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

1.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge

1.3 Warranty and liability for application examples

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

1.4 Industrial security

Further information is provided on the Internet:

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

Three phase AC 400 V variants

Component Rated output Rated Rated Output cur- Article number

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

Component Rated output Rated Rated Output cur- Article number

Single phase AC 230 V variants

Component Rated out- Rated input Rated out- Article number

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

Options and spare parts

2.2 Inverter rating plate

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

Serial number explanation (example)

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

Protection against condensation or electrically conductive contamination

3.1 Mounting orientation and clearance

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

3.2 Cabinet panel mounting

Outline dimensions and drill patterns

Dimensions (mm) Drill pattern (mm)

Fixings: 2 x M4 screws, nuts, washers

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

Dimensions (mm) Drill pattern (mm)

Fixings: 2 x M4 screws, nuts, washers

2) Height Fixings: 4 x M4 screws, nuts, washers

Fixings: 4 x M4 screws, nuts, washers

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

Dimensions (mm) Drill pattern (mm)

Fixings: 4 x M5 screws, nuts, washers

Fixings: 4 x M5 screws, nuts, washers

Fixings: 4 x M5 screws, nuts, washers

SINAMICS V20 Inverter

3.3 SINAMICS V20 Flat Plate variant

Flat Plate variant Average power output